Home

Service Manual 1503C Metallic Time

1. ios estne vals E rre v e REESE 5 25 Display Module een e rre e reet ral me epu SE 5 29 Option 06 5 41 Calibration and Adjustments Calibration 6 1 I U duetff Br z lu s suyuykupas 6 1 Calibration Performance Check 6 1 Display Mod le dilate 6 2 Front Panel C heck sirms ed Ris 6 4 Horizontal Scale Timebase 6 8 Vertical Position Offset Check 6 10 oto y a 6 12 Impedance Check ite ae niece eva rtr EZE RP 6 14 Offset Gaim Z ya cur ce PS 6 14 RAM ROM CHECK s 55er epe Wie 2a el TEE EE EP S 6 15 Pulse Bal nce Check ya a 6 16 Pulse Width Check e yay re Ma REESE E 6 17 Auto Pulse Select Check M ES 6 20 Check uz apana a 6 21 Aberrations CHECK IA M ES 6 23 Pulse Amphtude Check 25055 gea P 6 27 Option 04 07
2. PP 1503C OPTION 06 CKT BD ASSY SEE A6 REPL SCR ASSEM WSHR 6 32 X 0 312 PNH POZ SPACER POST 0 937 L W 6 32THD AL 0 25 HEX CONN HDR MALE RTANG 2 X 10 GUIDE CKT BD POLYCARBONATE 2 5L POWER SUPPLY CKT BD ASSY SEE A3A1 REPL SCR ASSEM WSHR 4 40 X 0 25 PNH POZ CONN HDR MALE RTANG 2 X 7 CONN HDR MALE STR 1 X 31 W INSUL CONN HDR MALE STR 1 X 36 STR SEE CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS SCR MACH 6 32 X 0 312 PNH POZ NUT PL HEEX 6 32 X 0 188 IC SEE A3A1U2010 REPL SCR MACH 6 32 X 0 312 PNH POZ NUT PL HEX 6 32 X 0 188 TAPE PRESS SENS URETHANE FOAM INSUL SLVG ELEC 0 042 ID ACRYLIC F BRGLASS POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY WITH CHASSIS MOUNTED ELECTRICAL PARTS NUT BLOCK 4 40 X 0 282 SCR MACH 4 40 X 0 188 FLH POZ CHASSIS PWR SUPPLY SIDE SCR MACH 4 40 X 0 188 FLH POZ 201 XFMR PWR 115 230VAC 50 60HZ 201 XFMR PWR 115 230VAC 50 60HZ A3R101 RES V SENSITIVE 1900P F 100A 130V SCR MACH 8 32 X 0 188 TRH SST POZ WSHR LOCK 8 EXT 0 02 THK A3S201 SWITCH ROTARY BODY FUSEHLDR 3AG amp 5 X 20MM FUSES Mfr Code 78189 80009 53387 06915 0 01 53387 22562 22526 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 24963 91094 0 7N9 0914 0 01 0 01 08779 0 R03 34371 0 01 0 01 61935 61935 Mfr Part Number S51 060545 0X 385 0122 00 2520 5002UB TCG1 2 500 03 211 0661 00 2514 5002UB 65576 131 65507 B6
3. usss 3 4 Options and Accessories Options and Accessories 4 1 Option 04 YT 1 Chart 4 1 Option 05 Metric Default 4 1 Option 06 Ethernet 4 1 Option 07 YT 1S Chart Recorder 4 16 Option 08 Token Ring Adapter 4 17 Option 09 Universal Service Ordering Code 4 17 Option 10 Token Ring Interface 4 17 Power Cord Options eue eene Si Were ERE M Hien secte tet 4 18 Garis gaa a Baz s ole toe SUE DR Ee 4 19 1503C MTDR Service Manual i Table of Contents Circuit Descriptions Circuit 5 1 Introduction 2 oda 5 1 Power Supply pee vane bala e PER 5 4 Processor System u er ek rS E 5 7 Option Port Interface esee ee ret Yale x rre VERE RISE 5 10 Video PEOCeSSOR 2 iom ras ER SES 5 13 MAIMED ASC oett acest 5 15 Pulse Generator Sampler 1 2 5 23 Front Panel
4. gt lt gt IR4 13 14 lt lt gt 15 16 lt 6 gt SV 5V gt 17 18 lt lt 5 gt T 19 28 lt 4 gt 21 BD lt 3 gt 23 24 Bp lt 2 gt 18V SW ip 25 26 4 A B C POWER SUPPLY A3 5V 5V1 C4041 C7843 19uF 2 3 4 15 1 5 6 ISV 7 8 9 10 16 11 12 16v lt gt LOW NOT 6 AC_POWER_NOT lt gt 5V1 18uF FRONT PANEL A2 J6010 1 142 3 Ke gt 5 6 gt 7 DRAM NOT 35 s lt 11 gt 11 lt gt lt 9 gt gt 13 lt 7 gt 15 lt 5 gt v 17 lt 3 gt 19 KD 21 RD 23 lt gt gt 25 27 lt gt 625 KHz 29 16 gt 31 505 gt 33 ADC gt 35 37 6521 39 2 gt 4 1 lt 1 gt 6 gt 8 ny 5 19 1 lt 7 gt 12 lt 10 gt 14 lt 8 gt 16 lt 5 gt 18 Fn lt 4 gt 20 lt gt 22 lt 0 gt 24 O WR NOT 34 36 IR3 NOT lt gt 38 48 TRIG_ADC HEAT_EN x Diagrams 1503C
5. osx Figure 5 17 Column Driver Block Diagram Row Driver row driver is an 80 pin flat pack located on the Row Driver Controller Board It is composed of a 64 bit shift register U2020 a 64 bit latch and a 64 bit level shifter The row driver has the following relevant inputs ST lt start pulse gt Input to the shift register lt Din on SED 1190 gt m LP lt latch pulse LATCH Falling edge triggered this shifts data in the shift register and latches contents of the shift register into the latch Y Sc on SED 1190 m FR frame signal Defines the select and non select voltages 5 32 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 1 Frame 8 ms 5 63641 2 3 63 64 LARAK 2 2 lt 22 5 22 V5 Scanning select pulse 5 5 v2 V5 5 K V2 2 X LP LP v5 5 Vi pc 2 C 2 Figure 5 18 Row Timing Diagram The relevant outputs Row 1 through 64 are paralleled outputs driving both sides of the display One set of outputs drive rows 1 through 64 and the other set drive rows 65 through 128 on the LCD 1503C MTDR Service Ma
6. 5 31 Row Driver Block Diagram 5 31 Column Driver Block Diagram 5 32 Row Timing Diagram 5 33 1503 MTDR Service Manual Table of Contents 1503C MTDR Service Manual Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Column Timing Diagram Shit aaa oie aula CPU and Display Memory Interface Option 06 Ethernet Block Diagram Typical Start Up Waveform the Display Setup Men pu aaa aquqa aq via bees Diagnostics Menu Front Panel Diagnostic Display Front Panel Diagnostic Display Front Panel Diagnostic Display Front Panel Diagnostic Display Waveform on the Display with N
7. CAUTION The collision signal will stop most traffic on the network This might abort many application programs and might cause communications problems When this test is on the 1503C will assert 1 7 VDC level 50 Q load 3 4 VDC open circuit This signal is intended to be equivalent to the average of two colliding Ethernet transmissions and should trigger the collision detect circuit on all the transceivers This should cause applications to back off and retry then eventually abort as defined in the 802 3 standard Therefore it can be used to test units that do not respond to this signal or to stop traffic for TDR testing Customizing Your Own Tests Access the Acquisition Control Menu located under the Setup Menu The various tests listed can be used in any combination Remember that the tests will not be activated until you return the 1503C to normal operation so any combination can be chosen then activated Options and Accessories 4 10 Waveform Signatures By now you probably have a good idea what traffic looks like on the display and how you can use the NOISE FILTER to reduce it Other signatures might also appear on the display Terminators are small reflections seen as stationary bumps and dips A perfect terminator would not reflect any energy and theoretically would be invisible on the 1503C display Because of small impedance differences between the cable and the terminator a small amount of ene
8. Figure 1 30 A Captured Single Sweep 8 To exit Single Sweep is On access the Acquisition Control Menu again turn the Single Sweep back off then repeatedly push MENU until the instrument returns to normal operation 1503C MTDR Service Manual 1 27 Operating Instructions 1 28 1503 MTDR Service Manual Operator Performance Checks Equipment Required Getting Ready Power On Metric Instruments 1503C MTDR Service Manual This chapter contains performance checks for many of the functions of the 1503C They are recommended for incoming inspections to verify that the instrument is functioning properly Procedures to verify the actual performance requirements are provided in the Chapter 6 Performing these checks will assure you that your instrument is in good working condition These checks should be performed upon receipt of a new instrument or one that has been serviced or repaired It does not test all portions of the instrument to Calibration specifications The purpose of these checks is not to familiarize a new operator with the instrument If you are not experienced with the instrument you should read the Operating Instructions chapter of this manual before going on with these checks If the instrument fails any of these checks it should be serviced Many failure modes affect only some of the instrument functions Item Tektronix Part Number 50 Q precision terminator 011 0123 00 93 Q 10 f
9. Figure 2 8 Waveform with Gain at 57 dB oe Press MENU Using the 9 POSITION control select Diagnostics Menu Press MENU again Using the 5 POSITION control select Service Diagnostic Menu Press MENU again Using the 4 9 POSITION control select Noise Diagnostics Press MENU again and follow the instructions on the display Operator Performance Checks 2 6 4 Offset Gain Check 5 Impedance Check 6 Sampling Efficiency Check 7 Aberrations Check 9 Exit from Noise Diagnostics but do not exit from the Service Diagnostic Menu yet If the instrument fails this check it should not be used for loss or impedance measurements Send it to be serviced when possible 1 In the Service Diagnostic Menu select the Offset Gain Diagnostic and follow the directions on the display There are three screens of data presented in this diagnostic The Pass Fail level is 3 for any single gain setting tested 2 Exit from Offset Gain Diagnostic but do not leave the Service Diagnostic Menu yet If the instrument fails this check it should not be used for loss or impedance measurements 1 In the Service Diagnostic Menu select the Impedance Diagnostic and follow the directions on the screen Passable tolerances are 50 Q 47 0 to 50 0 Q 75 0 71 0 to 75 0 Q 93 Q 88 to 93 Q 125 Q 118 to 125 Q 2 Exit from the Impedance Diagnostic but do not leave the Service Diagnostic Menu yet If the instr
10. 8 14 Serial No Discont d Qty Serial No Effective Tektronix Part Number 322 3306 00 322 3310 00 322 3342 00 321 0038 00 322 3097 00 322 3280 00 322 3097 00 322 3222 00 322 3306 00 322 3234 00 322 3126 00 322 3371 00 322 3331 00 311 0633 00 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 156 2760 00 156 2763 00 156 1225 00 156 2473 00 156 2473 00 156 2583 00 156 2587 00 156 3059 00 156 2392 00 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Name amp Description RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 16 5K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 35 7K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 24 3 OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 8 06K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 2 00K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 2 67K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 200 OHM 196 0 2W RES FXD FILM 71 5K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 27 4K OHM 1 0 2W RES VAR NONWW TRMR 5K OHM 0 5W CERMET TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST P
11. 4 Connect the negative probe to TP1010 ground L O TP1020 040 F C R05 o AUT uuo Sp R1010 4 R1012 3l cion 02020 GRE JEROME VR1012 C1012 1013 104 4 R1022 Q1010 L i 4 R1018 L 211023 f 4 R1014 cfs 7 TP1010 CRION 186 11010 101 003 Figure 6 59 Power Supply Test Points 1020 1010 5 Verify that the supply voltage is 16 6 VDC and there is a minimal current drawn lt 2W from the Variac 6 Connect the positive voltmeter probe to TP2030 The negative voltmeter probe should remain connected to ground The reading should be 16 2 VDC see following table for tolerances 6 39 Adjustment Procedures 6 40 C2030 L 297 j 4 2025 T1030 8 02030 5 82026 i 2021 Ecc 02030 Q2022 02031 CR2030 B R22 CR203 82030 c2024 CR202 Figure 6 60 Power Supply Test Point TP2030 Supply Range Test Point Location 16 2 VDC 15 9 to 416 4 VDC TP 2030 Power Supply Board 5 0 VDC 4 85 to 5 25 VDC Pin 1 5040 Main Board 5 0 VDC 4 85 to 5 25 VDC Pin 3 5040 Main Boa
12. 1A1C1010 1A1C1011 1C1020 1C1021 1C1022 1C1023 1C1024 1C1030 1C1031 1 1032 1 1040 1 1041 1 1042 1 1043 1A1C2010 1A1C2011 1A1C 2012 1A1C 2013 1A1C2014 1A1C2015 1A1C2016 1A1C2020 F gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt eee 3 3 ge me e de 5 3 8 5 5 8 6 Serial Serial No Effective Tektronix Part Number 672 1388 XX 160 9008 00 146 0049 00 672 1390 XX 160 4411 06 146 0049 00 670 9285 XX 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 283 0359 01 283 0359 01 283 0359 01 283 0190 00 281 0925 01 283 0359 01 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 290 1087 00 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 290 0748 00 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 283 0111 04 283 0238 00 281 0925 01 Discont d Qty Name amp Description Mfr Code CKT BD ASSY MAIN BOARD W EPROM amp BATTERY STANDARD INSTRUMENT IC DGTL EPROM PRGM BATTERY STORAGE 3 5V 750MAH SFTY CONT 80009 81855 CKT BD ASSY MAIN BOARD E EPROM amp BATTERY ETHERNET OPTION 06 ONLY IC DGTL EPROM PRGM BATTERY STORAGE 3 5V 750MAH SFTY CONT CKT BD ASSY MAIN CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 1000P 5 200 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 47UF 5 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20
13. Diagrams 1503C H a eo ume FLL 115V ISA 25 41010 POWER SUPPLY P O CHASSIS 42010 3 BATTERY 2 POWER SUPPLY 1 Tektronixe 1502 03 CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS Power Supp ly 6 97 ASSY 670 9296 05 1 REV A4 LR PULSER SAMPLER El Fig 9 5 Component Locator L R Pulser Sampler 201 102 e o gt x 825029 18020 22020 91050 a 91020 ry C1065 9 Sah ah a n 01040 5 gt wW R1080 2070 1070 1066 of 06 TP1060 GS C1064 05020 S 5029 TP3040 5050 95040 1083 1084 1081 O O O TP1080 TP1082 ER gt E ye 1091 Diasrams 1503C 9 31 A4 LONG RANGE PULSER SAMPLER A B 1 1055 15V 2 3 1Sv 4 5 12v SAMPLE STROBE 6 7 43848 2 SAMPLE_TRIG_NOT s PA SEL 1 lt 8 28 sEL 1 12 lt 16 e 18 lt SAMP_VID_IN 8 seve B Diagrams 1503C G H 1 TP30S1 Q IN R1091 100 1 3 R2892 62 4K R2093 10 0K R2891 12 1K 8 4 Cav
14. Figure 6 78 Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument TP1081 O 1080 1082 2 1 01090 3 T i Figure 6 79 TP1081 and TP1082 on Pulser Sampler Board Bb e t ots 3021 alle coup wem 4 H 21 mg L O Og iom em Figure 6 80 VR3020 and VR30212 Pulser Sampler Board 6 50 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures 2 Using a voltmeter verify the voltages at the test points listed in the following table Test Point TP1081 Voltage 12 VDC 0 3 VDC TP 1082 12 VDC 0 3 VDC Anode of VR3020 4 9 VDC to 5 7 VDC Cathode of VR3021 34 9 VDC to 5 7 VDC NOTE If you intend to proceed to the Sampling Efficiency Adjustment from this point leave the EMI shield off If you are now finished proceed to step 4 below 3 Replace the EMI shield Be sure to dress the ribbon cable properly in the cutout provided in order to prevent it from being smashed when securing the shield Sampling Efficiency Adjustment 1 Setthe front panel controls CABLE IMPEDANCE NOISE FILTER VERT SCALE DIST DIV PULSE WIDTH Vp POWER Press MENU Scroll to Diagnostics Menu Press MENU 1503 MTDR Service Manual no connection 50 Q 1 avg 0 00 dB 1 ft div
15. Front cover on Salt Atmosphere Withstand 48 hours 2096 solution without corrosion Sand and Dust Operates after test with cover on non operating MIL STD 810 Method 510 Procedure Washability Capable of being washed Fungus Inert Materials are fungus inert continued next page 1503C MTDR Service Manual Specifications Certifications and Compliances Category Standard or description EC Declaration of Conformity EMC Meets intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official J ournal of the European Union EN 50081 1 Emissions EN 55022 Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN 60555 2 AC Power Line Harmonic Emissions EN 50082 1 Immunity IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC 801 3 RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC 801 4 Electrical Fast Transient B urst Immunity IEC 801 5 Power Line Surge Immunity Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC Complies with EMC provision of Radiocommunications Act per the following standard s AS NZS 2064 1 2 Industrial Scientific and Medical Equipment 1992 EMC Compliance FCC Compliance Safety Standards U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing Canadian Certification European Union Compliance Additional Compliance Safety Certification Compliance Equipment Type Sa
16. Front of Instrument Figure 7 4 EPROM on Main Board 2 Wheninstalling a new EPROM make sure the notch in the IC is facing toward the front of the instrument and all pins are inserted correctly in the socket 1503C MTDR Service Manual 7 7 Maintenance 7 8 Lithium Battery Replacement A Typically the lithium battery for the non volatile memory will last over seven years If it requires replacement use the following procedure CAUTION To avoid personal injury observe proper procedures for handling and disposal of lithium batteries Improper handling might cause fire explosion or severe burns Do not recharge crush disassemble heat the battery above 212 F 100 C incinerate or expose the contents of the battery to water Dispose of the battery in accordance with local state and federal regulations Typically small quantities less than 20 batteries can be safely disposed of with ordinary garbage or in a sanitary landfill but check local regulations before doing this 1 Remove the Main Board as described in a previous procedure Unsolder here LLOLA Lithium O 1 Unsolder here 01010 Figure 7 5 Lithium Battery Main Board 2 Unsolder the four leads of the lithium battery being careful not to overheat the cell 3 Remove the cell from the Main Board 4 Installa new battery and solder the leads to the Main
17. Jtozosu 44 008H 4 820 Jveoou 4Scood Figure 6 65 Main Board Probe Points 4 Turn the instrument POWER on and check that less than 4 Watts is drawn from the Variac 5 Adjust R9032 for 12 0 VDC 6 42 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures 12 VDC 1 Move the positive probe to the side of C9035 the side away from the edge of the board 2 Verify that the voltage is 11 8 to 12 2 VDC 3 Verify that the LCD shows the following display 1 Fi x E E Figure 6 66 Waveform on Display You might have to adjust R1018 Contrast Adjust on the Front Panel Board to get a clear display see LCD Check and Adjustments in this section DC Power Check 1 Turn the POWER off 2 Remove the AC plug from the rear panel of the instrument 3 Ifa battery is present disconnect the wire from the battery to the Power Supply board 4 Connect an external 12 VDC power supply into the battery connector see Figure 6 67 next page Pins 1 and 4 are ground Pins 2 and 3 are positive supply terminals 5 Adjust the external 12 VDC supply for 11 5 VDC output at the terminals of the battery input 6 Connecta DC ammeter in series with the positive side of the 12 VDC supply 7 Turn the power on The current measurement must not exceed 350 mA 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 43
18. Tap Hidden by Traffic 1 avg 50 ft div 35 dB 4 10 System 1 Traffic Tap Nearly Identical 4 avg 50 ft div 35 dB 4 10 System 1 Tap Becoming Visible 16 avg 50 ft div 35 dB 4 1 System 1 Tap Quite Visible 128 avg 50 ft div 354 4 1 System 1 No Traffic 1 avg 50 ft div 35 dB 4 11 System 1 Tap Expanded No Traffic 1 270 2 Tdiv 35 dB sieh Ree en 4 12 System 2 Cable w Revision One Repeater 1 avg 200ft div 2 25dB 4 12 Table of Contents Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 vi System 2 First Tap No Traffic 1 avg 1 ft div 44 5 dB 4 12 System 2 Same with 5 Traffic 1 avg 1 ft div 44 5 4 13 System 2 Same Tap Increased Averaging 16 avg 1 ft div 44 5 dB 4 13 System 2 Farther More Gain 128 avg 10 ft div 53 5 dB 4 13 Syst
19. as follows Control Line Voltages 10 11 Relay DC Output Voltage into 50 Q 0 0 0ff AC Coupled 5 0 1 05 VDC 0 5 On 1 7 VDC 5 5 On 0 0 volts 1503C MTDR Service Manual 5 41 Circuit Descriptions 5 42 Output Amplifier Relay and Driver Over Voltage Sensing Load and Diplexer The control of the output voltage is done by selecting which of the analog switches U1031 is on The switches connect either R1036 R1037 to the 5 This causes Op Amp U1030B buffer transistors 01020 and 01021 and feedback resistor R1034 to hold either 2 1 or 3 4 VDC at the transistor emitters If both switches are off R1035 holds the input of U1030B at ground so the output voltage is 0 0 volts The control lines are also OR d together by CR2025 and CR2024 to enable the relay driver If either or both are high current flows through R2031 to hold pin 3 of U1030A at 0 6 VDC Because pin 2 is at 0 6 VDC the output of U1030A goes high This turns on Q2020 and drives the relay K1020 If both control lines are low less current flows through R1031 and pin 3 of U1030A will be at 1 3 VDC Because this is below pin 2 the output on pin 1 will be low and the relay will be off The 1 3 VDC and 0 6 VDC on pins 3 and 2 are set by the voltage dividers from the 5 Vggr and 10 composed of R2025 R2026 R2027 and R2030 The relay can also be turned off by the over v
20. 13 Remove the voltmeter probes from the 1503C 14 Remove the external 12 VDC power supply cable from the battery connector 15 Reconnect the battery wire to the Power Supply board and to the battery 16 Connect the AC supply cord to the rear panel with optional battery 1 Turn the POWER off 2 Connect a voltmeter across the 4 Q resistor R2012 located on the Power Supply Board 3 Connect the positive probe to the side nearest the front panel and the negative probe to the other end The voltage drop across R2012 should be between 0 4 and 1 2 VDC 6 45 Adjustment Procedures m L1010 62010 3 R2012 4 1 F C2012 CR2013 gt CR2010 T N 02010 EN CR2015 52010 Jj cr2011 N TP2010 R2012 Figure 6 71 R2012 Power Supply Board 4 Turn the POWER on The voltage reading across R2012 should change only slightly 10 mV NOTE The charging current will vary according to the level of charge already on the battery With a fully charged battery the voltage across R2012 should be approximately 0 4 VDC With a battery below 11 Volts R2012 should read approximately 1 2 VDC LCD Check and Adjustment 6 46 1 Turn POWER Push MENU Using the POSITION control scroll to Diagnostics Menu Push MENU Scroll to LCD Diagnostics Menu Push MENU S
21. 152 0406 00 152 0322 00 152 0582 00 152 0582 00 152 0581 00 152 0581 00 152 0779 00 152 0601 00 152 1165 00 152 0582 00 152 0322 00 152 0322 00 152 0836 00 152 0141 02 152 0322 00 152 0601 00 152 0333 00 152 0333 00 131 4177 00 131 3445 00 131 1857 00 108 1230 00 108 1230 00 151 1176 00 151 1176 00 151 0736 00 151 0736 00 1 1176 00 151 1176 00 151 0188 00 Un Un Discontd Qty Name amp Description CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 47UF 75 20 35V AL CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 20 50V DIODE RECT BRIDGE 250V 3A 1 2VF DIODE DVC DI S CHOTTKY 51 15 1 2 DIODE RECT SCHTKY 20V 3A 475VF 80A DIODE RECT SCHTKY 20V 3A 475VF 80A DIODE RECT SCHTKY 20V 1A 450VF 25A DIODE RECT SCHTKY 20V 1A 450VF 25A DIODE RECT FAST RCVRY BRIDGE 200V DIODE RECT ULTRA FAST 150V 25N5 35A DIODE 600 4 50 5 DIODE RECT SCHTKY 20V 3A 475VF 80A DIODE DVC DI S CHOTTKY S1 15V 1 2P F DIODE DVC DI S CHOTTKY S1 15V 1 2P F DIODE DVC DI RECT SI 1A 40V 1N5819 DIODE SIG ULTRA 5 40 150 4 5 2 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2P F DIODE RECT ULTRA FAST 150V 25N5 35A DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA CONN HDR PCB MALE STR 1 X 31 0 15 CTR CONN HDR PCB MALE RTANG 2 X 7 0 1 CTR CONN HDR PCB MALE STR 1 X 36 0 1 CTR COIL RF FIXED 100UH 5 POT CORE COIL RF FIXED 100UH 5 POT CORE XST
22. 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD ELCTLT 100UF 25V AXIAL CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 50 20 25W VDC CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2090 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50 250 CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 20 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 01UF 10 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 80009 81855 1503C MTDR Service Manual Mfr Part Number 160 9008 00 LTC 7P 160 4411 06 LTC 7P 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 322C 102 265CA 322C 102 265CA 322C 102 265CA SR305C 474 AA C114C224M5Y5CA C322C102J2G5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA KMC25T101M8X11LL 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 CEUST1E100 C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA SR595C104MAAAP1 SR155C103KAA C114C224M5Y5CA Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Number Part Number Effective A1A1C2021 281 0925 01 1A1C2030 281 0925 01 1A1C2031 281 0925 01 141C2032 281 0925 01 1 1 2033 281 0925 01 1C2034 281 0925 01 1 2035 281 0925 01 1C2036 281 0925 01 1 2037 281 0925 01 1 2038 281 0925 01 1 2039 283 0067 00 1 2040 283 0059 02 1 2041 283 0059 02 1 2042 281 0925 01 1 2043 283 0238
23. 6 Change DIST DIV to 100 ft div 7 Measure the pulse height on the scope Figure 6 45 Oscilloscope Waveform 6 28 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 1503C MTDR Service Manual Figure 6 46 1503C Waveform of 1000 ns Pulse 8 Using VERT SCALE adjust the pulse height on the 1503C to match the pulse height on the scope The pulse height on both instruments should be between 4 5 and 5 5 divisions The 1503C is now set for 0 5 Volts per division NOTE Once the 1000 ns pulse has been checked the 1503C display is used to confirm the rest of the pulse widths If desired however the scope can be used While pulses be measured directly with the scope a fairly fast 500 MHz scope is necessary for the shorter pulses 9 Change PULSE WIDTH to 100 ns 10 Change DIST DIV to 10 ft div 11 Verify that the pulse height on the 1503C is between 4 5 and 5 5 divisions Q F Figure 6 47 1503 Waveform of 100 ns Pulse 12 Change PULSE WIDTH to 10 ns 6 29 Calibration 13 Change DIST DIV to 1 ft div 14 Verify that the pulse height on the 1503C is between 4 5 and 5 5 divisions 15 Change PULSE WIDTH to 2 ns 16 Leave DIST DIV at 1 ft div 17 Verify that the pulse height on the 1503C is between 4 and 6 divisions Option 04 07 YT 1 YT 1S Chart Recorder Check 6 30 If the instrument does not pass this check chart recordings might not be possible 1 Access the Chart Diagnos
24. 60 4 OHM 1 0 2W 10K 1 0 2 AL FILM 12 1K OHM 1 0 2W 60 4 OHM 1 0 2W 10K OHM 1 0 2W RES VAR NONWW TRMR 5K OHM 10 0 5 W RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL 139 595 0 25W 146 8 OHM 0 5 0 125W 1383 0HM 1 0 125W 360 0HM 0 5 0 125W 4 7K OHM 5 0 25W 47 595 0 25 24 OHM 5 0 25W 4 7K OHM 5 0 25W 24 OHM 596 0 25W 4 7K OHM 5 0 25W 79 6 0 5 0 125 100 OHM 596 0 25W 1150 OHM 596 0 25W 1130 OHM 596 0 25W 500 OHM 1 0 125W 470 OHM 596 0 25W RES FXD FIL 4 7K OHM 5 0 25W Mfr Code Mfr Part Number 01121 CB1025 01121 1015 01121 1015 0121 1015 0121 1015 01121 1015 57668 CRB20FXE 3K24 01121 1025 01121 4725 0121 CB1055 0121 CB1055 57668 CRB20FXE 4K99 01121 4735 57668 CRB20FXE 4K99 57668 CRB20FXE 12K1 57668 CRB20FXE 60K4 57668 20 10 0 57668 CRB20FXE 12K1 57668 CRB20FXE 60K4 57668 20 10 0 32997 3386 1 502 01121 3905 01121 ADVISE 19701 5043ED383R0F 19701 5033RD360ROF 01121 4725 01121 4705 01121 2435 01121 4725 01121 2435 01121 4725 07716 798600 01121 1015 0121 1515 19701 5043 130 0 07716 01121
25. A2 FRONT PANEL 181030 181031 1 010201 Fig 9 3 Component Locator Front Panel Board 9 25 A2 FRONTPANEL HEAT_ENABLE lt _ lt T_SENSE vcc 9 coves cao L C2024 C3823 C3821 C38 2 2 1024 T B 22uF 8 220 g 220 100k R1825 108k 1015 1000 02020 188k 74HC02 U3022D 74HC02 U30228 74HC02 220 22uF R3824 vcc vcc cegeg 1 C2938 16 388k 16V IRFDS128 BCD DECODED ROT SWITCH BCD DECODED ROT SWITCH BCD DECODED ROT SWITCH 024 74HC253 HESS ji Vu 13 03025 ueges 50 yis slo QE2 1 CJOE1 108 101 102 103 2 2 15 1 150 4 BCD DECODED ROT SWITCH E a 422 14 B oat BCD DECODED ROT SHITCH BCD DECODED ROT SWITCH DUAL MUX 4 53 DUAL 74 253 Diagrams 1503C H J3032 GND 2 FEET METERS 3 D lt gt _BUSS A lt gt _BUSS 1503 1503 FRONT PANEL ASSY 670 9287 04 2 REV 7 Jun 83 F G H 9 26 A2 FRONTPANEL A 2 vec R2024B POSITION 4 lt 2 gt 2 U20228 74HC32 U3821A 74 vegeac 74HC32 Ee 0 1 8 BIT D
26. Adjustment Procedures u i3 Fuse Orange Battery Power Supply Board y Battery Connector J2010 Figure 6 67 Battery Connections to Power Supply Board 8 Connect the positive probe of the voltmeter to the front side of CR2012 on the Power Supply Board this is the large diode next to J2010 The positive probe should be on the non banded end of the diode 9 Connect the negative probe to ground U2010 das KH CR2015 CR2011 b OTP2010 O CR2012 2012 Figure 6 68 2012 Power Supply Board 10 Turn the 1503 POWER on The instrument should initialize and go into normal operation The display will be normal except ac in the upper left corner will have changed to bat 6 44 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Charging Current Check 1503C MTDR Service Manual x 3 5 MM NECS CM MES S Se E Figure 6 69 Display Showing Power is Battery 11 Reduce the output voltage of the DC power supply until bat low appears in the upper left corner of the display s To I Wu S 2 ste Sus S 2 S Figure 6 70 Display Showing Battery Voltage is Low 12 Verify that the DC supply voltage is between 10 6 and 11 0 VDC
27. BEAVERTON OR 97076 4200 PORTLAND OR 97223 BEAVERTON OR 97005 GRAND VALLEY CA 95945 HAYWARD CA 94544 TUALATIN OR 97062 VANCOUVER WA 98661 2999 TROUTDALE OR 97060 PORTLAND OR 97214 HILLSBORO OR 97124 6474 HARRISBURG PA 17105 CHICAGO IL 60646 6013 ETTERS 17319 ST PAUL MN 55101 1428 GARDENA CA 90249 2126 PORTLAND OR 97220 PORTLAND OR 97214 3556 AUSTIN TX 78769 2963 BRISTOL CT 06010 7438 PORTLAND OR 97214 1752 HILLSBORO OR 97124 6629 PETALUMA CA 94952 1152 MT CLEMENS 48045 10 3 Replaceable Mechanical Parts Manufacturers Cross Index Cont Mfr Code 03877 05276 060D9 24931 54318 57793 64537 71400 74868 7X318 80009 85471 91094 91836 98291 10 4 Manufacturer GILBERT ENGINEERING CO INC ITT POMONA ELECTRONICS UNITREK CORPORATION FCI BERG ELECTRONICS INC ASTRO MED INC UNITED MICROWAVE PRODUCTS INC KDI TRIANGLE CORPORATION BUSSMANN AMPHENOL CORP KASO PLASTICS INC TEKTRONIX INC BOYD CORP ESSEX GROUP INC SUFLEX IWP DIV KINGS ELECTRONICS CO INC ITT CANNON RF PRODUCTS Address 5310 W CAMELBACK RD 1500 E NINTH ST HOUSE BLVD SUITE 1 RF COAXIAL DIV 2100 EARLYWOOD DR PO BOX 547 600 EAST GREENWICH AVE 22129 S VERMONT AVE PO BOXV 605 JEFFERSON RD DIVISION COOPER INDUSTRIES INC PO BOX 14460 RF MICROWAVE OPERATIONS 1 KENNEDY AVE 11015 39TH 14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR PO BOX 500 13885 RAMONA AVE BAY RD 40 MARBLEDA
28. Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 4 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 A Captured Single Sweep 1 27 Start up Measurement Display 2 2 Measurement Display with 10 foot Cable 2 2 Cursor at End of 10 foot Cable 2 3 Cursor at End of 10 foot Cable Vp Set to 30 2 3 Flatline Display Out to 50 000 Feet 2 4 Waveform Off the Top of the Display 2 4 Waveform at the Bottom of the Display 2 5 Waveform with Gain at 57 dB 2 5 Distance at 22 00 dt iiec RR ee Es 2 7 Pulse Adjusted to Four Major Divisions in Height 2 7 Waveform Centered Cursor at 10 00 ft 2 8 Pulse Adjusted to Four Major Divisions in Height 2 8 Aberrations Less Than Four Divisions Out to 30 00 It decas sed Qa a Re end 2 9 Pulse Adjusted to Four Major Divisions in Height 2 9 Aberrations Less Than Four Divisions Out to 300 00 TL ecd ua rede estates 2 10 Pulse Adjusted to Four Major Divisions in Height 2 10 Aberrations Less Than Four Divisions Out to 3000 00 IU 225 Ur RR 2 A Typical Ethernet System 4 2 N Type Male T Connector 4 5 N Type Female T Connector 4 5 System 1
29. G H 1 C 1042 1000 2 3 4 TektroniXe 1502B C 1503B C HAIN CONNECTORS ASSY 670 9285 05 1 REV 14 34 H 9 16 A1 MAIN A WAIT_NOT UPCK BATT_LOW_NOT AC_POWER_NOT IRA NOT IR2 NOT 184 NOT CS17 NOT IR3 NOT IR1 NOT 5 8 NOT Q QOO OQ DO CS31 NOT 3 8 NOT 010310 ie 24 WAIT SINT 2 PPa j 10402 01038 74HC3 N vcc 010318 R1823 C1032 18K 0 0010 01010 051210 1021 NV CNTRLR pis gt N QUAD BUFFER U1032B D7 15 8 CPU Uige2 74HC138 XD N mum lt 15 gt 3 01043 T4HC32 vcc 2 vec R3B10 3 8 DECDR 1 100 0 DEMUX PIN 20 2 74 374 02020 27 512 250 OCTAL D LATCH pin 28 VCCO 8KX8 RAN 8KX8 RAM U2023A 4 74HC74 PRE 23 aE o FF 64Kx8 EPROM ab amp vcc vcc vcc vcc veca CLR e 1011 10 C1843 Cegi2 C1010 1 C131 MAIN 22uF 9 22uF i 1 T 9 22uF T g 22uF 22uF 8 22uF g 22uF D G U1823 288 6 R1022 9 PROCESSOR ASSY 670 9285 05 1 Diagrams 1503C H RST_NOT 5 MREQ NOT D A_NOT lt 11 gt gt OO DRAM NOT lt gt CSEN NOT G lt 0 7 gt DD Cae RD_NOT lt 0 14 gt 11 Nov 96
30. RES FXD RES FXD M RES FXD M RES FXD RES FXD RES FXD RES FXD RES FXD RES FXD TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL TAL FIL ETAL FIL m rn rn m rn rn rn rn m m 40 7 A 650MHZ TO 92 A 650MHZ TO 92 5 5 A 100MHZ AMP A 2 0GHZ AMP A 650MHZ TO 92 A 650MHZ TO 92 A 2 0GHZ AMP 475 OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 10 0K OH 10 0K OH 10 0K OH 10 0 OHM 1 0 2W 10 0 OHM 1 0 2W 10 0 OHM 1 0 2W 196 0 2W 20 0K OHM 1 0 2W 100 OHM 1 0 2W 10 0K OHM 1 0 2W 196 0 2W 196 0 2W 196 0 2W RES FXD FILM 348K OHM 1 0 2W RES NTWK FXD FI 10K OHM 20 9 RES RES FXD FILM 50K OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 20 0K OHM 196 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 1503C MTDR Service Manual Mfr Code 04713 04713 04713 04713 01295 04713 04713 04713 21845 04713 01295 04713 04713 04713 04713 04713 04713 01295 04713 01295 51668 51668 51668 51668 51668 51668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 01121 01121 57668 57668 57668 Mfr Part Number 2N5087RLRP SPF 3040 2N3839 MPSH10 SKA4504 2N2918 2N3839 MPSH10 1585 283810 5 4504 283839 MPSH10 MD918 2N3839 MPSH10 MD918 SKA4504 2N2918 SKA4504 CRB20 FXE 475E CRB20 FXE 10K0 CRB20 FXE 10K0 CRB20 FXE 10K0 CRB20 FXE 100K CRB20 FXE 20K0 CRB20 FXE 100E CRB20 FXE 10K0
31. Remove the old gasket Remove all dried adhesive Clean area with alcohol and let dry Run a small bead of 3140 Coating Adhesive in the cutout where the new gasket will go Smooth the adhesive into an even thin layer Clean the new gasket with alcohol and let dry Place the gasket on the adhesive and smooth into place Make sure the edges are secure and there are no air bubbles under the gasket Let dry for 24 hours before using or reassembling the front panel Use silicon grease on the outer side of the front panel gasket and the battery gasket where they contact the instrument case The instrument rotary controls the fuse and line voltage select access covers are sealed with rubber O rings These are not glued in place but should be inspected and replaced if necessary Installing the Case Cover Over the Chassis 1503C MTDR Service Manual 1 Place the instrument chassis face down on a solid non slip surface so that the rear panel is facing upward Reach inside the case and use your fingers to push the four captive mounting screws out so that their heads stick up and out of the rear feet Align the case with the chassis 7 19 Maintenance 7 20 4 Gently lower the case over the chassis until the front of the case makes contact with the groove that surrounds the front panel casting Captive mounting screws 4 Case j Chassis Front panel casting Figure 7 15 Installing the Case Cover Over the
32. Replaceable Electrical Parts Diagrams 2 22 Replaceable Mechanical Parts Glossary Index 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 1 23 Figure 1 24 Figure 1 25 Figure 1 26 Figure 1 27 Figure 1 28 Figure 1 29 Rear Panel Voltage Selector Fuse AC Receptacle Display Showing Low Battery Indication 1503C Front Panel Controls Display and Indicators Vp Set at 30 Cursor Beyond Reflected Pulse Setting Too Low Vp Set at 99 Cursor Less Than Reflected Pulse Setting Too Vp Set at 66 Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse Set Correctly 20 ft Cable 5 ft div Short in the Cable Open Cable 455 ft Cable usss tad em eee 455 ft Cable with 20 ft div Cursor Off Screen LOSS
33. 04222 04222 16546 31433 31433 04222 04222 04222 31433 31433 Mfr Part Number CN15C101J C322C102 265 C322C102 2G5CA 114 224 5 5 322 102 2 5 SR305E105ZAA SR305E105ZAA SA105E473MAA SA105E473MAA SA101A510GAA CN15C101 CN15C101J 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 SR305E105ZAA C114C224M5Y5CA SR595C104MAAAP1 5 105 473 114 224 5 5 322 102 2 5 SR305E105ZAA SR305C105MAATRSTDII CN15C101J C114C224M5Y 5CA 114 224 5 5 CEUST1E100 114 224 5 5 SR305E503ZAA SA101A510GAA 15 101 C114C224M5Y5CA C312C109D1G5EA SR152E102ZAA SR595C 104MAAAP 1 SA105E473MAA 322 102 2 5 114 224 5 5 1503 MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix SerialNo Serial Mfr Number Part Number Effective Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A1A1C9022 281 0813 00 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 04UF 20 50V 04222 SA105E473MAA 1 1 9023 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA 1 1 9024 281 0813 00 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 04UF 20 50V 04222 SA105E473MAA A1A1C9025 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA 1 1 9030 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA A1A1C9031 290 0748 00 CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF
34. 1 15 Chart Recorder Check 6 30 Option 05 Metric Default Check u pe 6 31 Option 06 Ethernet Adapter Checks 6 31 Adjustment 6 37 Visual eu ee 6 38 Power Supply Checks and Adjustments 6 38 Main Board 12 VDC Check and Adjust 6 42 LCD Check and Adjustment 2 betes 6 46 Pulser Sampler Voltage 6 49 Sampling Efficiency Adjustment 6 51 Ist Blow By Compensation Adjustment 6 54 Output Impedance 2 222222 22 2 5 wanna puas pa ve Ree ees 6 56 Option 06 Ethernet Adapter Adjustments 6 58 After Adjustments are Completed 6 59 ii 1503C MTDR Service Manual Table of Contents Maintenance Maintenance Introd cti B lue e Rn rt tee RUE RET ERE Preventive Maintenance Part Removal and Replacement Troubleshooting Control Panel Installing the Case Cover Over the Chassis Replaceable Electrical Parts Diagrams
35. 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Installing the Case Cover Over the Chassis 7 20 Special Schematic Symbols 9 3 Component Locator Main Board 9 15 Schematics Main Board 9 16 Component Locator Front Panel Board 9 25 Schematics Front Panel 9 26 Component Locator Power Supply Board 9 28 Schematics Power Supply 9 29 Component Locator Pulser Sampler Board 9 31 Schematics Pulser Sampler 9 32 Component Locator EthernetBoard 9 34 Schematics Ethernet Board 9 35 ec rr 10 13 Frame Assemblies and Front Panel Controls 10 15 Option 06 Ethernet 10 17 Power Supply 10 19 1503 MTDR Service Manual Table of Contents List of Tables 1503C MTDR Service Manual Shipping Carton Test Strength XVii Fuse Voltage Ratings 1 2 Vp of Various Dielectric Types 1 11 Impedance of Various Cable Types 1 12 Cable Length Suggested Pulse Suggested ft div 1 14 Operator Performance Checks Equipment Re
36. 2 ns 99 Scroll to Service Diagnostic Menu 6 51 Adjustment Procedures Exit Service Diagnostic Menu Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic Noise Diagnostic Offset G ain Diagnostic RAM ROM Diagnostics Timebase is Normal Auto Correction Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 81 Service Diagnostic Menu 6 Press MENU 7 Scroll to Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic 8 Press MENU 9 Follow the directions on the display Pulser Sampler Board Figure 6 82 Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument 6 52 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures TP1081 100 TP1082 cii U1090 C1085 C1091 LN 2070 Figure 6 83 Location of R1080 on Pulser Sampler Board j U2080 10 Adjust R1080 on the Pulser Sampler Board for an efficiency reading of 80 Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic Continuous Result Update Acceptable Range Result 70 90 80 Push MENU button to Exit Figure 6 84 Service Diagnostic Efficiency Readout 11 If 8096 is exceeded when making the adjustment go back to the minimum reading and slowly move upward again 12 Press MENU to return to normal operations NOTE If you intend to proceed to the 1st Blow by Compensation Adjustment from this point leave the EMI shield off If you are now finished proceed to step 13 below 13 Replace the EMI shield Be su
37. 27 Front End 5 23 Introduction 5 1 Option 06 Ethernet Blcok Diagram 5 41 Control Lines 5 41 General 5 41 Load and Diplexer 5 42 Output Amplifier 5 42 Over Volatge Sensing 5 42 Relay and Driver 5 42 Option Port Interface Block Diagram 5 11 5 13 Buffers 5 12 General 5 10 Output Latch 5 12 Supply Control 5 11 Wiring Configuration 5 12 Power Supply Battery Charger 5 6 Block Diagram 5 4 Index 2 DC to DC Converter 5 7 Deep Discharge Protection 5 6 General 5 4 Post Regulator 5 6 Pre Regulator 5 5 Primary Circuit 5 5 Processor Block Diagram 5 8 Processor System Address Decoding 5 9 Decoding 5 10 Display RAM Space 5 9 Enable and Select Signal space 5 9 EPROM 5 9 General 5 7 Interrupt Logic 5 10 Memory 5 9 Microprocessor 5 8 Non volatile RAM Space 5 9 Program Memory 5 9 RAM 5 9 Pulse Generator Sampler 5 23 Block Diagram 5 23 First Sample Bridge 5 24 First Sample Gate Strobe Generator 5 25 General 5 23 Preamp 5 24 Pulse Generator 5 23 Sampler 5 24 Second Sample Gate Strobe Generator 5 25 Second Sampler 5 25 System Block Diagram 5 2 Timebase Analog 5 20 Block Diagram 5 16 Calibration of Delay Diagram 5 19 Control Diagram 5 17 Digital 5 20 General 5 15 Time Delay Diagram 5 18 Video Processor General 5 13 Output Scope Waveform 5 15 Summing Amplifier 5 14 Vertical Position DAC 5 14 Video ADC 5 15 Video Amplifier 5 14 Wavefo
38. 28 342 0731 00 29 30 220 0407 00 31 337 2193 05 211 0661 00 129 1092 00 210 1307 00 210 1002 00 334 8135 00 32 650 3714 00 33 220 0961 00 34 213 0966 00 35 211 0005 00 36 210 0851 00 37 105 0954 01 38 384 1674 01 39 650 3699 00 40 212 0001 00 41 210 0008 00 42 210 0458 00 43 200 3737 00 44 200 3451 01 45 348 1118 01 46 105 0959 01 47 407 3675 00 48 213 0123 00 49 650 3742 00 50 211 0661 00 51 1503 MTDR Service Manual Qty amp Description D SCR ASSEM WSHR 6 32 X 0 312 PNH POZ CONN HDR PCB MALE SEE 2 REPL BUS CONDUCTOR SHUNT SHORTING FEMALE CONN HDR PCB MALE SEE 2 REPL INSULATOR FISHPAPER 3 6 X 3 0 DISPLAY MODULE SEE A5 REPL NUT SLFLKG HEX 6 32 X 0 312 HEX SHIELD ELEC EMI BOTTOM SCR ASSEM WSHR 4 40 X 0 25 PNH POZ SPACER POST 0 605 L 4 40 HEX WHSR LOCK 0 115 ID SPLIT WSHR FLAT 0 125 X 0 25 OD X 0 022 MKR IDENT MKD EMI SHIELD INSTRU NOT ILLUSTRATED AT THIS TIME ON OFF SHAFT ASSEMBLY NUT BLOCK 6 32 X 0 438 AL CHROMATE SETSCREW 6 32 X 0 188 HEX W NYLON UBPARTS OF THE CHASSIS ASSEMBLY SCR MACH 4 40 X 0 125 PNH POZ WSHR FLAT 0 119 X 0 375 OD X 0 025 LEVER 3 25L X 0 5W X 0 05 AL EXTENSION SHAFT 7 59 L X 0 5 AL CHART EXTRUSION ASSEMBLY SCR MACH 8 32 X 0 25 PNH POZ WSHR LOCK 8 0 02 THK NUT PL ASSEM WA 8 32 X 0 344 CA ASSY SEE WIRE ASS
39. 4715 01121 CB4725 1503 MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A4R3035 A4R3036 A4R3040 A4R3041 A4R3042 A4R3043 A4R3044 A4R3045 A4R3046 A4R3050 A4R3051 A4R3052 A4R3060 A4R3061 A4R3062 A4R3063 A4R3064 A4R3070 A4R3071 A4R3072 A4R3073 A4R3074 A4R3075 A4R3076 A4R3077 A4R3080 A4R3081 A4R3082 A4R3083 A4R3090 A4R3091 A4R3092 A4R3093 A4R3094 A4T3070 A4T3080 A4T3081 Tektronix Serial No Serial No Part Number Effective Disconttd Qty amp Description 315 0162 00 315 0332 00 315 0470 00 321 0063 00 15 0101 00 15 0100 00 15 0243 00 15 0121 00 15 0102 00 15 0101 00 15 0102 00 15 0121 00 15 0203 00 15 0153 00 15 0163 00 15 0562 00 15 0103 00 15 0301 00 15 0102 00 15 0103 00 15 0752 00 15 0101 00 15 0472 00 15 0102 00 15 0101 00 17 0160 00 17 0821 00 17 0160 00 17 0821 00 15 0103 00 15 0390 00 15 0103 00 321 1068 07 315 0101 00 WW WW UU WW UUU OQ LU UG LU LU GU LJ CGU GU GJ Q OQ GQ ww GJ Q 120 1394 01 120 1397 01 120 1396 01 1503C MTDR Service Manual RES FXD FILM 1 6K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 3 3K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 47 0HM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 44 2 OHM 0 5 0 125W RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 10 OHM 596 0 25W RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 120 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 1K OHM 596 0 25W RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 1K OHM 596
40. 5168 91637 02111 5768 57668 12697 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 91637 57668 Mfr Part Number C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA C114C224M5Y5CA KME35VB471M10X20LL KME35VB471M10X20LL C114C224M5Y5CA 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 66506 032 082 3644 5510 LPS15 1 2 IRFD9120 IRFD9120 VNO606L TA CRB20 FXE 100K ADVISE CRB20 FXE 100E CCF50 2 G40201F 43 253 672 20 FXE 100E CRB20 FXE 100K CM45241 CRB20 FXE 100K CRB20 FXE 100K CRB20 FXE 100K CRB20 FXE 100K CRB20 FXE 100K CRB20 FXE 100K CCF50 2G40R020FT 20 FXE 100K 8 17 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A2R2020 A2R2021 A2R2022 A2R2024 A2R2030 A2R2031 A2R2032 A2R2034 A2R2035 A2R2036 A2R2037 A2R3010 A2R3011 A2R3020 A2R3024 A2R3031 A2RT2038 A251010 A251011 A252010 A252011 A253010 A253011 A253012 A253020 A253021 A253022 A253023 A2U2010 A2U2020 A2U2021 A2U2022 A2U2023 A2U2024 A2U2025 8 18 SerialNo Serial No Effective Tektronix Part Number 322 3001 00 322 3385 00 321 0523 00 311 2400 00 322 3385 00 322 3385 00 322 3347 00 322 3385 00 322 3385 00 322 3385 00 322 3385 00 322 3385 00 322 3385 00 311 2400 00 307 0504 00 307 0504 00 307 0751 00 260 2091 00 260 2091 00 260 2091 00 260 2091 00 260 2091 00 260 2286 01 260 22
41. A4C 2081 283 0139 00 A4C 2090 283 0779 00 4 3010 283 0417 00 A4C3011 283 0417 00 A4C 3020 283 0203 00 A4C3021 283 0190 00 1503C MTDR Service Manual Discontd Qty amp Description CAP FXD PLASTIC 0 0033UF 5 100V CAP FXD CER DI 1000P F 596 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 1000P 5 200 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 4 7UF 75 20 35VDC AL CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 100P F 5 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 22PF 596 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER 01 0 470 20 50 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 47UF 20 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 47UF 20 50V SQ CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER 01 0 470 20 50 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 47UF 20 50V SQ CAP FXD CER 01 0 470 20 50 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 10PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD MICA DI 375PF 1 500V CAP FXD MICA DI 43PF 2 500V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER DI 180PF 5 100VDC TUBULAR CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD MICA 01 27 PF 2 500V CAP FXD CER 01 150 20 50 SQ CAP FXD MICA 01 27 PF 296 500V CAP FXD CER DI 0 22UF 20 400V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 22UF 20 400V SQ CAP FXD CER 01 0
42. A4R2094 A4R2095 A4R2096 A4R2097 A4R2098 A4R3010 A4R3011 A4R3012 A4R3020 A4R3021 A4R3022 A4R3023 A4R3024 A4R3030 A4R3031 A4R3032 A4R3033 A4R3034 8 28 Tektronix Part Number 15 0102 00 15 0101 00 15 0101 00 15 0101 00 15 0101 00 15 0101 00 322 3242 00 315 0102 00 315 0472 00 315 0105 00 315 0105 00 322 3260 00 315 0473 00 322 3260 00 322 3297 00 322 3364 00 322 3289 00 322 3297 00 322 3364 00 322 3289 00 311 1917 00 315 0390 00 321 0799 02 321 0153 00 321 0857 01 15 0472 00 15 0470 00 15 0243 00 15 0472 00 15 0243 00 15 0472 00 321 1087 01 315 0101 00 315 0151 00 315 0131 00 321 0612 00 315 0471 00 315 0472 00 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Serial No Effective B020000 B024701 B020000 B024701 B020000 B024701 Serial No Discont d Qty amp Description B024700 B024700 B024700 RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD MET RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD MET RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL OHM 5 0 25W 1100 OHM 596 0 25W 1100 OHM 596 0 25W 1100 OHM 596 0 25W 1100 OHM 5 0 25W 100 OHM 596 0 25W 3 24 OHM 1 0 2W OHM 5 0 25W 4 7K OHM 5 0 25W OHM 5 0 25W OHM 5 0 25W 4 99K OHM 1 0 2W 47K OHM 5 0 25W 4 99K OHM 1 0 2W AL FILM 12 1K OHM 1 0 2W
43. ASSY PWR 3 18 AWG 250V 10A 98 INCH STR IEC320 RCPT X NEMA 6 15P US ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 METER STR IEC320 RCPT SWISS STANDARD ACCESSORIES BATTERY ASSY 1502C 1503C FUSE CARTRIDGE 3AG 0 3A 250V 12 MIN BUSSMAN ONLY FUSE CARTRIDGE 3AG 0 15A 250V 25SEC CABLE ASSY PWR 3 18 AWG 98 1 5 TWA BLK 60 DEG C MC 6 3C X STR BME 10A 125V COVER FRONT OPTION PORT TERMN COAXIAL 50 OHM BNC VSWR DC 4GHZ 1 15 ADAPTER CONNEC BNC FEMALE TO FEMALE 131 GOLD NICKEL CABLE INTCON 93 OHM 10 FEET L W STR RELIEF ACCESS ADAPTER 2 WIRE FEMALE BNC W STR RELIEF TO ALLIGATOR CLIPS 7 0 L ADAPTER CONN N FEMALE TO BNC MALE CABLE INTCON 50 OHM 3 FEET L W STR RELIEF MANUAL TECH OPERATORS 1503C SLIDE RULE TDR W MANUAL Mfr Code 71400 71400 61935 0GV52 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 05 08445 2541 80126 53109 5F520 80009 71400 71400 TK6372 0 260 64537 24931 TK6159 TK6159 91836 TK6159 80009 TK2233 Mfr Part Number MDL3 10 MDL 15 100 FEK 031 1666 FN328 1 01 ORD BY DESCR 210 0202 00 211 0658 00 334 3379 01 ECM 161 0066 00 ORD BY DESCR ORD BY DESCR ORD BY DESCR 86515030 016 0915 00 MDL3 10 MDL 15 100 FH49061 190 5 28A100 2 51 65293 PAMONA 2630 KN 99 46 ASI 65289 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Cont Fig amp Index Number Serial No Discont d Qty Tektronix P
44. BD ASSY L R PULSER SANPLER A4C1040 283 0845 00 CAP FXD MICA 3600PF 500V 00853 D195E362GO A4C1060 290 0523 00 B010100 B020257 CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM 24165 1960225 0020 1 290 0536 00 B020258 CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM 24165 199D106X0025CA1 A4C1061 290 0523 00 B010100 B020257 CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM 24165 196D225X0020HA1 290 0536 00 B020258 CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM 24165 1990106 0025 1 A4C1062 283 0024 03 CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V 04222 SR215E104ZAATR A4C1063 290 0523 00 CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM 24165 196D225X0020HA1 8 22 1503 MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Number PartNumber Effective A4C1064 285 0627 00 A4C1065 283 0359 01 A4C1066 283 0359 01 A4C1070 283 0024 03 A4C1080 290 0782 00 A4C1081 283 0024 03 A4C1082 283 0330 00 A4C1083 283 0024 03 A4C1084 283 0024 03 A4C1085 283 0154 00 A4C1090 283 0024 03 A4C1091 283 0024 03 A4C2013 283 0203 00 A4C 2014 283 0203 00 A4C 2015 283 0203 00 A4C 2020 290 0536 00 A4C2021 283 0203 00 A4C2022 283 0203 00 A4C2023 283 0203 00 A4C 2030 283 0024 03 A4C 2040 283 0175 00 A4C 2041 283 0670 00 A4C 2042 283 0743 00 A4C 2043 283 0024 03 A4C 2050 283 0024 03 A4C2051 290 0523 00 A4C2060 281 0851 00 4 2070 283 0024 03 A4C2071 283 0024 03 A4C2072 290 0536 00 4 2073 283 0024 03 A4C 2080 283 0779 00
45. CRB20 FXE 10K0 CRB20 FXE 10K0 CRB20 FXE 10K0 CRB20 FXE 348K 210A103 ADVISE CRB20 FXE 100E CRB20 FXE 20K0 CRB20 FXE 100K Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix SerialNo Serial Mfr Number Part Number Effective Disconttd Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A1A1R2013 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K A1A1R2014 307 0446 00 RES NTWK FXD FI 10K OHM 20 9 5 01121 210A103 A1A1R2015 307 0446 00 RES NTWK FXD FI 10K OHM 20 9 5 01121 210A103 AlA1R2030 322 3239 00 RES FXD FILM 3 01K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 3K01 A1A1R2031 322 3239 00 RES FXD FILM 3 01K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 3K01 A1A1R2033 322 3293 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 11 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 11K0 AlA1R2034 311 0634 00 RES VAR NONWW TRMR 500 OHM 0 5W CERMET 32997 3329 158 501 A1A1R2040 322 3139 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 274 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 274E A1A1R2041 322 3134 00 RES FXD FILM 243 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE243E A1A1R2042 322 3134 00 RES FXD FILM 243 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE243E A1A1R2043 322 3126 00 RES FXD FILM 200 OHM 196 0 2W 91637 CCF501G200R0F A1A1R3010 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E A1A1R3020 322 3297 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 12 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 12K1 A1A1R3030 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E AlA1R3031 322 3356 00 RES FXD FILM 49 9K OHM
46. Mfr Code 57668 57668 07716 12697 57668 57668 91637 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 12697 01121 01121 56866 71590 71590 71590 71590 71590 04426 04426 80009 04426 04426 80009 18324 04713 24355 01295 80009 0 R04 0 R04 Mfr Part Number CRB20 10 0 2 100K 2 74 45241 2 100K 2 100K CCF50 2 G40201F CRB20 100K CRB20 100K CRB20 100K CRB20 100K CRB20 100K CRB20 100K CM45241 3164304 3164304 QTMC 19J 2LL199NB021074 2LL199NB021074 2LL199NB021074 2LL199NB021074 2LL199NB021074 41 012 0012 41 012 0014 260 2368 01 41 012 0011 41 012 0014 260 2369 01 NE532 LM393N AD7524JN SN74HC32N 156 2589 00 TC74HC253AP TC74HC253AP 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A2U3020 A2U3021 A2U3022 A2U3023 A2U3025 A2U3031 1 1 1010 1 1011 1 1012 1 1013 1 1014 1 1015 1 1016 1 1030 1 1031 1 1032 1 1033 1 1034 1 1035 1 1036 1 1037 1 1038 1 2010 1 2011 1 2012 1 2013 1 2020 1 2021 1 2022 1 2023 Serial No Effective Tektronix Part Number 156 2026 00 156 2026 00 156 2026 00 156 2026 00 156 275
47. PIN ACTUATOR POWER SWITCH MARKER IDENT MARKED TEKTRONIX CARD INFO QUICK REFERENCE MARKER IDENT MARKED 1502C MARKER IDENT VOLTAGE WARNING LABEL CABINET ASSY BUCKET HANDLE ASSEMBLY COVER HDL LATCH SCR MACH 10 32 X 0 375 HEX SSTW NYLON WSHR SHLDR 0 82 X 0 9 X 0 07 FBR PLATE SECURING HANDLE STEEL DISC FRICTION 0 38 X 1 865 X 0 031 45 B WSHR FRICTION 1 820 X 0 388 30455 20GA HANDLE CARRY 11 7 L BLK VINYL W HDW HANDLE CARRY BLACK VINYL 302 SST CONN RCPT ELEC POWER INTERCONNECT SCREW TPG TC 4 40 X 0 375 TYPE T FLH 100 DEG FOOT CABINET FRONT BLK POLYURETHANE SCR MACH 6 32 X 0 312 PNH POZ FOOT CABINET REAR POLYURETHANE SCR EXT RLV 10 24 X 1 75 SST PSVT RING RTNG TYPE E EXT U O 0 188 SCR TPG 6 20 X 0 5 2 SEAL BOLT 0 186 X 0 443 0 05 PLATE REINF 3 8 X 0 434 STL MARKER IDENT MKD REMOVE COVER amp WNOLT INFO COVER FUSE VOLTAGE SELECT PC CLEAR THUMBSCREW 6 32 X 0 50 0 317 OD SST GASKET FUSE amp VOLTAGE SELECT COVER Mfr Code 7X318 0J4C1 0KB01 7X318 7x318 0588 0 422 0 422 0KB05 0KB05 7X318 0J ROS OKBO1 0KB01 TK1943 2K262 0 9P4 0J9P4 0J9P4 7X318 73893 7X318 0KB01 7X318 0KB01 2X013 0KB01 80009 7X318 0KB05 0J ROS TK2324 0825 Mfr Part Number 650 3676 00 105 0684 01 213 0839 00 1082 1267 214 2389 00 334 9302 00 062 9363 00 334 7475 00 334 8896 00 650 3677 00 200 1
48. Single Sweep Is On Off This function is much like a still camera it will acquire one waveform and hold it Vertical Scale Is dB mp This offers you a choice as to how the vertical gain of the instrument is displayed You may choose decibels or millirho When powered down the instrument will default to decibels when powered back up Distance Div Is ft m Offers you a choice of how the horizontal scale is displayed You may choose from feet per division or meters per division 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions 1503C MTDR Service Manual When powered up the instrument will default to feet unless the internal Jumper has been moved to the meters position Instructions on changing this default are contained in Chapter 7 Light Is On Off This control turns the electroluminescent backlight behind the LCD on or off 5 Diagnostics Menu lists an extensive selection of diagnostics to test the operation of the instrument a Service Diagnostics Menu has these choices i li Hi iv Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic displays continuous efficiency diagnostic of the sampling circuits Noise Diagnostic measures the internal RMS noise levels of the instrument Impedance Diagnostic tests the output impedance circuits in the instrument Offset Gain Diagnostic reports out of tolerance steps in the program mable gain stage This can help a service technician to quickly isolate the cause of
49. The first data bus DB7 DBO is used to access registers internal to the controller These internal registers are used to initialize the controller The second data bus RD7 RDO is used to read bit pattern data from the display memory The data bus from the display memory is tied directly to the RD7 RDO data bus and indirectly through a bidirectional bus transceiver U1050 to the DB7 DBO data bus The DB7 DBO data bus is tied directly to the CPU data bus through the 40 pin connector The first address bus MA12 is tied to the display memory and addresses it 12 can have of two sources The first is an internal address in the controller which is the address of the currently accessed bit pattern data byte The second is the address resent on the second address bus A11 AO This second address bus is tied to the CPU address bus through the 40 pin connector and is used to address the display memory during the time the CPU is updating the display memory The control signal DIEN controls the multiplexing of the internal address and A11 A0 to MAI2 MAO A15 A12 are tied low There are several other relevant control signals to the controller CS chip select WR write and RD read CS and WR are used in conjunction with 0 to write to the internal registers CS and RD in conjunction with 0 to read them XT is the system clock from which all timing in the controller is d
50. When connected to AC power the 1503C provides an earth ground to the coaxial shield There is no connection to ground when the 1503C is used with the optional battery pack and the AC power cord is disconnected The first test usually run on an active network is the normal sweep with the 2 ns or 10 ns pulse and the DC 50 Q termination is On from the Ethernet Menu This test provides basic TDR tests with a 50 Q termination for the net If the network traffic is low 3 to 4 this test is very effective The 2 ns and 10 ns pulses are narrower than the time occupied by a single bit and usually will not cause any collisions All other tests in the Ethernet Menu have potentially destructive effects on working networks CAUTION The test just described should find most problems Before going any further know what you are doing Carrier and collision tests have the potential of causing problems on an active network Read the warnings and instructions carefully Try to limit tests to one segment during times of low traffic The second test is the Single Sweep with Carrier is Off On This test asserts the carrier signal of 1 05 V then single sweeps the network and drops the carrier signal The test occupies the network for one to 20 seconds depending on the NOISE FILTER setting The third test Carrier Test is Off On helps track down transceivers suspected if ignoring the carrier sense signal This test holds the carrier signal of 1 05 V
51. turns off the pulse and turns on MAX HOLD The 1503C then acts as a traffic monitor If spikes appear on the display it is likely a transceiver is not responding to the carrier signal and is babbling The following procedure describes the fundamental tests with 50 Q DC termination is On When performing other Ethernet tests use essentially the same procedure A full description of individual tests including custom tests follows If you wish to disconnect and reconnect the 1503C to the cable segment use BNC T connector between the instrument and a 50 Q jumper cable e g RG 58U To one side of the T connector connect a 50 terminator the double termination is about a 25 2 mismatch much less likely to cause problems than an open circuit The terminator can be removed during testing allowing the 1503C to become the 50 Q load When removing the 1503C or there is a power failure the terminator 1503C MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories should be reconnected restoring the normal 50 load for the network The BNC T connector also allows another point of access for an oscilloscope if you need to look for signal quality or noise levels Once the 1503C 50 termination has been turned tests are similar to standard measurements on an coaxial 50 Q cable Remember to use only the 2 ns or 10 ns pulse widths However the waveforms might be a little different due to traffic on the network Following
52. 0 1 OHM 5 1 0W 56637 BW10 10HM A3A1R1011 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K 0HM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 1K00 A3A1R1012 322 3222 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 2K 0HM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K00 A3A1R1013 322 3309 00 RES FXD FILM 16 2K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 50 2 616201 A3A1R1014 322 3243 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 3 32K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 50 1 3200 A3A1R1015 322 3231 00 RES FXD FILM 2 49K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K49 A3A1R1016 322 3303 00 RES FXD FILM 14K OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 14K0 A3A1R1017 322 3243 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 3 32K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 50 1 3200 A3A1R1018 322 3318 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 20K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 20K0 A3A1R1020 322 3189 00 RES FXD FILM 909 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 909E A3A1R1021 322 3293 00 RES FXD FILM 11K OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 11 0 A3A1R1022 322 3191 00 RES FXD FILM 953 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 953E A3A1R1023 322 3235 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 2 74K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 2K74 A3A1R1024 322 3231 00 RES FXD FILM 2 49K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K49 A3A1R1025 321 0302 00 RES FXD FILM 13 7K OHM 1 0 125W 57668 CRB20 FXE 13K7 A3A1R1026 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 1K00 A3A1R1030 317 0027 00 RES FXD CMPSN 2 7 OHM 5 0 125W 01121 BB27G5 A3A1R2010 322 3257 00 RES FXD FILM 4 64K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50 2 G46400FT A3A1R2011 322 3300 02 RES FXD FILM 13K OHM 196 0 2W 57668 20 13K0 A3A1R2012 308 0739 00 RES FXD WW 4 OHM 1 3W 01686 2
53. 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 8K25 A1A1R4041 322 3134 00 RES FXD FILM 243 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE243E A1A1R4042 322 3135 00 RES FXD FILM 249 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 249E A1A1R4043 321 0136 00 RES FXD FILM 255 OHM 196 0 125W 19701 5043ED255R0F 1 1 4044 322 3137 00 RES FXD FILM 261 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 261E 1503C MTDR Service Manual 8 11 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Serial No Mfr Number Part Number Effective Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A1A1R4045 322 3138 00 RES FXD FILM 267 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 267E A1A1R4046 322 3139 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 274 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 274E A1A1R4047 322 3141 00 RES FXD FILM 287 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 287E A1A1R4048 322 3001 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE10E0 A1A1R5020 322 3395 07 RES FXD FILM 127K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 BZE127K A1A1R5021 322 3289 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 10K0 A1A1R5022 322 3337 00 RES FXD FILM 31 6K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 502631601 A1A1R5023 322 3164 00 RES FXD FILM 499 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 499 A1A1R5024 322 3001 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE10E0 A1A1R5025 322 3001 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE10E0 A1A1R5026 322 3068 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 49 9 OHM 0 1 0 2W 57668 20 49 9 1 185030 322 3280 00 RES FXD FILM
54. 00 1C2044 281 0925 01 1 2045 281 0272 00 1 2046 283 0067 00 1C3020 281 0925 01 1C3021 281 0925 01 1C3022 281 0925 01 1C3023 281 0925 01 1 3030 283 0181 00 1C3040 283 0107 00 1C3041 283 0167 00 1C3042 283 0108 02 1 3043 283 0330 00 1 3044 283 0359 01 1A1C3045 281 0925 01 1A1C3046 281 0925 01 141C3047 283 0181 00 1A1C3048 283 0359 01 1A1C4020 281 0925 01 1A1C4021 283 0359 01 1414022 285 1241 00 141 4030 281 0925 01 1 1 4040 281 0813 00 1 1 4041 290 0748 00 t gt J gt J gt gt FF gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt t t t gt gt I I I gt gt 1503 MTDR Service Manual Discont d Qty Name amp Description CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 0 001UF 10 200V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 0 01UF 10 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 10 50V DIP CAP FXD CER DI 0 001UF 10 200V CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50
55. 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 15K0 AlAIR8040 321 0782 03 RES FXD FILM 40 OHM 0 25 0 125W 03888 5540 OHM 0 25 AlAIR8041 322 3128 00 RES FXD FILM 210 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE210E AlA1R8042 322 3205 00 RES FXD FILM 1 33K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 1K33 A1A1R8043 321 0620 00 RES FXD FILM 8 45K OHM 0 25 0 125W 91637 CMF55 116 D 84500CT AlAIR8044 322 3318 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 20 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 20K0 AlAIR8045 322 3318 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 20 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 20K0 AlAIR8046 322 3318 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 20 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 20K0 AlAIR8047 322 3289 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 10K0 AlAIR9010 322 3114 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 150 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FX150E 1 189011 322 3258 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 4 75K OHM 1 0 2W 56845 CCF50 2 G4751FT AlA1R9012 322 3143 00 RES FXD FILM 301 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 301E 8 13 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A1A1R9013 1A1R9014 1A1R9015 1A1R9020 1A1R9021 1R9022 1R9023 1R9024 1R9025 1R9026 1R9027 1A1R9030 1A1R9031 1A1R9032 H t gt H gt J gt I gt gt D 1TP1040 lAITP1041 1A1TP 2040 1A1TP 3040 1A1TP3041 1A1TP 4020 1A1TP 4021 1A1TP 4040 1A1TP6010 1A1TP 7010 1A1TP 9010 1TP9011 1A1TP 9040 1A1TP9041 1A1U1010 1A1U1011 1A1U1012 1A1U1020 1A1U1021 1A1U1022 1A1U1023 1A1U1030 1A1U1031
56. 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E A1A1R7012 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E A1A1R7013 322 3105 00 RES FXDMETAL FILM 121 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 121E 1 187014 322 3154 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 392 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 392 A1A1R7015 322 3154 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 392 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 392 A1A1R7020 322 3310 00 RES FXD FILM 16 5K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 16K5 A1A1R7021 321 0038 00 RES FXD FILM 24 3 OHM 1 0 125W 57668 CRB14FXE 24 3 A1A1R7022 322 3306 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 15 0 8 12 1503 MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix SerialNo Serial Mfr Number Part Number Effective Disconttd Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number AlA1R7023 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 100E AlA1R7024 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 1K00 AlA1R7025 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 1K00 AlA1R7026 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 1K00 AlA1R7027 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E AlA1R7028 322 3068 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 49 9 OHM 0 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 49 9 AlA1R7029 322 3342 00 RES FXD FILM 35 7K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 35K7 AlA1R7030 322 3222 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 2 00K OH
57. 100K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB1045 A4R1030 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB1045 A4R1031 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 2045 A4R1032 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB1045 A4R1033 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB2435 A4R1034 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB2045 A4R1035 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB1045 A4R1036 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2435 A4R1037 315 0470 00 RES FXD FILM 47 OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB4705 A4R1038 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 0HM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R1050 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2045 A4R1051 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2045 A4R1052 315 0242 00 RES FXD FILM 2 4K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB2425 A4R1053 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2045 A4R1054 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R1060 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 2045 A4R1061 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2435 A4R1062 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R1063 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2045 A4R1064 315 0101 00 B010100 B025257 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 8 26 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Serial No Mfr Number Part Number Effective
58. 211 0507 00 210 0561 00 211 0507 00 210 0561 00 4008 3 4 ORD BY DESCR 650 3715 00 ORD BY DESCR 211 0105 00 211 0105 00 DP 241 6 24 Z 91260A V130LA20A ORD BY DESCR ORD BY DESCR 033 4501 031 1673 10 9 Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Cont Fig amp Index Number Serial No Discont d Tektronix Part Serial No Number Effective 159 0029 01 159 0054 00 19 200 2264 00 20 119 3488 00 21 211 0101 00 22 210 0202 00 23 211 0658 00 22400 eee 334 3379 01 161 0066 00 161 0066 10 161 0066 11 161 0066 12 161 0154 00 016 0915 00 159 0029 01 159 0054 00 161 0228 00 200 3737 00 011 0123 00 103 0028 00 012 1351 00 13 0261 00 103 0058 00 012 1350 00 070 7323 XX 003 1419 00 10 10 Qty amp Description 101 FUSE CARTRIDGE BUSSMAN ONLY A3F101 FUSE CARTRIDGE 3AG 0 15A 250V CAP FUSEHLDR 3AG FUSES SFTY CONTROL A3FL1FILTER RFI 1A 115 230VAC 50 60HZ 5 CR MACH 4 40 X 0 25 FLH 100 DEG POZ TERMINAL LUG 0 146 ID LOCKING SCR ASSEM WA 6 32 X 0 312 PNH POZ CHASSIS P WR SUPPLY MARKER IDENT MKD GROUND SYMBOL POWER CORD OPTIONS CA ASSY PWR 3 18 AWG 250V 10A 98 INCH STR IEC320 RCPT X NEMA 5 15P US CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0 MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 METER STR IEC320 RCPT X 13A FUSED UK PLUG 13A FUSE UNI CA ASSY PWR 3 1 0MM SQ 250V 10A 2 5 METER STR IEC320 RCPT AUSTRALIA
59. 25W 01121 CB4705 A4R2031 315 0300 00 RES FXD FILM 30 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 3005 A4R2040 315 0432 00 RES FXD FILM 4 3K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB4325 A4R2041 315 0432 00 RES FXD FILM 4 3K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB4325 A4R2042 315 0470 00 RES FXD FILM 47 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB4705 A4R2043 315 0432 00 RES FXD FILM 4 3K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB4325 A4R2044 315 0432 00 RES FXD FILM 4 3K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB4325 A4R2050 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB2435 A4R2051 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 0HM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R2052 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2435 A4R2053 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2435 A4R2054 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R2055 315 0103 00 RES FXD FILM 10K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB1035 A4R2060 315 0752 00 RES FXD FILM 7 5K 0HM 5 0 25W 0121 CB7525 A4R2061 315 0562 00 RES FXD FILM 5 6K 0HM 5 0 25W 01121 CB5625 A4R2062 315 0562 00 RES FXD FILM 5 6K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 5625 A4R2063 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K AAR 2064 315 0273 00 RES FXD FILM 27K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB2735 A4R2065 315 0333 00 RES FXD FILM 33K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB3335 8 27 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A4R2066 A4R2067 A4R2070 A4R2071 A4R2072 A4R2073 A4R2074 A4R2075 A4R2076 A4R2080 A4R2081 A4R2082 A4R2083 A4R2090 A4R2091 A4R2092 A4R2093
60. 470 20 50 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 47UF 5 50V SQ Mfr Code 01002 31433 31433 04222 55680 04222 16546 04222 04222 04222 04222 04222 04222 04222 04222 24165 04222 04222 04222 04222 04222 00853 00853 04222 04222 24165 04222 04222 04222 24165 04222 00853 18796 00853 04222 04222 04222 04222 Mfr Part Number 61F 10AC 332 322 102 265 322 102 2 5 SR215E104ZAATR UVX1V4R7MAA SR215E104ZAATR CN15C101J SR215E104ZAATR SR215E104ZAATR SR155A220JAA SR215E104ZAATR SR215E104ZAATR SR305SC474MAA SR305SC474MAA SR305SC474MAA 199D106X0025CA1 SR305SC474MAA SR305SC474MAA SR305SC474MAA SR215E104ZAATR ADVISE D155F3750F0 D105E430G0 SR215E104ZAATR SR215E104ZAATR 196D225X0020HA1 SA101A181 SR215E104ZAATR SR215E104ZAATR 1990106 0025 1 SR215E104ZAATR D155E270G0 110 06151 50 0155 27060 SR501E224MAA SR501E224MAA SR305SC474MAA SR305C 474 8 23 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A4C3030 A4C3031 A4C3032 A4C3033 A4C3034 A4C3040 A4C3050 A4C3051 A4C3052 A4C3060 A4C3061 A4C3062 A4C3063 A4C3064 A4C3065 A4C3070 A4C3071 A4C3072 A4C3080 A4C3081 A4C3082 A4CR1010 A4CR1030 A4CR1031 A4CR2050 A4CR2060 A4CR2061 A4CR2062 A4CR2063 A4CR3020 A4CR3021 A4CR3040 A4CR3070 8 24 Tektronix Part Number 283 0024 03 283 0328 00 283 0024 03 283 0328 00 290 0536 00 2
61. 5 Adjust R1013 for a resistance measurement between 49 9 Q and 50 1 Q Do not forget to take into account the DMM lead resistance 6 Double check your measurement then seal R1013 with a small amount of Humiseal Tek part 006 1744 or trim pot glue After Adjustments are Completed 1 If the instrument is Option 05 metric refer to the Maintenance chapter to return the metric default jumper to its proper position 2 Reinstall the 1503C in its case refer to the Maintenance chapter of this manual Care should be taken to follow the directions to maintain watertight integrity of the case 3 Turn back to the Calibration section of this chapter and perform all those Performance Checks that did not require case off adjustments 1503 MTDR Service Manual 6 59 Adjustment Procedures 6 60 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Introduction Equipment Required This chapter contains information on preventive and corrective maintenance troubleshooting panel control assembly procedures and shipping instructions Please refer to schematics for physical location of circuits and components NOTE We recommend that service be performed at an authorized Tektronix Service Center or by a technician skilled in sampling and pulse techniques This is a list of common tools needed to accomplish all the maintenance procedures that follow 5 16 hex nut driver 11 32 hex nut driver 1 16 hex wrench 5 16 open e
62. 50 20 25W VDC 0J9R5 CEUSTIE100 A1A1C9032 283 0359 01 CAP FXD CER DI 1000P F 595 200V SQ 31433 322 102 265 1 1 9033 283 0359 01 CAP FXD CER DI 1000P F 595 200V SQ 31433 322 102 265 A1A1C9034 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA A1A1C9035 290 0748 00 CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 50 20 25W VDC 0J9R5 CEUSTIE100 AlA1CR1020 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 1 1 1021 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 AlA1CR1022 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 AlA1CR1023 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 AlA1CR3031 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 AlA1CR4030 152 0141 02 DIODE SIG ULTRA FAST 40V 150MA 4NS 2PF 01295 1 4152 AlA1CR4031 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 AlA1CR4032 152 0725 00 DIODE 0 01 51 5 20 1 2 21847 2 1582 AlA1CR5030 152 0725 00 DIODE 0 01 51 5 20 1 2 21847 2 1582 AlA1CR5040 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 AlA1CR8020 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 1 1 9010 152 0322 00 DIODE DVC DI SCHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2PF 21847 2 600 1 1 2010 131 3361 00 CONN HDR PCB MALE RTANG 2 X 13 0 1 53387 3593 5002 1 1 5040 131 4183 00 CONN HDR PCB MALE STR 2 X 7 0 1 CTR 53387 3598 6002 1 1 9010 131 3359 00 CONN HDR
63. 50 SQ DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI S CHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2P F DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI S CHOTTKY 51 15 1 2 DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE SIG SRD 35V 500PS TS 250NS TL 4 65P F DIODE DVC DI S CHOTTKY SI 15V 1 2P F Mfr Code Mfr Part Number 04222 SR215E104ZAATR 18796 122166751 3037200 04222 SR215E104ZAATR 18796 RPE12216625U303Z200V 24165 1990106 0025 1 24165 1990106 0025 1 31433 322 102 265 04222 SR3055C474MAA 24165 1990106 0025 1 04222 SR215E104ZAATR 04222 SR152bE1027AA 04222 SR215E104ZAATR 31433 C315C100D2G5CA 31433 C315C100D2G5CA 16299 SR155C271KAA 24165 196D225X0020HA1 31433 315 1000265 16299 SR155C271KAA 04222 SR215E104ZAATR 04222 SR215E104ZAATR 16299 SR155C271KAA 04222 SR292A510JAA 16299 SR155C271KAA 04222 SR292A510JAA 18796 RPE110COG151K50V 03508 0 2011 03508 0 2011 03508 0 2011 21847 2 600 03508 012011 03508 012011 03508 012011 21847 2 600 03508 012011 03508 012011 28480 5082 8872 21847 A2X600 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Number PartNumber Effective A4CR3090 153 0044 00 A4CR3091 153 0044 00 AACR 3092 153 0044 00
64. 7 Operating Instructions Menu Selections 1 8 Main Menu There are several layers of menu as explained below The Main Menu is entered by pushing the MENU button on the front panel 1 Return to Normal Operations puts the instrument into normal operation mode Help with Instrument Controls explains the operation of each control When a control or switch is adjusted or pushed a brief explanation appears on the LCD Cable Information has these choices a b Help with Cables gives a brief explanation of cable parameters Velocity of Propagation Values displays a table of common dielectrics and their Vp values These are nominal values The manufacturer s listed specifications should be used whenever possible Impedance Values displays impedances of common cables In some cases these values have been rounded off Manufacturer s specifications should be checked for precise values Finding Unknown Vp Values describes a procedure for finding an unknown Vp Setup Menu controls the manner in which the instrument obtains and displays its test results a Acquisition Control Menu has these choices i Max Hold Is On Off Turn Max Hold on by pushing MENU then STORE In this mode waveforms are accumulated on the display Max Hold can be deactivated by pushing STORE or the mode exited by using the Setup Menu ii Pulse Is On Off Turns the pulse generator off so the 1503C does not send out pulses iii
65. 8 7 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A1A1C5010 1A1C5020 1A1C5021 1A1C5022 1A1C5023 1C5024 1C5025 1C5030 1C5031 1C5032 1C5033 1C5040 1C5041 1C5042 1C6030 1C6031 1C6032 1C7010 1C7020 1C7021 1C7022 1C7023 1C7030 1C7040 1C7041 1C7042 1C7043 1C8010 1A1C8020 1A1C8021 1A1C8022 1A1C8023 1A1C8024 1A1C8040 1 1 9010 1 1 9011 1 1 9020 1 1 9021 FF gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt H H H H gt gt I I I I I I ox ge ode Rege ode moon Xe do o ge ue uo e e I 8 8 Serial No Serial No Effective Tektronix Part Number 283 0330 00 283 0359 01 283 0359 01 281 0925 01 283 0359 01 283 0177 00 283 0177 00 281 0813 00 281 0813 00 281 0798 00 283 0330 00 283 0330 00 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 283 0177 00 281 0925 01 283 0111 04 281 0813 00 281 0925 01 283 0359 01 283 0177 00 283 0059 02 283 0330 00 281 0925 01 281 0925 01 290 0748 00 281 0925 01 283 0010 00 281 0798 00 283 0330 00 281 0925 01 283 0348 00 283 0156 00 283 0111 04 281 0813 00 283 0359 01 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER 01 5 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER DI Discontd Q
66. 9 12 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams 4 PULSER SAMPLER CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD TP1060 4 D2 F1 TP1080 4 B3 H1 TP1081 4 B3 H1 TP1082 4A B5 H1 TP2030 4B 05 C2 TP3020 4 H3 B3 TP3030 4B H3 C3 TP3040 4B A2 D3 TP3050 4A A6 E3 TP3051 4A G2 E3 U1040A 4B E5 D1 U1040B 4B E6 D1 U1040C 4B E7 D1 U1040D 4B E7 D1 U1050 4B A7 E1 U1070A 4A B3 G1 U1070B 4A B5 G1 U1080 4A A3 H1 U1090A 4A H3 11 U1090B 4A H5 11 U2070A 4A E4 G2 U2070B 4A E3 G2 U2080 4A E4 H2 VR2080 4A D7 H2 VR3020 4B H2 B3 VR3021 4B H2 B3 VR3080 4A D5 H3 1503C MTDR Service Manual 9 13 Diagrams A6 ETHERNET OPTION 06 CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE BRD C1010 13 G2 Al R2021 13 D3 B2 C1020 13 E2 B1 R2022 13 D3 B2 C1021 13 B1 R2023 13 F4 B2 C2020 13 G4 B2 R2024 13 E3 B2 C2030 13 D4 C2 R2025 13 D3 B2 C2031 13 D3 C2 R2026 13 C4 B2 C2032 13 E3 C2 R2027 13 D3 B2 C2033 13 4 C2 R2030 13 D4 C2 C2034 13 C4 C2 R2031 13 C2 C2 C2035 13 C3 C2 R2032 13 E4 C2 R2033 13 E3 C2 CR2020 13 D3 B2 R2034 13 B4 C2 CR2021 13 D3 B2 CR2022 13 F3 B2 U1030A 13 E4 C1 CR2023 13 G3 B2 U1030B 13 E2 C1 CR2024 13 C2 B2 U1031 13 C1 C1 CR2025 13 B2 B2 U2030 13 B3 C2 J2030 13 B2 C2 VR2020 13 D3 B2 VR2021 13 E4 B2 K1020 13 G2 Bi VR2030 13 B4 C2 L2010 13 H2 A2 Q1020 13 F2 B1 Q1021 13 F2 B1 Q2020 13 F4 B2
67. AACR 3093 153 0044 00 A4J 3010 131 0391 00 A4J 3040 131 3360 00 A4L1040 108 1277 00 A4L2040 108 1278 00 A4L2041 108 1279 00 A4Q1010 151 0190 00 A4Q1020 151 0567 00 A4Q1021 151 0567 00 A4Q1022 151 0567 00 A4Q1030 151 0190 00 A4Q1031 151 0190 00 A4Q1060 151 0190 00 A4Q2010 151 0567 00 A4Q2011 151 0567 00 A4Q2012 151 0567 00 A4Q2030 151 0188 00 A4Q2031 151 0188 00 A4Q2032 151 0271 00 A4Q2033 151 0271 00 A4Q2034 151 0448 00 B020000 151 0965 00 B023756 151 0951 00 B024252 A4Q2040 151 0441 00 402050 151 0190 00 402051 151 0190 00 402052 151 0441 00 402053 151 0271 00 402060 151 1103 00 403020 151 1174 00 020000 151 0965 00 023756 151 0951 00 024252 1503 MTDR Service Manual Serial No Discont d Qty Name amp Description 8023755 8024251 8023755 8024251 DIODE SE SIGNAL 4 152 0322 03 DIODE DVC SE SIGNAL 4 MTCH 152 0322 03 DIODE DVC SE SIGNAL 4 MTCH 152 0322 03 DIODE DVC SE SIGNAL 4 MTCH 152 0322 03 ACK MALE CONN HDR PCB MALE STR 2 X 10 COIL RF 80UH 5 INDUCTOR COIL RF 7 5UH 5 INDUCTOR COIL RF 590UH 5 INDUCTOR XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP XSTR SIG MOS N CH ENH 60V 200MA 5 OHM XSTR SIG MOS N CH ENH 60V 200MA 5 OHM XSTR SIG MOS N CH ENH 60V 200MA 5 OHM XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP XSTR SIG MOS N CH ENH 60V 200MA 5 O
68. ASSY SP ELEC 4 22 AWG 9 0 L RIBBON 80009 174 1539 00 FROM 2010 TO BATT INCLUDES 5A FUSE W3010 174 0956 00 ASSY RF 50 OHM COAX 2 9L 80009 174 0956 00 FROM A4J 3010 TO 100 FRONT PANEL W5040 174 0953 00 CA ASSY SP ELEC 14 26 AWG 6 125L 80009 174 0953 00 FROM 1030 TO A1A1J 5040 W6010 174 0951 00 CA ASSY SP ELEC 20 28 AWG 300V R MS 80009 174 0951 00 FROM DISPLAY MODULE 5 AND A2A1J 1020 TO A1A1J 6010 W9010 174 1014 00 CA ASSY SP ELEC 20 28 AWG RIBBON 80009 174 1014 00 FOR STANDARD INSTRUMENT AND OPTION 06 FROM 4 3040 2030 A1A1J 9010 J101 174 0957 00 B010100 B023217 CAASSY PWR 2 STRAND W CONN 80009 174 0957 00 FROM 1010 TO TRANS A3T201 198 5460 01 WIRE SET ELEC POWER SUPPLY MODULE 80009 198 5460 01 CONN AND GROUND WIRES SET OF TWO 8 32 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams General Information Assembly Numbers Grid Coordinates Electrical Parts Locator Schematic Symbols Component Values 1503C MTDR Service Manual Each assembly the instrument is assigned an assembly number e g The assembly number appears in the title block of the schematic diagram in the title for the circuit board component location illustration and in the lookup table for the schematic diagram component locator The replaceable parts list is arranged by assemblies in numerical sequence the components are listed by component number The schematic di
69. Accessories 1503C MTDR Service Manual U 1034 44ft Figure 4 18 2 can of Taps Expalided 128 avg 10 ft div 54 75 dB ac f 1314 84 ft ME ee a te ee BOSS S M Figure 4 19 System 2 Another Group of f Taps 128 avg 10 ft div 54 75 dB NER n Figure 4 20 2 End of Cable 128 avg 20 ft div 61 25 dB 4 15 Options and Accessories Electrical Characteristics Following are the specifications for the Ethernet board Characteristic Performance Requirement Supplemental Information DC Termination 500 10 See typical frequency response curve below this table to estimate at other fre quencies Once the termination is turned on it will remain on until specifi cally turned off by the operator at which time a warning to remove the 1503C from the network will be shown on the display Leaving the TDR on the net work with the termination turned off will cause traffic disruption and errors DC Voltage Offsets 0 0V 0 02 V AC pulse voltage is present on top of 1 05 VDC and 1 7 VDC DC offsets while measuring Voltages 0 15 V into 50 Q only asserted when 50 O termination is on Overvoltage Circuit cuts out leaving standard 1503C Protection protection for voltages greater than 11 V Floating Ground Only when used with battery pack IEEE 802 3 specifies a single ground on the bus 70 E Opt
70. Alternate Color Ungrounded line Brown Black Grounded neutral Blue White Grounded earth Green Yellow Green 1 Unplug the battery cable at the battery and at the plug on the Power Supply board 2 Remove the two 2 screws securing the battery clamp to the chassis 3 Remove the battery clamp making sure not to short the terminals with the clamp 4 Carefully lift the battery from the chassis 1 From the top side of the instrument remove the multi colored cable power supply from the Main Board 2 Turn the instrument upside down to expose the top of the Main Board 3 Remove the three multi colored cables from the component side of the Main Board This be accomplished by inserting a small straight blade screwdriver in the key and gently prying the connector from the board Take care to guide the connectors straight off to avoid bending the pins 4 Remove the eight screws and the center spacer post with washer and locknut that fasten the Main Board to the chassis 5 Remove the Main Board taking care to avoid binding on the power switch mechanical linkage NOTE One of the corner screws see Figure 7 3 next page holds a ground strap connector 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Figure 7 3 Main Board EPROM Replacement 1 Use an IC puller that is designed to extract multi pin microcircuits to remove the EPROM from its socket
71. Board CAUTION Be sure that the new battery is one that is supplied or authorized by Tektronix An improper replacement cell could cause irreversible damage to the Main Board circuitry 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Removing the Pulser Sampler Board Option 06 Ethernet Removing the Front Panel Assembly 1503C MTDR Service Manual NOTE If the instrument is equipped with Option 06 Ethernet Adapter Board follow the instructions under Option 06 in this chapter There is an illustration in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts chapter showing the Option 06 and Pulser Sampler Boards Remove the two screws and washers holding the cover to the chassis Remove the cover by sliding it toward the center of the instrument When re assembling make sure the cable is placed under the slot provided Disconnect the multi conductor cable from the circuit board Remove the coaxial cable from the circuit board Remove the circuit board from the instrument by sliding it out of the card guides Option 06 is a piggyback board mounted on the Pulser Sampler Board The following instructions describe the removal of the two boards as they are installed in the instrument If you have purchased an Option 06 kit to be installed in an existing non Option 06 1503C instrument the instructions for installation are provided in that kit There is an illustration in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts chapter showing the Option 06 and Pul
72. Chassis 5 Using a flat blade screwdriver secure the four mounting screws seven inch pounds of torque Each screw should be started by turning it counterclock wise once then clockwise Alternately tighten each screw gradually a few turns at a time 6 Check the gap between the case and the front panel casting to make sure that the case and front panel are mated evenly all around If not mated properly loosen the screws reposition the case then tighten the screws again 1503C MTDR Service Manual w c FA Z i j L Replaceable Electrical Parts Parts Ordering Information List of Assemblies Mfr Code Number to Manufacturer Cross Index Abbreviations Component Number 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replacement parts are available from your Tektronix field office or representative When ordering parts include the part number plus instrument type serial number and modification number if applicable If a part is replaced with a new or improved part your Tektronix representative will contact you regarding any change in part number A list of assemblies is found at the beginning of the replaceable electrical parts list Assemblies are listed in numerical order When the complete component number of a part is known this list identifies the assembly in which the part is located The manufacturer code number to manufacturer cross index provides codes names and addresses of manufactur
73. Control 142 0 1000000000000000000000000000000 A 11 181 Vertical Scal ertical Scale S 190 24 ENNEBEEBSSSESERBEBEBEBEBEREBEBEERSN Figure 6 7 Front Panel Diagnostic Display 9 10 11 Rotate PULSE WIDTH counterclockwise to its far stop The switch reading should be 31 Slowly rotate this control clockwise to its far stop Each position should increase the switch reading one count starting at 31 and ending with 35 Rotate the gt POSITION control slowly in either direction The bar graph shown on the display represents the two elements of each control The readings to the right of the bar graph represent numbers used by the instrument to calculate the position of the knob As the control is rotated these values and the bar graph will change The lower value in each column should be between 0 and 10 while the higher number is between 245 and 255 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration Thermistor Conclusion 1503C MTDR Service Manual Front Panel Diagnostic test all switches Hold down MENU button to E xit Switch 35 temp 82 Vp 0 99 Corresponding lt I gt Control 0 170 56 Numbers PETTITTE i mam FREE E 44 Graph Control 12 Vertical Scale Figure 6 8 Front Panel Diagnostic Display 12 Rotate the SPOSITION control slowly in either direction The lower value in each column should be between 0 and 10 while the higher number i
74. D3 C2 CR1031 4B F5 C1 Q3020 4B E3 B3 C2040 4B 53 D2 CR2050 4B B2 E2 Q3021 4B E3 B3 C2041 4B C6 D2 CR2060 4A D2 F2 Q3035 4B D2 C3 C2042 4B C5 D2 CR2061 4A D3 F2 C2043 4B C2 D2 Q3050 4A B6 E3 C2050 4B C4 E2 CR2062 4A D3 F2 Q3060 4A C3 F3 CR2063 4A C4 F2 Q3061 4A C4 F3 C2051 4B C5 E2 CR3020 4B H2 B3 Q3062 4A C4 F3 C2060 4A C4 F2 CR3021 4B H2 B3 Q3070 4A C6 G3 C2070 4A E5 G2 CR3040 4B C3 D3 Q3080 4A D6 H3 C2071 4A C5 G2 CR3070 4A B6 G3 C2072 4A D5 G2 R1010 4B G7 1 2073 4 D7 G2 CR3090 4A F6 1011 4 F7 1 CR3091 4A G6 1012 4 1 2080 4 E5 H2 CR3092 4A G6 1013 4 4 1 2081 4A F6 H2 CR3093 4A G6 I3 1022 4 F4 B1 C2090 4A F6 12 R1023 4B F4 B1 C3010 4B H3 A3 J3010 4B H3 A3 C3011 4B H3 A3 J3040 4A B7 D3 R1030 4B G4 C1 C3020 4B E3 B3 R1031 4B G7 C1 1503C MTDR Service Manual 9 11 Diagrams A4 L R PULSER SANPLER CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD R1032 4B F7 C1 R2051 4B C2 E2 R3031 4B E2 C3 R1033 4B E6 C1 R2052 4B C5 E2 R3032 4B G4 C3 R1034 4B F6 C1 R2053 4B B3 E2 R3033 4B D1 C3 R1035 4B F6 C1 R2054 4B 1 2 R3034 4B D2 C3 R1036 4B E5 C1 R2055 4B 5 2 R3035 4B C1 C3 R1037 4B D6 C1 R2060 4A D4 F2 R3036 4B C2 C3 R1038 4B D7 C1 R2061 4A D4 F2 R3040 4B D3 D3 R1050 4B B7 El R2062 4A C2 F2 R3041 4B D7 D3 R1051 4B B7 E1 R2063 4A C4 F2 R3042 4B D7 D3 R1052 4B B7 E1 R2064 4A D3 F2 R3043 4
75. D3 C3 R3011 10A B3 U3023A 10A B4 B3 C3032 10A C3 C3 R3020A 10B D4 B3 U3023B 10A B3 B3 C3033 10A C3 C3 R3020B 10B D4 B3 U3023C 10A B4 B3 C3034 10B B4 C3 R3024 10A D1 B3 U3023D 10A B4 B3 R3031 10A 1 C3 U3025 10 G2 B3 410201 10 F1 C1 U3031 10 G3 C3 J3030 1 10A H1 C3 RT2038 10B D3 C2 2030 10B F2 C2 1010 10A A2 Al 51011 10 2 1 Q1020 10 C1 1 52010 10A 2 01030 10 D3 C1 2011 10A 2 02020 10 1 2 53010 10 4 53011 10 D1 R1010 10A B2 Al R1011 10B D1 1 53012 10A C2 R1012 10B 2 1 53020 10A E2 B3 R1013 10A B2 1 53021 10A D3 B3 R1018 10B D1 1 53022 10A C4 B3 R1020 10B D1 1 53023 10A C3 B3 Back Side Components 9 8 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE 5 BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD C1010 T 1A B2 Al CR2010 1A E3 A2 R1017 1A D3 Al C1011 1A B3 Al CR2011 1A G2 A2 R1018 1A C4 Al C1012 1A C4 Al CR2012 1A G2 A2 R1020 1A B6 1 1013 1A F2 Al CR2013 1A G2 A2 R1021 1A B5 1 1014 1A D3 Al CR2014 1A G2 A2 R1022 1A B7 1 1015 1A C4 Al CR2015 1A G2 A2 R1023 1A B7 B1 C1016 1A C4 Al CR2016 1A AS A2 R1024 1A C7 B1 C1030 1A G5 C1 CR2020 1A D7 B2 R1025 1A C6 B1 C1031 1A G5 C1 CR2021 1A D6 B2 R1026 1A E7 B1 C1032 1A F4 C1 CR2030 1A F6 C2 R1030 1A G5 C1 C1033 1A F4 C1 CR2031 1A F6 C2 R2010 1A F2 A2 C1034 1A F3 C1 R2
76. Display Drive Voltage Contrast Temperature Compensation The Front Panel Board contains most of the instrument control as well as some circuitry for the display module A block diagram of the Front Panel Board is shown in Figure 5 13 next page 5 25 Circuit Descriptions Push Button Switches MENU VIEW INPUT VIEW STORE VIEW DIFF gt STORE IMPEDANCE NOISE FILTER FEET DIV PULSEWIDTH hal Z Rotary Binary Switches gt lt 50 Connector Z Data Bus Address Control Bus ANALOG DIGITAL CONVERTER HORIZONTAL POSITION From Temp Sensors VERTICAL position VERTICAL LCD Heater To LCD Heater rive Circui scar y Resistive Shaft Encoder LCD Drive To LCD Drivers Voltage ww Circuitry EL EL To EL Backlight Switching Power EE Circuitry Supply cune 50 Pin Connector Figure 5 13 Front Panel Block Diagram 5 26 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Push Button Switches and Latches Rotary Binary Switches Switch Multiplexers Resistive Shaft Encoders Analog to Digital Converter 1503C MTDR Service Manual The push button
77. Efficiency checks it is probably still adequate for all but extremely minor fault measurements If it failed the Horizontal Scale check you should not use the instrument until the cause of the failure has been identified and corrected All of the previous checks only test the major functional blocks of the instrument that could prevent you from being able to make measurements It is possible for the front panel controls or the LCD to have problems that would interfere with controlling or displaying measurements Most problems of this type would become evident as you perform the checks If you suspect a problem of this nature you should have the instrument checked by a qualified service technician If the instrument passed all of the previous checks it is ready for use If your instrument is equipped with Option 06 Ethernet refer to Calibration Chapter 6 2 11 Operator Performance Checks 2 12 1503 MTDR Service Manual Specifications The tables in this chapter list the characteristics and features that apply to this instrument after it has had a warm up period of at least five minutes The Performance Requirement column describes the limits of the Characteristic Supplemental Information describes features and typical values or other helpful information Electrical Characteristics Characteristic Performance Requirement Supplemental Information Test Pulse Width Selected 2 ns 10 ns 100
78. PCB MALE RTANG 2 X 10 0 1 53387 3592 5002 1 115030 120 1606 00 XFMR RF INDUCTOR 86 10 0JRO3 120 1606 00 1 115040 108 0509 01 COIL RF FIXED 2 45UH 10 AXIAL LEAD 0JRO3 108 0509 01 AlA1Q1010 151 1176 00 XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 04713 IRFD9120 1 101020 151 0190 00 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP 01295 SKA3703 AlA1Q1021 151 0188 00 5 516 40 200 250 7 03508 39 3162 1 101030 151 0190 00 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP 01295 SKA3703 1 101031 151 0188 00 5 516 40 200 250 7 03508 39 3162 AlA1Q2011 151 1176 00 XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 04713 IRFD9120 1 102012 151 1176 00 XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 04713 09120 8 9 1503 MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A1A1Q3030 A1A1Q4030 A1A1Q4031 A1A1Q4040 A1A1Q5020 1A1Q5030 gt 1 105031 A1A1Q5032 A1A1Q6020 A1A1Q7020 A1A1Q7021 A1A1Q7030 1A1Q8020 1A1Q9010 14109020 14109021 gt gt gt gt 1A1R1010 1A1R1011 1R1012 1R1013 1R1014 1R1015 1R1016 1R1020 1R1021 1R1022 1R1023 1R1032 1R1033 1R1035 1A1R2010 1A1R2011 1A1R2012 H H gt gt I gt t gt gt gt gt I gt gt a Se eee e 5 gt 8 10 Tektronix Part Number Un 1 0
79. PLAIN HEX 0 25 32 X 0 312 0 01 210 0583 00 1 210 0940 00 1 WSHR FLAT 0 25 X 0 375 X 0 02 STL CD PL 0 01 210 0940 00 EACH VARIABLE RESISTOR INCLUDES 8 354 0581 00 1 O RING 0 25 X 0 062 OD XSECT 5H194 2 010 5455 70 9 348 1145 01 SEAL CONT SHAFT 0 125 X 0 187 OD X 0 3L 80009 348 1145 01 10 366 0655 05 1 PUSH BUTTON MENU 0 523 X 0 253 0 05 366 0655 05 11 366 0655 01 1 PUSH BUTTON VIEW INPUT 0 05 366 0655 01 12 366 0655 02 1 PUSH BUTTON VIEW STORE 0 05 366 0655 02 13 366 0655 03 1 PUSH BUTTON VIEW DIFF 0 05 366 0655 03 14 366 0655 04 1 PUSH BUTTON STORE 0 05 366 0655 04 15 334 7111 01 1 MARKER IDENT MARKED 1502C 0KB05 334 7111 01 16 213 1089 00 4 SCREW TYPE F 6 32 X 500 FLH POS 410 SS 0 01 213 1089 00 17 614 0389 01 1 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY 80009 614 0389 01 18 348 0477 00 1 SEAL RBR STRIP 0 94W X 0 062THK X 28 0L 2K262 R 10460 19 348 0477 00 1 SEAL RBR STRIP 0 94W X 0 062THK X 28 01 2 262 R 10460 20 348 1144 00 1 GASKET COND ELASTOMER W AL 0JRZ5 348 1144 00 21 348 0920 00 1 SHLD GSKT ELEC PUSH BUTTON 28334 348 0920 00 22 331 0502 00 1 WINDOW DSP PORT 2 335 X 4 357 X 0 125 GLASS TK2624 331 0502 00 2 1 BD ASSY FRONT PANEL SEE 2 REPL 10 6 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Cont Fig amp Index Tektronix Part Serial No Number Number Effective 24 211 0658 00 525 tee eee 26 131 0993 00 27 sexe
80. Panel Diagnostic Display 2 Press VIEW STORE The LCD switch reading should change to 2 3 Press VIEW DIFF The LCD switch reading should change to 3 4 Press STORE The LCD switch reading should change to 4 Rotate IMPEDANCE counterclockwise to its far stop The LCD switch reading should be 5 2 Slowly rotate this control clockwise to its far stop Each position should increase the switch reading one count starting at 5 and ending with 8 Calibration 6 6 Rotate NOISE FILTER counterclockwise to VERT SET REF The switch reading on the display should be 9 Slowly rotate this control clockwise to its far stop Each position should increase the switch reading one count starting at 9 and ending with 18 Rotate DIST DIV counterclockwise to VERT SET REF The switch reading on the display should be 19 Slowly rotate this control clockwise to its far stop Each position should increase the switch reading one count starting at 19 and ending with 30 display should currently show Vpof 0 30 Slowly rotate the left Vp control to full clockwise Each click should correspond to the front panel control setting Rotate the right Vp control to full clockwise Again the LCD reading should match the front panel control setting The final reading with both controls fully clockwise should be 0 99 Front Panel Diagnostic test all switches Hold down MENU button to Exit Switch 1 temp 84 Vp 0 30 Vp Reading lt gt
81. RD 3M AUSTIN CENTER 12920 NE 125TH WAY 927 E STATE 520 INDUSTRIAL PARK DR 2300 RIVERSIDE BLVD PO BOX 74 2096 SOUTH COLE RD SUITE 7 15375 BARRANCA PARKWAY SUITE B207 45 SALEM ST 1016 CLEGG COURT 9801 W HIGGINS RD 2601 WAYNE ST PO BOX 269 605 JEFFERSON RD 114 OLD STATE RD PO BOX 14460 PO BOX 1587 401N BROAD ST 400 REIMANN AVE 800 E NORTHWEST HWY 14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR PO BOX 500 561HILLGROVE AVE PO BOX 10373 COUPLES DEPT C PORTER STS PO BOX 47 2064 12TH AVE PO BOX 609 City State Zip Code SANTA CLARA CA 95051 0606 GREENVILLE SC 29606 RIVERSIDE CA 92507 2114 GARDEN GROVE CA 92641 MELBOURNE FL 32902 0883 SANTA CLARA CA 95051 SAN JOSE CA 95131 1008 AUSTIN TX 78769 2963 KIRKLAND WA 98034 7716 SCHAUMBURG IL 60195 4526 MANCHESTER NH 03103 NORFOLK NE 68701 2242 BOISE ID 83705 IRVINE CA 92718 PROVIDENCE RI 02907 PETALUMA CA 94952 1152 ROSEMONT IL 60018 4771 ENDICOTT NY 13760 3272 WHIPPANY NJ 07981 ST LOUIS MO 63178 FORT DODGE IA 50501 PHILADELPHIA PA 19108 1001 SANDWICH IL 60548 1846 DES PLAINES IL 60016 3049 BEAVERTON OR 97077 0001 LA GRANGE IL 60525 5914 JOPLIN MO 64801 COLUMBUS NE 68601 3632 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Assy Tektronix SerialNo Serial Number Part Number Effective Discontd Qty Name amp Description CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLIES Al 672 1388 00 CKT BD ASSY MAIN W EPROM Al 672 1390 00 CKT BD A
82. The ADC U2023 is an eight channel analog to digital converter It converts the voltages on the wipers of the resistive shaft encoders to a digital value depending on the position of the encoders It also converts the voltage on the display thermistor TsENSE and the chart recorder thermistor divider circuits into digital values 5 27 Circuit Descriptions Electroluminescent Backlight Switch and Power Supply Display Heater Circuitry 5 28 Display Temperature Compensation representing the corresponding temperatures The temperature data is used by the processor to compensate the LCD drive voltage and chart recorder print parameters for variations in temperature The control signal TRIG ADC is used to start a conversion ADC RD reads the value and Ao and A select one of the eight channels for conversion Control signal EOC notifies the processor of a conversion completion via the IR3 line The EL electroluminescent backlight is switched by software Control signal LIGHTCS with RD or WR sets or resets respectively NOR latch U3020 The output of the latch is applied to the side of comparator U2020B the side is held at2 5 VDC When the output of the latch is high the comparator output is 16 VDC which turns off the gate of P channel FET Q1030 turning off power to the EL power supply PS2030 When the output is low the comparator output is which turns on the FET turning on the power to the EL power
83. Therefore you would see the difference waveform as a straight line 1 19 Operating Instructions 1 20 Difference Waveform Figure 1 18 Display of a Stored Waveform Current Waveform and Difference Waveform The VIEW DIFF waveform will move up and down with the current input as you move the SPOSITION control Any of the waveforms may be turned on or off independently You might want to turn off some waveforms if the display becomes too busy or confusing NOTE Because the stored waveform is not affected by changes in the instrument controls care should be taken with current waveform settings or the results could be misleading One method to minimize the overlapping of the waveforms in VIEW DIFF is 1 Move the waveform to be stored into the top half of the display Figure 1 19 Waveform Moved to Top Half of Display 2 Push STORE to capture the waveform Remember once it is stored this waveform cannot be moved on the display 3 Move the current waveform the one you want to compare against the stored waveform to the center of the display 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions 1503C MTDR Service Manual 4 Push VIEW STORE and the stored waveform will appear above the current waveform Figure 1 20 Current Wavetotm Stored Wavefont Above 5 Push VIEW DIFF and the difference waveform will appear below the current waveform Figure 1 21 Curren
84. To calibrate the zero distance delay IR2 is set low and through R3037 and CR3030 turns on Q3030 whose collector through R3036 and R3035 raises the cathode of CR4030 to 6 VDC This allows R4023 to turn on Q4030 Capacitor C4022 through R4030 04030 is charged to the new corrected level at TP4020 that was asked for by the processor The correction voltage on C4022 from buffer amplifier U4021B is scaled by voltage divider R8023 R8022 and R8021 from a range of 5 VDC to a range of zero to 3 5 VDC This voltage is applied to the base of comparator Q8020B which provides 10 ns of zero distance delay adjustment Components C3048 R3042 R2032 C3047 R2034 and C8024 are used to reduce jitter and cross coupling between circuits 1503 MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Pulse Generator Sampler Introduction front end consists of two major circuits m Pulse Generator m Sampler The pulse generator is triggered by a line from the Main Board and sends out a pulse via the front panel connector The sampler which is also triggered from the Main Board takes its input from the signal returning from the test cable via the front panel connector then generates a steady state sample of a small time segment of the input as its video out A block diagram of the pulse generator sampler is shown in Figure 5 12 15V 12V 12V Regulat
85. WIRE ASSYS Mfr Code 98291 53387 0 260 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 06915 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 53387 53387 53387 00779 53387 0 01 80009 0 260 0 01 0 01 85471 ODWW6 Mfr Part Number 051 051 0049 N2520 6002UB 441 1683 00 211 0661 00 ORD BY DESCR 211 0007 00 ORD BY DESCR TCG1 2 500 03 ORD BY DESCR 211 0007 00 ORD BY DESCR 211 0661 00 211 0198 00 210 0005 00 211 0661 00 2526 5002UB 2540 5002UB 2520 5002UB 2 641605 3 2514 6002UB 213 0904 00 040 1276 01 343 1436 00 212 0001 00 ORD BY DESCR R 10470MED PSA LCR 12V3 4P 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Cont Tektronix Part Serial Serial No Number Number Effective Discont d FIG 10 3 Bete ese 2 211 0658 00 3 385 0122 00 4 131 3359 00 5 351 0755 00 FIG 10 4 rere 2 211 0661 00 3 131 3445 00 4 131 4177 00 5 131 1857 00 6 211 0507 00 7 210 0561 00 8 211 0507 00 9 210 0561 00 253 0188 00 162 0503 00 650 3715 00 10 220 0547 01 11 211 0105 00 l 5 RE 13 211 0105 00 14 120 1607 00 020000 023217 120 1922 00 023218 307 0449 00 15 212 0112 00 16 210 0002 00 17 260 2372 00 18 204 0832 00 1503 MTDR Service Manual Qty amp Description FP HG AR AR AR
86. a complete listing If the contents of the shipping container are incomplete if there is mechanical damage or defect or if the instrument does not meet operational check requirements contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative If the shipping container is damaged notify the carrier as well as Tektronix The instrument was inspected both mechanically and electrically before shipment It should be free if mechanical damage and meet or exceed all electrical specifications Procedures to check operational performance are in the Performance Checks appendix These checks should satisfy the requirements for most receiving or incoming inspections The 1503C is intended to be operated from a power source that will not apply more than 250 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation The AC power connector is a three way polarized plug with the ground earth lead connected directly to the instrument frame to provide electrical shock protection If the unit is connected to any other power source the unit frame must be connected to earth ground Power and voltage requirements are printed on the back panel The 1503C can be operated from either 115 VAC or 230 VAC nominal line voltage at 45 Hz to 440 Hz or a 12 VDC supply or an internal battery Further information on the 150
87. and display it on the LCD A block diagram of the display module is shown in Figure 5 14 r4 column driver 4 NE board to board elastomer column elastome SIN DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL 64 64 64 64 64 DISPLAY MEMORY ROW DRIVER CONTROLLER 64 SBE CELL upper 128 X 256 lower 40 PIN CONNECTOR column elastome flex cable ey kee ed Ere 417 64 64 64 DRIVER N column driver 4 CONTROLLER BOARD COLUMN DRIVER BOARD Figure 5 14 Display Module Block Diagram 1503C MTDR Service Manual 5 29 Circuit Descriptions 5 30 LCD Cell The LCD cell is the video screen that displays information generated by the processor The processor updates the display memory periodically with a new picture and the display memory holds this bit pattern data This data is received by the display controller and sent to the drivers along with some control and timing signals that provide operating information to the drivers The row and column drivers are attached electrically to the LCD cell through elastomeric connectors and a flex cable These drivers place signal voltages on the electrode matrix in the LCD cell and thus generate the video display There are other circuits contained in the display module An indium tin oxide ITO heater warms th
88. are suggestions on how to set up test fixtures that will provide flexibility and provide network safety in case of power interruptions to the 1503C Ethernet A Before Testing Ethernet During Testing VG 5494949 19494904945 22202044 Male type N 007 Male ype N 50 Q terminator 9 To 1503C 50 Q terminator T 2 To 1503C Y Front Panel Y Front Panel UMU EY Figure 4 2 N Type Male T Connector HII f A To 1503C Front Panel Before Testing During Testing M To 1503C Front Panel Female to Female Female to Female BNC to BNC BNC to BNC 50 Q termi Y Female type N 50 Q terminator Female type N A Y HW Y Figure 4 3 N Type Female T Connector lt Ethernet 1 Before removing the Ethernet cable terminator make sure you the correct adapters and cables ready 1503C MTDR Service Manual 4 5 Options and Accessories 4 6 2 Setthe 1503 front panel controls CABLE see below IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER
89. from the option port 4 Loosen the four screws on the back of the case and set the instrument face up on a flat surface 5 Swing the handle out of the way of the front panel 6 Break the chassis seal by pushing downward with both hands on the handle pivots on each side of the case 7 Grasp the case with one hand and tilt the chassis out with the other Lift by grasping the outside perimeter of the front panel CAUTION Do not lift the instrument by the front panel controls The controls will be damaged if you do so 8 Remove the top shield from the instrument by gently lifting the rear edge near the sides of the instrument 9 Unplug the battery cable positive lead at the battery 10 Unplug the battery cable negative lead at the battery 11 Unplug the battery cable at the power supply Operating Instructions 1 4 Low Battery Low Temperature Operation 12 Remove the cable 13 Remove the two screws mounting the battery clamp to the chassis 14 Carefully remove the clamp without touching the battery terminals 15 Lift the battery out To re install or replace the battery repeat the above steps in reverse order If the battery is low it will be indicated on the LCD bat low If this is the case protective circuitry will shut down the 1503C within minutes Either switch to AC power or work very fast If the instrument is equipped with a chart recorder using the recorder will further reduce the batte
90. front panel Option Port The 1503C may be operated from an AC power source or an internal lead gel battery which supplies a minimum of eight hours operating time see the Specifications chapter for specifics Options available for the 1503C are explained in the Options and Accessories chapter of this manual Terminology used in this manual is in accordance with industry practice Abbreviations are in accordance with ANSI Y 1 1 19722 with exceptions and additions explained in parentheses in the text Graphic symbology is based on ANSI Y32 2 1975 Logic symbology is based on ANSI Y32 14 1973 and manufacturer s data books or sheets A copy of ANSI standards may be obtained from the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 345 47th Street New York NY 10017 Changes that involve manual corrections and or additional data will be incorporated into the text and that page will show a revision date on the inside bottom edge History information is included in any diagrams in gray xvii General Information Installation and Repacking Unpacking and Inltial Inspection Power Source and Power Requirements Repacking for Shipment xviii Before unpacking the 1503C from its shipping container or carton inspect for signs of external damage If the carton is damaged notify the carrier The shipping carton contains the basic instrument and its standard accessories Refer to the replaceable parts list in the Service Manual for
91. full charge is preferred over a partial charge For maximum capacity the batteries should be charged within a temperature range of 20 C to 25 C However the batteries can be charged within a temperature range of 0 C to 40 C and operated in temperatures ranging from 10 C to 55 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions Battery Removal 1503C MTDR Service Manual CAUTION Do not charge battery pack below 0 C or above 40 C Do not discharge battery pack below 10 C or above 55 C If removing the battery pack during or after exposure to these extreme conditions turn the instrument off and remove the AC power cord The battery pack should be stored within a temperature range of 35 C to 65 However the self discharge rate will increase as the temperature increases If the instrument is stored with the battery pack installed the battery pack should be charged every 90 days A fully charged battery pack will lose about 12 of its capacity in three to four months if stored between 20 C and 25 C NOTE The battery pack in the 1503C is inside the instrument case with no external access Refer removal and replacement to qualified service personnel 1 Ensure that the instrument power is off 2 Ifthe instrument is connected to an AC power source remove the AC power cable from the source and from the instrument 3 Ifinstalled remove the chart recorder or other device
92. green glow 1 Press MENU 2 Use POSITION control to scroll to Setup Menu 3 Press MENU again 4 Use the SPOSITION control to scroll to Light is ON Exit Setup Menu Acquisition Control Menu Vertical Scale is Decibels Distance Div is ft div gt Lightis ON Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 3 Setup Menu 5 Press MENU The EL backlight should go off and the menu line will change to Light is OFF 6 Scroll to Light is OFF and press MENU to turn the light back on 7 Press MENU again to exit the Setup Menu 8 Press MENU again to exit the Main Menu You should be able to read the LCD in all conditions of illumination from full sunlight to a darkened room The EL backlight might very gradually begin to decrease in brightness after approximately 3 000 hours of use NOTE If the EL Backlight is dim or does not work properly refer to the Troubleshooting section or the EL Backlight Replacement section in the Maintenance chapter of this manual 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 3 Calibration Front Panel Check Ifthe instrument fails any of these checks measurements corresponding to the failed control might be inaccurate or unobtainable Presets and Menu Access 1 Set the front panel controls CABLE No connection IMPEDANCE Full CW clockwise NOISE FILTER Full CW VERT SCALE Default see note below DIST DIV Full CW PULSE WIDTH Full CW Vp 30 POWER Off NOTE A default
93. if applicable If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part your local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any change in part number Change information if any is located at the rear of this manual Using the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List The tabular information in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts List is arranged for quick retrieval Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you find all of the information you need for ordering replacement parts The following table describes the content of each column in the parts list 10 1 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Parts List Column Descriptions Column Description 1 Figure amp Index Number Items in this section are referenced by figure and index numbers to the exploded view illustrations that follow Tektronix Part Number Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix Serial Number Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective Column four indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued No entries indicates the part is good for all serial numbers Qty This indicates the quantity of parts used Name amp Description An item name is separated from the description by a colon Because of space limitations an item name may sometimes appear as incomplete Use the U S Federal Catalog h
94. located near the AC power receptacle and the other is directly above the fuse holder Figure 7 2 6 5 Remove the power supply module from the instrument by moving it toward the front of the instrument guiding the power switch away from the mechanical linkage assembly Maintenance 7 4 Removing the Power Supply Board The screws identified as 1 hold the circuit board to the module They should not be removed until you are ready to remove this circuit board from the module next procedure 1 Q 4 0000 IN 1 7 Top View of Power Supply Module 2 1 x 1 6 5 End View Rear Panel 918 B N J 6 S Figure 7 2 Power Supply Module P O Rear Panel Remove the power supply module per previous procedure 2 Remove the two conductor harmonica connector Figure 7 2 3 previous page 3 Remove the four conductor harmonica connector Figure 7 2 2 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Removing the Power Transformer Removing the Power Cord Receptacle Removing the Fuse Holder and Voltage Selector 1503C MTDR Service Manual Remove four screws holding the circuit board to the module Figure 7 2 1 Remove the Power Supply Board by carefully lifting
95. lt POSITION MENU INPUT EW gt TORE lt DIFF STORE 1503C MTDR Service Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 A standard instrument defaults to ft div A metric instrument Option 05 defaults to m div but either may be changed temporarily from the menu The default can be changed by changing an internal jumper see Chapter 7 Vp The two Velocity of Propagation controls are set according to the propagation velocity factor of the cable being tested For example solid polyethylene commonly has a Vp of 0 66 Solid polytetraflourethylene Teflon 8 is approximately 0 70 Air 15 0 99 The controls decaded the left control is the first digit and the right control is the second digit For example with a Vp of 0 30 the first knob would be set to 3 and the second knob to 00 POWER Pull for power ON and push in for power OFF When the front cover is installed this switch is automatically pushed OFF PULSE WIDTH This is a five position rotary switch that selects the pulse width of the cable test signal The available settings are 2 10 100 1000 nanoseconds and AUTO The selected value is displayed on the LCD adjacent to the control The AUTO setting sets the pulse width according to the distance registered at the right side of the LCD The selected value is displayed to the left of this control o
96. on a piece of paper because you will use this reading in the Impedance Check 7 Remove the 50 Q terminator from the T connector 8 The voltage displayed should now be between 3 2 VDC and 3 8 VDC 9 Also write this reading down for the next check 10 Enter the Ethernet Menu again Exit Ethernet Menu 50 DC termination is Off Single Sweep with Carrier is Off Carrier Test is Off Collision Test is Off Move SPosition to select then push MENU button Figure 6 55 Ethernet Menu 6 34 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration DC Impedance Check 1503C MTDR Service Manual 11 Scroll to 50 Q2 termination is On 12 Press MENU This will change that selection to 50Q termination is Off 13 Exit the menus Returning to normal operation mode activates the menu selection 14 The DC voltage should drop to a nominal zero Volts If it remains at 1 7 VDC the relay is not working correctly on the option board and requires service 1 Enter the Ethernet Menu 2 Scroll to 50 Q termination is Off 3 Press MENU This will change that selection to 50 2 termination is On Exit Ethernet Menu 50 Q DC termination is On Single Sweep with Carrier is 0ff Carrier Testis Off Collision Testis Off Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 56 Ethernet Menu 4 Exit the menus Returning to normal operation mode activates the menu selection 5 Set the DMM to measure resistance 6 Measure the
97. or feet ft div Although either measurement mode may be chosen from the Setup Menu the default can easily be changed to cause the preferred mode to come up automatically at power up 1 Remove the instrument from the case 2 Remove the bottom EMI shteld 7 11 Maintenance Ribbon Cable Connectors Jumper gt Front Panel Board Figure 7 8 Location of Default Jumper on Front Panel Board 3 From the bottom side of the instrument peer into the space between the Main Board and the Front Panel Board The default jumper is located behind the screw that holds the Front Panel Assembly to the front panel mounting stud Top of Instrument Metric Front Board Standard Bottom of Instrument Figure 7 9 Default Jumper Positions 4 Using needle nose plier slip the jumper off the pins and move it to the desired default position top for meters bottom for feet Removing the Option Port Assembly x Remove the Power Supply Module as shown in a previous procedure 2 Remove the Front Panel Assembly as previously described 3 Remove the ribbon cable on the Main Board that connects the Main Board to the Option Port Assembly 4 Remove the screw and washer from the instrument side panel 5 Remove the nut from the bottom of the instrument 6 The Option Port Assembly may be disassembled further by removing the four screws from the back of the assembly This wi
98. output resistance of the 1503C by connecting the DMM to one side of the BNC T connector Note this number 7 Reverse the leads and make another measurement Note this number 8 Add the two numbers and divide by two to get the average The result should be between 49 Q and 51 Q An alternate method is to measure the carrier or collision DC voltage as follows 1 Measure the resistance on the BNC T connector with the 50 terminator connected to the opposite side 2 Disconnect the terminator and measure the resistance again 6 35 Calibration 3 The DC output impedance can then be calculated as follows T al T Where Zo is the output impedance Vo is the open circuit voltage Vt is the terminated voltage and Zt is the 50 Q terminator resistance NOTE If the instrument passes these checks the Option 06 board is functioning correctly For adjustments refer to the procedure immediately following this Any other problems will require troubleshooting the circuitry Refer to the Circuit Descriptions and Maintenance chapters of this manual 6 36 1503C MTDR Service Manual Em uu V G j W X A l D l l 1 Adjustment Procedures Equipment Required Metric Instruments Before Starting 1503C MTDR Service Manual Equipment Performance Required Example or Tek P N Digital Multimeter Range 0 to 200 VDC DM502 Oscilloscope gt 10 MHz 7 5 V cm Tek 2465B or equivalent Variable AC Sour
99. path or ground conductor The electrical circuit is actually shorter than was intended Short circuits are caused by worn leaky or missing insulation The change in accuracy of a standard or item of test equipment over an extended period of time Unless otherwise specified the period of time is assumed to be the calibration interval might also apply to range resolution or precision as a function of time The term stability might also be used to denote changes resulting from environmental influences such as temperature humidity vibration and shock An acronym for Time Domain Reflectometer These instruments are also called cable radar They send out pulses of energy and time the interval to reflections If the velocity ofthe energy through the cable is known distances to faults in the cable can be displayed or computed Conversely the speed that the energy travels through a cable of known length can also be computed The way in which the energy is reflected and the amount of the energy reflected indicate the condition of the cable Electrical energy travels at the same speed as light in a vacuum It travels slower than that everywhere else The speed that it travels in a cable is often expressed as the relative velocity of propagation This value is just a ration of the speed in the cable to the speed of light so it is always a number between 0 and 1 A velocity of propagation value of 0 50 indicates that the electrical energy moves thro
100. supply R1031 C3030 and C3031 serve to filter noise introduced to the 16 VDC supply by the EL power supply The display heater circuitry regulates the application of power to the display heater see Indium Tin Oxide Heater later in this chapter for more information When the display thermistor divider senses the display temperature has dropped below 10 C the heater can be turned on if the control signal HEAT ENABLE is not asserted For reasons of power economy the chart recorder and display heater are not allowed to operate concurrently The processor does this by asserting HEAT ENABLE while making a chart recording When HEAT ENABLE is low N channel FET 02020 is off making the voltage on the side of the comparator U2020A approximately 5 VDC This will allow the side chart recorder to always be greater than the side display thermistor divider voltage The output of the comparator will be 16 VDC which turns off P channel FET Q1020 This turns off the power to the display heater When HEAT DISABLE is high Q2020 will turn on and the voltage on the side of the comparator will be approximately 2 5 volts When the display thermistor divider voltage side is above 2 5 volts about 10 C the comparator output will be 0 V which will turn on Q1020 This will turn on the heater As the temperature rises above 10 C the thermistor divider voltage will be less than 2 5 V and Q1020 will turn off shutting off
101. then on again This will reset it for the next check 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration Aberrations Check 1503C MTDR Service Manual If the aberrations are out of specification small discontinuities might not be seen and accuracy of the instrument might be affected 1 Gas X Turn the gt POSITION control counterclockwise until the display distance window reads less than 20 00 ft Set the DIST DIV control to 1 ft div Turn the gt POSITION control counterclockwise until the distance window reads 2 00 ft Set the front panel controls IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 Connect the 50 Q precision terminator to the front panel Turn the NOISE FILTER control completely counterclockwise to the VERT SET REF position Using VERT SCALE increase the height of the pulse to four major divisions Press STORE Turn NOISE FILTER back to 1 avg 6 23 Calibration 6 24 10 Using the SPOSITION control place the baseline of the waveform on the center graticule 11 Increase VERT SCALE to 25 00 dB OMNEM uM To 12 Using gt POSITION control scroll along the waveform and verify the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 10 feet excluding any aberration that is part of the initial pulse 13 Return the cursor to 2 00 ft 14 Turn NOISE FILTER back to VERT SET REF again 15 Set DIST DIV
102. three stage shift register U2036B U2036D and U2036A which is clocked at 20 MHz from inverter U2034A The leading edge of the pulse is decoded by NAND gate U2045B which also ANDs the signal with the 20 MHz clock from inverter U2045A The resulting driver trigger pulse is a negative going pulse of nominally 25 ns width The falling edge of this pulse is determined by the edge of the 20 MHz input to gate U2045B and is used as the driver trigger The coarse delay pulse from shift register U2032D and U2032C us decoded by NOR gate U2034C to detect the pulse rising edge end of the negative pulse The resulting positive pulse is 400 ns wide one cycle of the 2 5 MHz clock This pulse is shifted through flip flop U2036C to synchronize it with the 20 MHz clock and applied to the count enable input of U2037 a four bit programmable counter Counter U2037 will have been preset to a count of 8 through 15 by the processor through latch U2043 with CS11 While the count enable pulse is present it will count exactly eight times at the 20 MHz rate thus passing through count 15 after 0 through 7 clock pulses The terminal count TC output of U2037 is a decode of count 15 Thus this signal creates the fine delay pulse after the programmed delay This positive going pulse is gated with the 20 MHz clock by NAND gate U2045C to provide 25 ns negative going pulse for the ramp trigger Ramp timing is derived from the trigger falling edge The end of the coars
103. through C9020 and R9020 Transistor Q9010 is biased to 0 5 mA between pulses to obtain fast turn on and provides a positive going 5 VDC pulse to U8010B and U8010C Flip flop U7010A is set or reset by the processor to steer the pulse either to the option port or the driver The negative going pulse from gate U8010B or U8010C is logically OR d by U8010A then applied to C9010 and R9010 This pulse is fed back to the input of the gates U8010B and U8010C through CR9010 to obtain a one shot action which stretches the driver strobe pulse width to 5 Us The driver strobe is made available at TP9011 The ramp trigger pulse from the digital timebase is AC coupled by C3040 and R3041 to Q4040 Diode CR3031 allows the negative going pulse to pass directly while R3040 limits the input current sue to the re charging of C3040 between pulses The output of Q4040 is held at ground by L5030 between pulses and rises to 6 VDC during the pulse Choke L5030 is center tapped to provide an equal negative going pulse at its undriven end This pulse is fed through C5033 and R4032 to the emitter of 04031 to obtain positive feedback 04040 This forms a one shot circuit with the pulse width determined by C5033 and R4032 The 25 ns ramp trigger pulse is thus stretched to about 80 ns at L5030 Dual transistor Q5032 operates as a current source providing a constant 5 mA current which is used to charge C5032 to create a linear voltage ramp Between ramp trigger pulses th
104. to Alligator Clips S N gt B010625 BNC Connector male to N female w Option 06 only 50 Q 3 foot Test Cable w Option 06 only Operator Manual Slide Rule Calculator Accessory Pouch Service Manual B01 instrument Service Manual B02 instrument Battery Chart Recorder 15 Chart Paper single roll Chart Paper 25 roll pack Chart Paper 100 pack Cable Interconnect 360 inches Connector BNC male to BNC male 4 19 Options and Accessories Connector BNC female to Alligator Clip S N gt B010625 Connector BNC female to Hook tip Leads Connector BNC female to Dual Banana Plug Connector BNC male to Dual Binding Post Connector BNC male to N female Connector BNC female to N male Connector BNC female to UHF male Connector BNC female to UHF female Connector BNC female to Type F male Connector BNC male to Type F female Connector BNC female to GR Connector BNC male to GR Precision 50 Q Cable S N 2 010625 Terminator 75 BNC Adapter Direct Current Isolation Network Pulse Inverter Token Ring Network Adapter Twisted Pair Adapter USOC Adapter Star LAN Adapter Token Ring Interface 4 20 1503C MTDR Service Manual l s Circuit Descriptions Introduction 1503C MTDR Service Manual This chapter describes how the instrument works First is a circuit overview and how it relates to the block diagram Figure 5 1 next page Following that are the separate section
105. to this distance l 50600 00 ft nmo 0 i s 2 i i J F Figure 2 5 Flatline Display Out to 50 000 Feet 2 Vertical Position Ifthe instrument fails this test it can be used but should be serviced when possible Offset Check Not all of the waveforms will be viewable at all gain settings 1 Using the POSITION control verify that the entire waveform can be moved to the very top of the display off the graticule area 50600001 S TEE TEE Waveform amo t 4 P4 Figure 2 6 Waveform Off the of the Display 2 Using the POSITION control verify that the entire waveform can be moved to the very bottom of the display to the bottom graticule line 2 4 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operator Performance Checks 3 Noise Check 1503C MTDR Service Manual T up LE amo 5 u Waveform E Figure 2 7 Waveform at the Bottom of the Display If the instrument fails this check it may still be usable for measurements of large faults that do not require a lot of gain great deal of noise reduction can be made using the NOISE FILTER control Send your instrument to be serviced when possible O ee s Set PULSE WIDTH to 2 ns Using the POSITION control and VERT SCALE control set the gain to 57 dB with the waveform centered vertically in the display 9
106. viewed directly Cable voltage n nH gt m e samples Recombined samples Figure 5 2 Waveform Accumulation Diagram Voltage samples from the pulser sampler are combined with a vertical position voltage derived from the front panel control then amplified The amplifier gain is programmed by the processor to give the selected vertical sensitivity Each amplified sample voltage is then digitized by an analog to digital converter and stored in the processor memory When the processor has accumulated sufficient samples 251 to form the desired waveform the samples are formatted This formatted data is then transferred to the display memory The display logic routes the data to each pixel of the LCD where each digital data bit determines whether or not a particular pixel is turned on or off Between each waveform samples are taken at the leading edge of the 2 Us pulse for the timebase correction Cursor and readout display data is determined by the processor and combined with the formatted sample waveform before it is sent to the display Circuit Descriptions Power Supply 5 4 Introduction 115 230 volt AC line The power supply consists of the following Primary Circuit Pre regulator Battery Charger Deep Discharge Protection Port regulator DC to DC Converters The power supply converts either 11
107. voltage is compared to the voltage from the timebase DAC such that when the ramp exceeds the DAC voltage the sampler strobe g falls This falling edge is used as the sampler strobe for video sampling At the beginning of each sweep the zero distance reference is calibrated to the front panel connector and the length of the analog ramp to 50 ns Zero distance reference is calibrated by setting the digital and analog timebase for zero delay Then the processor adjusts the driver delay so as to sample at the 10 point of the pulse The ramp is calibrated by removing 50 ns of delay one 50 ns clock cycle from the sample trigger and then reinserting it with the analog delay The processor adjusts the reference for the timebase DAC so as to sample at the previous level This matches the analog delay to the 50 ns period of the clock 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 0 asind 1nd1nO NO x 7 ANIOd 9501 19 3S 1d 3T1dWVS OL 13S 1HVLS di VH su 06 13437 EN su SAV13g AV130 108 q3xia 13 dINVt Su 06 d lt AV13G 0 13A31 HO1VHVdINOO Y 13S 0847 AV13 3 05021 OWL 31dWVS HO1V VdWOS Hans OL 1 SUOS Avi 01 Z Ino as1nd 110641 A N3O 351 Ol5iHL PTS EU Nos 13S T3A418O01VHVdlNOO m
108. waveform distortion problems RAM ROM Diagnostics Menu performs tests on the RAM Random Access Memory and the ROM Read Only Memory Timebase Is Normal Auto Correction Diagnostic No Correction When in Normal Auto Correction the instrument compensates for variations in temperature and voltage This condition might not be desirable while calibrating the instrument While in Diagnostic No Correction the circuits will not correct for these variations Front Panel Diagnostics aids in testing the front panel LCD Diagnostics Menu has these choices i li Hi iv LCD Alignment Diagnostic generates a dot pattern of every other pixel on the LCD These pixels can be alternated to test the LCD Response Time Diagnostic generates alternate squares of dark and light reversing their order This tests the response time of the LCD and can give an indication of the effectiveness of the LCD heater in a cold environment LCD Drive Test Diagnostic generates a moving vertical bar pattern across the LCD Contrast Adjust allows you to adjust the contrast of the LCD It generates an alternating four pixel pattern The nominal contrast is set 1 9 Operating Instructions 1 10 internally When in Contrast Adjust mode VERT SCALE is used as the contrast adjustment control This value ranges from 0 to 255 units and is used by the processor to evaluate and correct circuit variations caused by temperature changes in the en
109. whenever you suspect possible incorrect operation of the Ethernet option Correct operation of the Option 06 depends on correct operation of the basic instrument Equipment Required Equipment Example or Tek P N Digital Multimeter DM502 BNC T connector 103 0030 xx Equipment Setup 1 Connecta BNC T connector to the front panel CABLE connector of the 1503C 2 On one side of the adapter connect a 50 Q terminator 3 Connect the other side to the digital multimeter 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 31 Calibration 6 32 500 terminator 1503C Front Panel Y c To O Figure 6 50 Equipment Setup 4 Set the 1503C front panel controls IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB PULSE WIDTH 2 ns settings for other controls do not affect this check 5 Turn POWER on 6 Press MENU 7 Scroll to Ethernet Menu Return to Normal Operation Help with Instrument Controls Cable Information Menu Setup Menu Diagnostics Menu View Stored Waveform S ettings Option Port Menu Ethernet Menu Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 51 Main Menu 8 Press MENU again 9 Scroll to 50 2 termination is Off 10 Press MENU This will change that selection to 50 0 termination is On 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration Exit Ethernet Menu 50 Q DC termination On Single Sweep with Carrier is 0ff Carrier Test
110. z cin uwa TO ees Reflection Adjusted to One Division in Height Display with VIEW INPUT Turned Display of a Stored Waveform Display of a Stored Waveform and Current Waveform Display of a Stored Waveform Current Waveform and Difference Waveform Waveform Moved to Top Half of Display Current Waveform Centered Stored Waveform ee Risk Current Waveform Center Stored Waveform Above Difference Below Waveform of Three Foot Lead in Cable Cursor Moved to End of Three Foot Lead in Cable Cursor Moved to End of Three Foot Lead in Cable Cursor Moved to 0 00 ft Incident Pulse at Four Divisions FILTER at Desired Seting eae Waveform Viewed in Normal Operation Waveform Showing Intermittent Short Waveform Display with No Outgoing Pulses 1 1 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 13 1 14 1 14 1 15 1 15 1 16 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 19 1 20 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 23 1 24 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 26 1503C MTDR Service Manual Table of Contents 1503C MTDR Service Manual Figure 1 30 Figure 2 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15
111. 0 211 0105 00 211 0661 00 211 0198 00 210 0005 00 211 0661 00 131 3361 00 131 3181 00 131 3359 00 136 0755 00 131 4183 00 213 0904 00 040 1276 01 343 1436 00 212 0001 00 210 0007 00 348 0090 00 146 0066 00 Effective B024162 Serial No Discont d Qty Name amp Description 1 1 FP e N N e e WwW N N rn CONN RF J ACK SMB 50 OHM CONN HDR PCB MALE SHRD 4SIDES CHASSIS FRONT AL NOTE FRONT CHASSIS IS A SUBPART TO CHASSIS ASSY SCR ASSEM WSHR 4 40 X 0 25 PNH POZ WSHR LOCK 0 115 ID SPLIT SCR MACH 4 40 0 188 2 WSHR LOCK 0 115 ID SPLIT GUIDE CKT BD POLYCARBONATE 2 5 L NOTE CKT BD GUIDES ARE SUBPARTS OF CHASSIS ASSY NUT PL ASSEM W 4 40 X 0 25 POWER SUPPLY ASSY SEE A3REPL SCR MACH 4 40 X 0 188 PNH POZ SCR MACH 4 40 X 0 188 FLH POZ SCR ASSEM WSHR 4 40 X 0 25 PNH POZ SCR MACH 4 40 X 0 438 2 WSHR LOCK 6 EXT 0 02 THK STL CD PL BD ASSY SEE 1 REPL SCR ASSEM WSHR 4 40 X 0 25 PNH POZ CONN HDR PCD MALE RTANG W SHRD CONN HDR PCB MALE RTANG W SHRD CONN HDR PCB MALE 2 X 10 5 2 X 14 CONN HDR PCB MALE 2 X 7 SCR TPG TR 6 32 X 0 5 PNH TORX CHASSIS MAIN AL SEE PWR SUPPLY ASSY BATTERY ASSY CLAMP BTRY MT ALUMINUM SCREW MACH 8 32 X 0 25 PNH STL CD PL POZ WSHR LOCK 8 EXT 0 02 THK CD PL STL PAD CUSHIONING 2 03 X 0 69 X 0 312 SI BATTERY 12V LEAD ACID 3 4AH 5 28 X 2 36 X 2 6 RECT ASSY SEE
112. 0 25W RES FXD FILM 120 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 20K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 15K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 16K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 5 6K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 10K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 300 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 1K OHM 596 0 25W RES FXD FILM 10K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 7 5K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 4 7K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 1K OHM 596 0 25W RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD CMPSN 16 OHM 5 0 125W RES FXD CMPSN 820 OHM 5 0 125W RES FXD CMPSN 16 OHM 5 0 125W RES FXD CMPSN 820 OHM 5 0 125W RES FXD FILM 10K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 39 OHM 596 0 25W RES FXD FILM 10K OHM 5 0 25W RES FXD FILM 50 5 OHM 0 196 0 125W RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W XFMR RF TOROID 1 1 5 TURNS 3UH 30 XFMR SIG BIFILAR 460NH 30 2T TOROID CORE XFMR RF TOROID 1 1 4 TURNS 1 9UH 30 D D D D D D H H H H H H H H N N N N NNN e e e e e e LB Un C c oo C c CO 2 c6 c 1 F F F fpa fpa fpo fa poa pa j S ja fa QU N N N NY DN NY NY e e rn Lr c e rm m t H N gt c c p N N H 0J R03 0 R03 0 R03 Mfr Part Numbe
113. 0 8B C1 C6 1503C MTDR Service Manual 9 7 Diagrams A2 FRONT PANEL CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE 5 BRD C1011 10B D1 1 R1021 10A C1 Bi U2010A 10B D1 A2 C1015 10A 1 1 R1022A 10B C3 Bi U2010B 10C D2 A2 C2010 10A 2 R1022B 10B C4 B1 U2020A 10A B1 B2 C2011 10A 2 1023 10 C2 B1 U2020B 10B C3 B2 C2020 10A C1 B2 R1024 10A B1 B1 U2021 10B C1 B2 2021 10 E1 B2 R1025 10A B1 B1 U2022A 10C F2 B2 C2022 10B 2 B2 R1026 10A 1 1 02022 10 1 B2 C2023 10 G4 B2 R1027 10B C3 U2022B 10 2 2 2024 10 1 B2 R1030 10B D2 C1 U2022C 10B B2 B2 C2025 10B B3 B2 R1031 10B D2 C1 U2023 10B E3 B2 C2026 10B E4 B2 R2010 10A B2 A2 U2024 10A G1 B2 C2027 10B B3 B2 R2020 10B F1 B2 U2025 10A G2 B2 C2028 10B E4 B2 R2021 10A B3 B2 U3020A 10B B3 B3 C2030 10A C1 C2 R2022 10A C1 B2 03020 10 B3 B3 C2031 10B C3 C2 R2024A 10B B2 U3020C 10B B3 B3 C2032 10B C4 C2 R2024B 10B 2 030200 10 B3 C2033 10B D3 C2 R2030 10B D4 C2 U3021A 10B B1 B3 C2034 10 D4 C2 R2031 10B E4 C2 U3021B 10C C2 B3 C3010 10A A4 A3 R2032 10B D3 C2 U3021C 10A B2 B3 C3020 10B H4 B3 R2034 10B B3 C2 U3021D 10A B2 B3 C3021 10A C1 B3 R2035 10B B3 C2 U3022A 10A B3 B3 C3022 10A C1 B3 R2036 10B C3 C2 U3022B 10A B3 B3 C3023 10A 1 B3 R2037 10B C4 C2 U3022C 10A B2 B3 C3030 t 10B D3 C3 R3010 10A B4 030220 10 B3 B3 C3031 T 10
114. 011 1A F2 A2 J1010 1A B2 Al C1035 1A F4 C1 J1030 1A G4 C1 R2012 1A G2 A2 C1036 1A G5 C1 J2010 1A H2 A2 R2013 1A A6 A2 C1037 1A G5 C1 R2014 1A A6 A2 C1038 1A F6 C1 L1010 1A E3 1 R2015 1A B6 A2 C2010 1A F3 A2 L2020 1A D6 B2 R2016 1A 5 2 C2011 1A 5 2 R2017 1A A5 A2 Q1010 1 2 1 2012 1A F3 A2 1011 1 2 1 R2018 1A B5 A2 C2013 1A B6 A2 Q1012 1A E2 A1 R2020 1A C7 B2 C2020 1A C7 B2 Q2010 1A B6 A2 R2021 1A D7 B2 C2021 1A 05 B2 Q2011 1 5 2 R2022 1A D7 B2 C2022 1A C7 B2 Q2012 1A 5 2 R2023 1A D7 B2 C2023 1A C7 B2 R2024 1A C7 B2 Q2020 1A D7 B2 C2024 1A EZ B2 Q2021 1A D8 B2 R2025 1A D7 B2 C2025 1A E6 B2 Q2022 1A D7 B2 R2026 1A D8 B2 C2030 1A E8 C2 Q2030 1A F6 C2 R2027 1A D7 B2 C2031 1A G6 C2 Q2031 1A F6 C2 R2030 1A G6 C2 R2031 1A G4 C2 CR1010 1A B2 Al R1010 1A B3 1 R2032 1A G7 C2 CR1011 1A E3 Al R1011 1A B3 Al CR1030 1A F4 C1 R1012 1A B3 1 52010 1A 5 2 CR1031 1A F5 C1 R1013 1A C3 1 CR1032 1A F5 C1 R1014 1A D2 1 1030 1A F5 C1 CR1033 1A F5 C1 R1015 1A B3 1 1031 1 G6 C1 CR1034 1A F3 C1 R1016 1A B3 1 1010 1A A3 Al T Back Side Components 1503C MTDR Service Manual 9 9 Diagrams 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD TP1020 1A G2 Bi TP2010 1A B2 A2 TP2030 1A E6 C2 U1010 1A C4 Al U1011 1A D3 Al U1020A 1A B6 B1 U1020B 1A B6 Bi U1021A 1A B7 Bi U1021B 1A B8 Bi U1022 1A C6 B1 U1023 1A C7 B1 U1024B 1A E7 B1 U2010 1A G2 A2
115. 1 0 2W 57668 20 49 9 A1A1R3032 322 3327 00 RES FXD FILM 24 9K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 24 9 A1A1R3033 322 3165 00 RES FXD FILM 511 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 511E AlA1R3034 322 3261 00 RES FXD FILM 5 11K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50G5111FT A1A1R3035 322 3289 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 10 0 AlA1R3036 322 3243 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 3 32K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50 1 G33200F A1A1R3037 322 3314 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 18 2K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 18K2 A1A1R3038 322 3306 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 195 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 15 0 A1A1R3039 322 3327 00 RES FXD FILM 24 9K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 24 9 A1A1R3040 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K A1A1R3041 322 3126 00 RES FXD FILM 200 OHM 196 0 2W 91637 CCF501G200R0F A1A1R3042 322 3173 00 RES FXD FILM 619 OHM 196 0 2W 91637 CCF50 2F619R0F A1A1R4020 322 3297 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 12 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 12K1 A1A1R4021 322 3261 00 RES FXD FILM 5 11K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50G5111FT A1A1R4022 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K A1A1R4023 322 3347 00 RES FXD FILM 40 2K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50 2 G40201F A1A1R4030 322 3126 00 RES FXD FILM 200 OHM 196 0 2W 91637 CCF501G 200R0F A1A1R4031 322 3325 00 RES FXD FILM 23 7K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 23K7 A1A1R4032 322 3261 00 RES FXD FILM 5 11K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 5065 A1A1R4040 322 3281 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 8 25K OHM 1
116. 1 avg VERT SCALE see below DIST DIV appropriate setting for cable length PULSE WIDTH 2 ns or 10 ns Vp to cable specifications POWER ON see below CAUTION DO NOT use the Auto pulse width mode The longer pulses will cause problems on working networks 3 Request the system administrator to notify network users of possible disruptions Using the POSITION control access the Ethernet Menu Scroll to 50 Q DC Termination is Off and turn it Return to normal operation R As previously described connect one end of a 50 Q jumper cable to the front panel CABLE connector then connect the other end to one side of the BNC T connector see Figures 4 2 and 4 3 8 Connect the Ethernet cable to the BNC T connector 9 Remove the 50 Q terminator At this point you are testing on an active network CAUTION The 50 termination of the 1503C is not maintained with the power off In case of power failure immediately replace the 50 Q terminator on the BNC T connector 10 With the NOISE FILTER set at 1 avg traffic will appear as large random noise spikes If the traffic is severe enough to make measurements difficult increase the NOISE FILTER setting NOTE The traffic on the display has no relationship to where it came from on the cable In fact traffic can appear on the display beyond the end of the cable 11 A VERT SCALE setting of 30 dB will normally allow you to see normal taps at the ne
117. 100V CAP FXD ELCTLT 22UF 50 10 25V AL CAP FXD CER DI 0 05UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 01UF 20 50V Mfr Code 04713 04713 04713 04713 0 R04 0 R04 24165 04222 31433 31433 31433 31433 04222 04222 04222 24165 24165 04222 04222 04222 1W344 04222 1W344 24165 1W344 04222 04222 55680 04222 04222 Mfr Part Number MC74HCO2AN MC74HCO2AN MC74HCO2AN MC74HCO2AN TC74HC253AP TC74HC253AP 530268 AR205C103MAATRSTDII C322C102 265 C114C224M5Y5CA C322C102 265 C322C102 265 SR202A510 AA SR 305C 105MAATRSTDII SR 305C 105MAATRSTDII 199D106X0025CA1 199D106X0025CA1 SR305E105ZAA SR305E105ZAA SR305E105ZAA SME35VB101M8X11FT SR305E105ZAA SME35VB101M8X11FT 199D685X0035DA1 SME35VB101M8X11FT SR305C224MAA SR301A332JAA UVX2A220MPA SR305E503ZAA AR205C103MAATRSTDII 8 19 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A3A1C2024 A3A1C2025 A3A1C2030 A3A1C2031 A3A1CR1010 A3A1CR1011 A3A1CR1030 A3A1CR1031 A3A1CR1032 A3A1CR1033 A3A1CR1034 A3A1CR2010 A3A1CR2011 A3A1CR2012 A3A1CR2013 A3A1CR2014 A3A1CR2015 A3A1CR2016 A3A1CR2020 A3A1CR2021 A3A1CR2030 A3A1CR2031 A3A1J1010 A3A1J1030 A3A1J2010 111010 112020 101010 101011 A3A1Q1012 A3A1Q2010 A3A1Q2011 A3A1Q2012 A3A1Q2020 8 20 SerialNo Serial No Effective Tektronix Part Number 281 0925 01 290 0846 00 281 0925 01 283 0059 02
118. 1295 01295 01295 04713 01295 04713 34649 75378 01295 01295 01295 01295 01295 34371 27014 01295 04713 01295 04713 24355 01295 04713 01295 04713 04713 04713 24355 34371 Mfr Part Number MM74C240 MC78LO5ACPRP SN74HC20N SN74HC74N MC74HC27N SN74HC32N MC74HC245AN MM74HC244N DILB28P 108 SN74HC138N SN74HC138N SN74HC74N SN74HC138N MC74HC113N SN74HC138N MC74HC113N P82C54 MX0 55GA 3l 20M SN74ALS 175N 14415113 SN74ALS02N SN74ALS 175N SN74ALS 161BN CD74HCT08E17 ADC1205 14415113 MC74HC175N SN74HC374N MC 74F10N 7534 N SN74HC374N MC74HCO2AN SN74HC374N MC74HC175N MC3410CL MC1403U OPO8FP OR PM308 026P CA3160E 8 15 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Serial No Mfr Number Part Number Effective Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number AlA1U4020 156 3151 00 IC INTFC CMOS D A CONVERTER 24355 7534 AlA1U4021 156 1699 00 IC LINEAR DUAL BI FET OPNL AMPL LOW OFFSET 01295 TL288CP AlA1U4040 4 156 0513 00 IC MISC CMOS ANALOG MUX 8 CHANNEL 04713 MC14051BCP AlA1U5010 156 0854 00 IC LINEAR BIP OLAR OP AMP 24355 OR PM308 026P AlA1U5020 156 1156 00 IC LINEAR BIFET OP AMP LF356N DIP 08 3 04713 LF356N AlA1U5040 156 1114 00 IC LINEAR MOS FET INP COS MOS OUT OP 34371 160 1 106040 156 0513 00 IC MISC CMOS ANALOG MUX 8 CHANNEL 04713 MC14051BCP AlA1U7010 156 27
119. 2 Q1010 Figure 6 62 Power Supply Test Point 1020 Change the AC output voltage on the Variac to 132 VAC Verify that the 16 6 VDC supply remains regulated 16 4 to 16 8 VDC Reduce the Variac output voltage to 90 VAC Verify that the 16 6 VDC supply is still regulated 16 4 to 16 8 VDC A Move the positive probe to the 16 2 VDC supply TP2030 02030 e a Q2022 i Q2031 8 CR2030 CR2031 4 R2030 207 r Up emm C204 O CR2021 Figure 6 63 Power Supply Test Point TP2030 7 Reduce the Variac output voltage until the 16 2 VDC and the instrument shut down This voltage must be lower than 90 VAC 8 Raise the Variac output voltage to 120 VAC The instrument should remain shut down 9 Turn the 1503C POWER off 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 41 Adjustment Procedures Main Board 12 VDC Check and Adjust 12 VDC Figure 6 64 Location of Main Board in Instrument 1 Turn the instrument over to access the Main Board 2 Attach the positive probe from the voltmeter to the side facing the edge of the board of C9031 3 Attach the negative probe to the other side of C9035 fL s of 07030 es VCOLY 9ZOLY 4420 48ZOLYH 40g0LYH ELY gu 4S008H
120. 2 B023052 B023052 B023052 Name amp Description TER TERM TERM TERM TERM TERM TERM TERM TERM TERM IC DIGITAL CMOS GATES QUAD 2 INPUT IC MISC CMOS ANALOG MUX DUAL 4 CHANNEL IC LINEAR BIP OLAR OP AMP DUAL SINGLE SUPP IC LINEAR VOLTAGE REFERENCE 2 PIN TO 52 IC LINEAR BIFET OP AMP DUAL LOW POWER IC LINEAR BIFET OP AMP DUAL LOW POWER IC LIN TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L EAR BIFET OP AMP LF351N DIODE ZENER 11V 596 0 4W 1N962B DIODE ZENER 5 6V 5 5W 1N5339B DIODE ZENER 5 6V 5 5W 1N5339B DIODE ZENER 11V 5 0 4W 1N962B CKT BD ASSY ETHERNET CAP FXD MICA DI 10PF 4 0 5P F 500V CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 2096 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER DI 0 1LUF 20 50V 520 CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 20 50V 5ZU CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER DI 0 1LUF 20 50V 5ZU Mfr Code 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 27014 04713 04713 1ES66 01295 01295 27014 04713 0471
121. 2 R8040 6 E3 08 U1011B 5 G3 A1 U2027B 7 A4 B2 R8041 6 E3 D8 U1012A 5 E2 1 02030 7 2 C2 R8042 6 E3 D8 U1012B 5 E3 1 02031 7 C1 C2 R8043 6 E2 D8 U1020 2 G3 B1 U2032 7 C2 C2 R8044 6 C2 D8 U2033A 3 B2 C2 U1021 2 1 R8045 6 C2 D8 U1022 2 E2 B1 U2033B 7 F1 C2 R8046 6 C2 D8 U1023 2 D1 B1 U2034A 7 G1 C2 R8047 6 C2 D8 U1030 2 B1 C1 U2034B 7 E2 C2 R9010 8A H2 9 U1031A 2 G2 C1 U2034C 7 C3 C2 9011 8A H2 AQ U1031B 2 C1 C1 U2034D TA B4 C2 R9012 8A F2 AQ U2036 7 E2 C2 U1031C 3 B2 C1 R9013 8A F1 A9 U1031D 2 C1 C1 U2037 7 2 9014 8A E2 AQ U1031E 2 A2 C1 U2040A 6 B3 D2 R9015 8A E1 A9 U1031F 2 C1 U2040B 5 B3 D2 R9020 8A E1 B9 U1032A 2 B1 C1 U2040C 3 C2 D2 R9021 8A C1 B9 U1032B 2 B2 C1 U2040D 7 E1 D2 R9022 8A C2 B9 U2041 6 C3 D2 9 6 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams 1 MAIN CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD U2042A 7 D1 D2 U2042B 7 D1 D2 U2043 7 D3 D2 U2044 6 B1 D2 U2045A 7 G2 D2 U2045B T G3 D2 U2045G 7 G3 D2 U2046 6 B3 D2 U3010 2 B3 U3020A 3 F4 B3 U3020B 3 F4 B3 U3020C 3 B3 B3 U3020D 3 B4 B3 U3021 8A B3 B3 U3022 8A B4 B3 U3023 8A C3 B3 U3040 6 B3 D3 U3041 6 B2 D3 U3042 6 G2 D3 U4020 8B C3 B4 U4021A 8A D4 B4 U4021B 8A G3 B4 U4040 6 G3 D4 05010 8 4 5 05020 8 4 5 05040 6 2 D5 U6040 6 E3 D6 U7010A 8A G1 A7 U7010B 8A D3 A7 U7040 6 D2 D7 U8010A 8A G2 A8 U8010B 8A F2 A8 U8010G 8A F2 A8 U8040 6 D3 D8 U8041 6 C2 D8 U9030 5 C1 C9 VR3030 8A B3 C3 VR603
122. 276 01 1 1078 00 151 0441 00 151 0711 00 151 0271 00 151 0308 00 151 0441 00 151 0711 00 151 1012 00 151 0261 00 151 0271 00 151 0441 00 151 0711 00 151 0139 00 151 0441 00 151 0711 00 151 0139 00 151 0271 00 151 0308 00 151 0271 00 Un 322 3162 00 322 3289 00 322 3289 00 322 3289 00 322 3385 00 322 3318 00 322 3097 00 322 3289 00 322 3289 00 322 3289 00 322 3289 00 322 3437 00 307 0446 00 321 0756 00 322 3097 00 322 3318 00 322 3385 00 Serial No Effective B020000 B026006 B020000 B026006 B020000 B026006 B020000 B026006 Serial No Discont d Qty amp Description XSTR SIG BIPOLAR P NP 50V 50 XSTR SIG FET N CH 3 5V 75MA 90 OHM TO 92 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 40MA 1 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR 25 50 NP 15V 30MA 2 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 45V 30MA 60MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 40MA 1 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 25V 50 XSTR SIG FET N CH 6V 15MA 4 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 60V 50 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 15V 30 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 40MA 1 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 25V 50 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 50MA 600MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 40MA 1 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR 25 50 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 50MA 600MHZ AMP NP 15V 30MA 2 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 45V 30MA 60MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 15V 30 B026005 B026005 B026005 B026005 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR P XSTR SIG BIPOLAR P RES FXD M RES FXD
123. 3 04713 04713 09023 24165 24165 24165 04222 04222 24165 24165 24165 04222 Mfr Part Number 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 1 16150 8 1 16150 8 1 16150 8 1 16150 8 1 16150 8 MM74COON A MC14052BCP LM358N ICL8069CCSQ2 062 TLO62CP LF351N SZG35009K1 1N962BRL 1N5339B 1N5339B SZG35009K1 1N962BRL CD15CD100D03 196D225X0020HA1 196D225X0020HA1 196D225X0020HA1 SR595E104MAAAP1 SR595E104MAAAP1 196D225X0020HA1 196D225X0020HA1 196D225X0020HA1 SR595E104MAAAP1 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Number Part Number Effective A6CR2020 152 0752 00 A6CR2021 152 0752 00 A6CR2022 152 0333 00 A6CR2023 152 0141 02 A6CR20234 152 0141 02 A6CR2025 152 0141 02 2030 131 3359 00 A6K1020 148 0146 00 A6L2010 114 0342 00 A6Q1020 151 0188 00 A6Q1021 151 0190 00 A6Q2020 151 0190 00 A6R1010 321 0222 00 A6R1011 308 0585 00 A6R1012 321 0159 00 A6R1013 311 1261 00 A6R1020 303 0330 00 A6R1030 308 0431 00 A6R1031 321 0756 00 A6R1032 321 0193 00 A6R1033 321 0260 00 A6R1034 321 0318 00 A6R1035 321 0318 00 A6R1036 321 0354 00 A6R1037 321 0334 00 A6R2020 321 0289 00 A6R2021 303 0184 00 A6R2022 303 0184 00 A6R2023 321 0318 00 A6R2024 321 0983 00 A6R2025 321 0385 00 A6R2026 321 0391 00 A6R2027 321 0756 00 1503C MTDR Service Manual Serial No Discont d Qty amp Descr
124. 3833 49 9K 511 03030 P q R4830 040218 War 2 LF412 R3832 R4822 3 24 9K 188K R3836 3 32K CR4030 T 04038 2 22uF R4 21 2 S 11K M 10K 4021 mass g gg1uF 40 2K 12v R3030 C3823 13 126 0 I B 22uF vec 4020 O 04821 DA OUT LF412 3 uli o 3 4 m 18VA 4 Tektronixe 12VA PIN 14 VCC M 3621 63822 1502B C 1503B C 12 1K I B 22uF 8 22uF ES MAIN 12V ANALOG TIHEBASE ASSY 570 8285 05 REV 14 Dec 94 D G H 9 23 Al MAIN Diagrams 1503C G H DRVR_HOD DRIVER_TRIG_NOT 1 1 R6033 274 0 67926 B 047uF 5831 B 847uF R7821 R5833 48 9 24 3 N 22 O 1 7020 C3047 07821A 070218 16 5 SAMPLE TRIG NOT lt gt lt gt Mis ee R7227 188 8 2 aie 83041 ws 2 P 0 2 5 23 R7614 R7226 dus 1 0 QO1uF U G RAMP TRIG NOT V R3839 04031 24 9K E V R7820 R5825 R4032 CS033 2 00K 10 0 CR4031 1 CRS030 1 12VA 5 11 9 B47uF 197 G 500 NOT gt WR_NOT se 18 lt gt L 12v 12 A lt gt C5924 luF R5823 RS 22 499 0 31 6K 5 C5921 B 22uF 0 0010 9825 C8023 22uF g 22uF 12V l 12V Tektronixe 4 15028 150385 TP6010 1502 1503B C 14 BIT DAC MAIN ANALOG TIMEBASE ASSY 570 9285 05 REV 14 Dec 9394 G H 9 24 Diagrams 1503C
125. 3C power requirements can be found in the Safety Summary in this section and in the Operating Instructions chapter When the 1503C is to be shipped to a Tektronix Service Center for service or repair attach a tag showing the name and address of the owner name of the individual at your firm who may be contacted the complete serial number of the instrument and a description of the service required If the original packaging is unfit for use or is not available repackage the instrument as follows 1 Obtain a carton of corrugated cardboard having inside dimensions that are at least six inches greater than the equipment dimensions to allow for cushioning The test strength of the shipping carton should be 275 pounds 102 5 kg Refer to the following table for test strength requirements 1503C MTDR Service Manual General Information SHIPPING CARTON TEST STRENGTH Gross Weight Ib Carton Test Strength Ib 0 10 200 11 30 275 31 120 375 121 140 500 141 160 600 is necessary to ship the battery it should wrapped secured separately before T CAUTION The battery should be removed from the instrument before shipping If it being packed with the instrument 2 Install the front cover on the 1503C and surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish 3 Cushion the instrument on all sides with packing material or urethane foam between the carton and the sides of the instr
126. 4 Horizontal Scale Spec 3 2 Horizontal Set Reference 1 22 Humidity Spec 3 3 Impedance see also Controls 1 6 Impedance of Cables 1 12 Indicators 1 6 Isolation Network 4 20 L Loss 1 16 M Maintenance Assembly Disassembly see Removal Replace ment 7 2 Equipment Required 7 1 General 7 1 Metric Default 7 11 Part Removal Replacement 7 2 AC Fuse 7 2 Battery 7 6 Case Cover Installaation 7 19 Control Panel Watertight Seals 7 18 Display Module Removal 7 10 Ethernet Board Removal 7 9 Index 3 Index Front Panel Assembly Removal 7 9 Front Panel Board Removal 7 10 Removal from Display Module 7 11 Fuse Holder Removal 7 5 Main Board EPROM Replacement 7 7 Lithium Battery 7 8 Removing 7 6 Option 06 Removal 7 9 Option Port Assembly Removal 7 12 Power Cord Conductor Color Code 7 6 Power Cord Receptacle Removal 7 5 Power Supply Board Removal 7 4 Power Supply Module Removal 7 3 Power Transformer Removal 7 5 Pulser Sampler Board Removal 7 9 Remove Case 7 3 Remove EMI Shields 7 3 Sealing Materials 7 19 Voltage Selector Removal 7 5 Preventive 7 1 Cleaning 7 1 Lubrication 7 2 Recalibration 7 2 Visual Inspection 7 2 Troubleshooting 7 13 Flow Chart 7 13 Waveforms 7 13 When Else Fails 7 18 Maximum Hold 1 25 Menu 1 8 1 25 Cables 1 8 Diagnostics 1 9 Chart Recorder 1 10 Head Alignment 1 10
127. 4 B4 A2 C5010 8B E3 5 C9030 5 1 C9 C2015 5 F3 A2 C5020 8B D4 B5 C9031 5 C1 C9 C2016 5 F2 A2 C5021 8B B4 B5 C9032 5 B1 C9 C2020 3 B4 B2 C5022 8B B3 B5 C9033 5 B2 C9 C2021 7 B4 B2 C2030 7 C4 C2 C5023 8B F2 B5 C9034 5 B1 C9 C5024 8B G3 B5 C9035 5 C1 C9 C2031 7 B2 C2 C5025 8B G3 5 C2032 7 C4 C2 C5030 8B E3 C5 CR1020 2 F2 B1 C2033 7 C4 C2 C5031 8B C1 C5 CR1021 2 F2 B1 C2034 7 D4 C2 C5032 8B C2 C5 CR1022 2 F1 B1 C2035 7 D4 C2 CR1023 2 F1 B1 C2036 D4 C2 C5033 8B B3 C5 CR3031 8B B2 C3 C5040 6 F2 D5 CR4030 8A F3 C4 C2037 7 E4 C2 C5041 6 G1 D5 C2038 7 E4 C2 C5042 6 G1 D5 CR4031 8B A3 C4 C2039 6 1 2 6030 8 2 C6 CR4032 8B C2 C4 C2040 6 C3 D2 C6031 8B C6 CR5030 8B C3 C5 C2041 6 D3 D2 CR5040 8B B2 D5 C2042 6 B3 D2 C6032 8B D1 C6 CR8020 8A C2 B8 C7010 8B G1 A7 CR9010 8A G2 A9 C2043 6 E4 D2 C7020 8B G1 B7 C2044 7 E4 D2 C7021 8B E1 B7 J2010 1 C3 A2 C2045 7 B2 D2 C7022 8B F2 B7 J5040 T 1 E2 D5 C2046 6 D3 D2 C7023 8B D2 B7 J6010 1 F3 A6 T Back Side Components 9 4 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams A1 MAIN CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD J9010 1 B2 AQ R1032 2 C1 C1 R4043 6 H3 D4 R1033 2 B2 C1 R4044 6 H3 D4 L5030 8B C2 C5 R1035 2 C1 C1 R4045 6 H3 D4 L5040 1 G2 D5 R2010 5 F2 A2 R4046 6 H2 D4 R2011 5 E2 A2 R4047 6 H2 D4 Q1010 5 F3 1 R2012 5 1 2 R4048 1 E2 D4 Q1020 2 F1 B1
128. 5 230 VAC line power or takes power from a lead gel battery and provides the instrument with regulated DC voltages A block diagram of the power supply is shown in Figure 5 3 Instr Pwr Fuse and Rectifi Switch p line Selezt Step down egner E 15 8VDC h Filter Switch XFMR Filter Cap Prereq A Batte Charger Battery 12VDC 10 to 15 5 VDC Transistor Power Switch Switcher and 16 2 VDC 16 VDC N Post regulator DC Power T to He 5 0 to Instrument onverter 15 VDC Deep Discharge Protection Power Status Figure 5 3 Power Supply Block Diagram Single phase AC line voltage is applied to the power supply module through a power plug with internal EMI filter The filtered line voltage is immediately fused routed through a line selector switch and applied to a stepdown transformer The transformer secondary voltage is rectified and power switched to power the post regulator 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Primary Circuit Pre Regulator 1503C MTDR Service Manual A switching pre regulator reduces this voltage to 15 8 VDC and is used to power the battery charger This voltage is also processed through a rectifier and power switch to power the post regulator If a battery is installed the battery charger operates
129. 502C instruments Option 10 Token Ring Interface 1503C MTDR Service Manual Option 10 instruments come with an adapter that allows you to connect the 1503C to Token Ring networks via the MAU 4 17 Options and Accessories Power Cord Options 4 18 The following power cord options are available for the 1503C TDR for part numbers refer to the end of the Replaceable Mechanical Parts list Note that these options require inserting a 0 15 A fuse in the rear panel fuse holder NOTE The only power cord rated for outdoor use is the standard cord included with the instrument unless otherwise specified All other optional power cords are rated for indoor use only Option A1 220 VAC 16 A Universal Europe Option A2 240 VAC 13 A United Kingdom Option A3 240 VAC 10 A Australia Option A4 240 VAC 15A North America Option 5 240 VAC 6 A Switzerland 1503 Service Manual Options and Accessories Accessories Standard Accessories Optional Accessories 1503C MTDR Service Manual The Standard and Optional accessory part numbers are provided at the end of the Replaceable Mechanical Parts list Internal lead gel Battery Assembly Replacement Fuse AC line fuse 115 Replacement Fuse AC line fuse 230 VAC Power Cord outdoor rated Option Port Cover Assembly 50 Q BNC Terminator BNC Connector female to female 93 Q 10 foot Test Cable S N gt B010625 Connector BNC female
130. 6 n nano 109 10 12 numbering method is used to identify assemblies subassemblies parts example of this numbering method and typical expansions is as follows A23A2R1234 A23 A2 R1234 i Assembly Subassembly Circuit Number Number Number Read resistor 1234 of subassembly 2 of assembly 23 Only circuit numbers appear on the schematics circuit board illustrations and electrical parts locator lists Each schematic and illustration is marked with its assembly number Assembly numbers are also marked on the mechanical exploded view located in the replaceable mechanical parts list A component number is obtained by adding the assembly number prefix to the circuit number The component number may then be used to reference a part in the replaceable electrical parts list 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams Refer to Internal diagram Test point adjustment A B C R40330 18 8 9V R40340 3 32k PHASE 9 R40338 NUL L 4 3 5 SMPL LOCK 40306 PULS 10 PLOCK C40330 VCCV 1uF 1503C MTDR Service Manual 100k R40333 R40332 3 92 3 92k AAA AA A 8 U40313A 74F00 C40329 R42331 1 20 0 3 40338 T 8 81uF R40342 2 100 0 12V 40328 ANN 1 1 0403118 100 74 74 R40336 R40335 R40339 is 3 92 3 92
131. 63 00 IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP FLOP DUAL J K 04713 MC74HC113N AlA1U7040 156 1114 00 IC LINEAR MOS FET INP COS MOS OUT OP 34371 160 AlA1U8010 156 1707 00 IC DIGITAL FTTL GATE QUAD 2 INPUT 04713 4 00 OR J AlA1U8040 156 0513 00 IC MISC CMOS ANALOG MUX 8 CHANNEL 04713 MC14051BCP AlA1U8041 156 1114 00 IC LINEAR MOS FET INP 5 5 OUT OP 34371 CA3160E 1 109030 156 0496 00 IC LINEAR VOLTAGE REGULATOR RC4194D 34333 5064194 AlA1VR3030 152 0647 00 DIODE ZENER 6 8V 5 0 4W 1N957B 04713 1 957 AlA1VR6030 152 0514 00 DIODE ZENER 10V 196 0 4W MZ4104D 04713 741040 A2 672 1389 XX CIRCUIT BD ASSY FRONT PANEL A2C1011 283 0359 00 CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 10 200V SQUARE 18796 RPE112NP0102K200V A2C 1015 283 0359 01 CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 5 200V SQUARE 31433 C322C102 2G5CA A2C 2010 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA A2C2011 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA A2C2020 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU 31433 C114C224M5Y 5CA A2C2021 290 0974 00 CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 50VDC AL 55680 UVX1H100MAA A2C2022 290 0974 00 CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 50VDC AL 55680 UVX1H100MAA A2C 2023 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA A2C 2024 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA A2C 2025 283 0492 00 CAP FXD CER 01 1000 20
132. 69 01 260 2368 01 260 2287 01 260 2269 01 260 2369 01 156 0853 00 156 1225 00 156 1367 00 156 2463 00 156 2589 00 156 2758 00 156 2758 00 Discont d Qty Name amp Description RES FXD METAL FILM 10 OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 2 74M OHM 1 0 125W RES VAR PLASTIC DUAL 10K 10 NO STOPS RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 40 2K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES VAR PLASTIC DUAL 10K 10 NO STOPS RES NTWK FXD FI 15 300K OHM 2 0 125W RES NTWK FXD FI 15 300K OHM 2 0 125W RES THERMAL 20K 5 SWITCH PUSH 1 BTN 1 POLE RECORD SWEEP SWITCH PUSH 1 BTN 1 POLE RECORD SWEEP SWITCH PUSH 1 BTN 1 POLE RECORD SWEEP SWITCH PUSH 1 BTN 1 POLE RECORD SWEEP SWITCH PUSH 1 BTN 1 POLE RECORD SWEEP SWITCH ROTARY IMPEDENCE STOP SWITCH ROTARY NOISE PC MOUNT SWITCH ROTARY HORIZONTAL SCALE SWITCH ROTARY COURSE SWITCH ROTARY NOISE PC MOUNT SWITCH ROTARY PULSE WIDTH IC LINEAR BIP OLAR OP AMP DUAL IC LINEAR BIPOLAR COMPARATOR DUAL IC CONVERTER CMOS D A 8 BIT 400NS DIGTIAL HCMOS GATE QUAD 2 INPUT OR IC CONVERTER TTL A D 8 BIT 100US SAR IC DIGITAL HCMOS MUX ENCODER DUAL DIGITAL HCMOS MUX ENCODER DUAL
133. 79 4 A3A1R2013 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K A3A1R2014 322 3357 00 RES FXD FILM 51 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE51K1 A3A1R2015 322 3289 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 10K0 A3A1R2016 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E A3A1R2017 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K A3A1R2018 322 3385 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100K A3A1R2020 321 0253 00 RES FXD FILM 4 22K OHM 1 0 125W 19701 5033ED 4K 220F A3A1R2021 322 3222 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 2K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K00 A3A1R2022 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 1K00 A3A1R2023 322 3261 00 RES FXD FILM 5 11K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50G5111FT A3A1R2024 322 3239 00 RES FXD FILM 3 01K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 3K01 A3A1R2025 322 3239 00 RES FXD FILM 3 01K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 3K01 A3A1R2026 322 3289 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 10K0 8 21 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Serial No Mfr Number Part Number Effective Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A3A1R2027 308 0839 00 RES FXD 0 1 OHM 596 1 0W 56637 BW10 10HM A3A1R2030 322 3326 00 RES FXD FILM 24 3K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50 2F24301F A3A1R2031 317 0027 00 RES FXD CMPSN 2 7 OHM 5 0 125W 01121 BB27
134. 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 1 16150 8 1 16150 8 1 16150 8 051210 MC74HC113N LM393P TC5564PL 20 TC5564PL 20 SN74HC138N TMPZ84C00AP 6 MM74HC30N MC74HC14N Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A1A1U1032 A1A1U1034 A1A1U1040 A1A1U1041 A1A1U1042 A A A 1A1U1043 1A1U2011 1A1U2012 A1A1U2021 A1A1U2022 A1A1U2023 A1A1U2024 A1A1U2025 A1A1U2026 A1A1U2027 A1A1U2030 A1A1U2031 A1A1U2032 A1A1U2033 A1A1U2034 A1A1U2036 A1A1U2037 A1A1U2040 A1A1U2041 A1A1U2042 A1A1U2043 A1A1U2044 A1A1U2045 A1A1U2046 A1A1U3010 A1A1U3020 A1A1U3021 A1A1U3022 A1A1U3023 A1A1U3040 A1A1U3041 A1A1U3042 1503C MTDR Service Manual Tektronix Part Number 156 1994 00 156 0991 02 156 3058 00 156 2009 00 156 3180 00 156 2463 00 156 2415 00 156 3110 00 136 0755 00 156 2583 00 156 2583 00 156 2009 00 156 2583 00 156 2763 00 156 2583 00 156 2763 00 156 2767 00 119 2736 00 156 2096 00 156 2759 00 156 2092 00 156 2096 00 156 2098 00 156 2437 00 156 2768 00 156 2759 00 156 2421 00 156 3107 00 156 1752 00 156 3151 00 156 3107 00 156 2026 00 156 3107 00 156 2421 00 156 0927 00 156 1173 00 156 0854 00 156 1114 00 Discont d Qty Name Description IC DIGITAL CMOS BUFFER DRIVER OCTAL INV IC LINEAR VOLTAGE REGULATOR IC DIGITAL HCMOS GATE DUAL 4 INP UT IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLI
135. 8 00 156 2758 00 670 9286 XX 290 0997 00 283 0220 02 283 0359 01 281 0925 01 283 0359 01 283 0359 01 283 0107 00 283 0059 02 283 0059 02 290 0536 04 290 0536 04 283 0177 00 283 0177 00 283 0177 00 290 0973 01 283 0177 00 290 0973 01 290 0517 00 290 0973 01 283 0198 00 283 0051 00 290 0745 02 283 0010 00 283 0220 02 1503 MTDR Service Manual Serial No Discont d Qty amp Description IC DIGITAL HC IC DIGITAL HC OS GATE QUAD 2 INP OS GATE QUAD 2 DIGITAL HCMOS GATE QUAD 2 INP DIGITAL HCMOS GATE QUAD 2 INP IC DIGITAL HCMOS MUX ENCODER DUAL IC DIGITAL HCMOS MUX ENCODER DUAL CIRCUIT BD ASSY POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY CHASSIS MNT ELEC PARTS SEE FIG 10 4 RMPL UT NOR UT NOR UT NOR UT NOR CAP FXD ELCTLT 3000UF 10 75 75V CAP FXD CER DI 0 01UF 2096 50V CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 590 200V CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 5 200V CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 5 200V CAP FXD CER DI 51PF 5 200V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 20 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 80 20 25V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 80 20 25V CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 80 20 25V CAP FXD ELCTLT 100UF 20 25VDC AL CAP FXD CER DI 1UF 80 20 25V CAP FXD ELCTLT 100UF 20 25VDC AL CAP FXD ELCTLT 6 8UF 20 35V CAP FXD ELCTLT 100UF 20 25VDC AL CAP FXD CER DI 0 22UF 2096 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 0033UF 5
136. 8 06K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 8K06 AlA1R5031 322 3222 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 2 00K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K00 A1A1R5032 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E AlA1R5033 322 3068 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 49 9 OHM 0 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 49E9 AlA1R5034 322 3184 00 RES FXD FILM 806 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 806E A1A1R5035 322 3250 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 3 92K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 50 2 39200 A1A1R6030 322 3068 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 49 9 OHM 0 1 0 2W 57668 20 49 9 AlA1R6031 322 3262 00 RES FXD FILM 5 23K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 5K23 AlA1R6032 322 3251 00 RES FXD FILM 4 02K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 4K02 A1A1R6033 322 3139 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 274 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 274E A1A1R6040 322 3222 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 2 00K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K00 A1A1R6041 321 0960 07 RES FXD FILM 513 OHM 0 1 0 125W 01121 ADVISE A1A1R6042 322 3175 00 RES FXD FILM 649 OHM 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 649E A1A1R6043 322 3185 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 825 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 825E A1A1R6044 322 3194 00 RES FXD FILM 1 02K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 50 2610200 A1A1R6045 322 3204 00 RES FXD FILM 1 30K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 1K30 1 186046 322 3213 00 RES FXD FILM 1 62K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 1K62 A1A1R6047 322 3223 00 RES FXD FILM 2 05K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K05 A1A1R7010 322 3114 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 150 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FX150E A1A1R7011 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM
137. 805 00 213 0739 00 210 1231 00 386 3303 01 107 0035 00 210 1501 00 367 0204 01 367 0449 00 131 1705 01 ORD BY DESCR 1046 211 0507 00 1048 213 0451 02 1000 18 ST CD 213 0183 00 348 0444 00 386 4704 00 334 7662 02 200 3805 00 214 4276 00 348 1167 00 10 5 Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Cont a Tektronix Part Serial Serial No Mfr Number Number Effective Discontd Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number FIG 10 2 FRAME AND FRONT PANEL 1 366 2097 00 4 SHELL KNOB DOVE GRAY 0 060 X 0 375 7X318 1076 2 366 2104 00 1 KNOB SET REF W DOT SET FOR 90 7X318 1078 3 366 2098 00 2 SHELL KNOB DOVE GRAY W INDEX DOT 7X318 1077 EACH KNOB INCLUDES 213 0153 00 1 SETSCREW 5 40 X 0 125 STL HEX SKT 0 01 ORDER DESCR 4 131 4178 00 1 CONN RCPT ELEC BNC FEMALE SHORTING 91836 752 17 9 5 650 3697 00 1 DUST COVER ASSEMBLY W STRAP 7X318 650 3697 00 1 SWITCH ROTARY SEE 253011 REPL 1 SWITCH ROTARY SEE 253012 REPL 1 RESISTOR VARIABLE SEE 283020 1 SWITCH ROTARY SEE 253020 REPL 1 SWITCH ROTARY SEE 253021 REPL 1 SWITCH ROTARY SEE 253022 REPL semasa 1 SWITCH ROTARY SEE 25 3023 1 RESISTOR VARIABLE SEE 282024 1 RESISTOR VARIABLE SEE A2R1022 REPL EACH SWITCH AND VARIABLE RESISTOR INCLUDES 6 210 0583 00 1 NUT
138. 90 0536 00 283 0359 01 283 0203 00 290 0536 00 283 0024 03 283 0156 00 283 0024 03 283 0175 00 283 0175 00 283 0196 00 290 0523 00 283 0175 00 283 0196 00 283 0024 03 283 0024 03 283 0196 00 283 0107 01 283 0196 00 283 0107 01 283 0139 00 152 0333 00 152 0333 00 152 0333 00 152 0322 00 152 0333 00 152 0333 00 152 0333 00 152 0322 00 152 0333 00 152 0333 00 152 0503 00 152 0322 00 Serial No Effective B020000 B023756 B020000 B023756 B020000 B025372 B020000 B025372 Serial No Discont d Qty Name amp Description B023755 B023755 B025371 B025371 CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 033UF 80 20 200V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 033UF 80 20 200V CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER 01 1000 5 200 SQ CAP FXD CER 01 0 470 20 50 SQ CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 20 25V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 1000P F 80 20 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 10PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 10PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 270PF 10 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 2 2UF 20 20V TANTALUM CAP FXD CER DI 10PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 270PF 10 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 80 20 50V CAP FXD CER DI 270PF 10 50V CAP FXD CER DI 51P F 5 200V CAP FXD CER DI 270PF 10 50V CAP FXD CER DI 51P F 5 200V CAP FXD CER 01 150 20
139. A presens LICHTESNOT 49 co 74HC82 U3920A 74 74HC02 18k 7 1022 2035 5 188k BB 1uF 10k C3834 R10228 22uF HORIZONTAL POSITION B R1823 108k 6 R1g27 188k 180k Diagrams 1503C H ADC_RD A lt gt _BUSS 3 _ LCD CONTRAST R1028 120 0 D lt 2 gt D lt 4 gt D lt 3 gt D lt 6 gt D lt S gt U2B18A LM358 59 495 2JSVRIN 16 241 425 12 CSOSNOT 43 445 253 MULTIPLYING ADC RD 45 46 gt HEAT ENABLE 1 lt 0 gt BUSS gA 16V 81038 2R1031 100k 48 2 L C3231 47 uF 470 1SVDC TO 8 VAC INVERTER LM393 U2020B 7 IRFD9120 1 L ADC0808 BB tuF 18k R2037 c2032 R3B20A 188k 801uF 7 vcc 10k C2834 R3020B B 22uF R2031 2028 8 CHANNEL 188k 8 BIT A D HN er FRONT PANEL VE CAL 1 POTS EL LAMP GAIN D E F 9 27 A3A1 POWER SUPPLY Fig 9 4 Component Locator Power Supply Board 1 01010 CR1010 010141 y 010141 01011 D 01025 02030 Diagrams 1503C 9 28 A3A1 POWER SUPPLY Diagrams 1503C 5 591016 1 1 21 2018 l C2 12 CR2B18 F 2 1 C1934 iuF 63524 171010 MAIN Al 15 8V 9 29 A3A1 POWER SUPPLY A 1 2 3 4 A
140. A1 MAIN CSEN NOT A_NOT lt 11 gt U10428 74 27 lt gt MREQ_NOT 3 U2040C U29332 tg 74 8 2 74ALS113 4 vec 8 U1031C a 8 74HC14 ee aJ E 3 FF lt UPCK s RD_NOT lt 0 15 gt 4 3 10408 lt 15 gt 9 74HC20 lt 14 gt 10 N U1041A 4 74HC74 U1042A PRE g 74827 2 G UPCK CLR Q 4 1 vcc 1 C1840 6 2247 1041 J 9 22uF A B C D 02022 74 138 3 8 DECDR DEMUX 02024 74 138 010438 4nc3e 3 8 DECDR DEMUX 2026 T4HC 138 CS19 NOT CS2Q_NOT 3 8 DECDR DEMUX 020238 74HC74 T4HC 138 3 8 DECDR DEMUX 03020 ee vec gt 74 74HC74 3 PRE 5 12 jy 3 6 8 5 4 CLR O O WAIT_NOT 1502 15038 C d ADDRESS DECODE ASSY 670 9285 05 1 REV Diagrams 1503C H OPWR_NOT lt gt CSOQ NOT CS 1_NOT 502 NOT lt gt CS 3 NOT 504 NOT 5 5 NOT CS 6_NOT 5 NOT CS 9_NOT CS1 _NOT CS11 NOT CS12 NOT CS13 NOT 14 NOT CS15 NOT C 16 NOT 517 NOT CS18 NOT CS21 NOT CS22 NOT CS23 NOT ooo009 0009 OO OD HEAT_EN CSe7 NOT CS28 NOT CSe9 NOT CS38 NOT CS31 NOT ADC RD 1503B C 14 94 A1 MAIN A 1 2 3 vcc 4 C2013 T g 22uF A G CS22 NOT RD NO
141. AAA AN 11 Instrument type VCCV VCCV 1 040340 TFP2 FiberMaster L C40342 1uF 22uF Board CONTROL Functional name gt gt PHASE DETECTOR ASSY 571 1594 00 VCO TUNE J40135 Connector to 3D Assembly part number Figure 9 1 Special Schematic Symbols Assembly reference number REV Diagram number 9 3 Diagrams A1 MAIN CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE 5 BRD BT1010 2 G2 1 C3020 2 B4 B3 C7030 8B D2 C7 C3021 8A E4 B3 C7040 6 D2 D7 C1010 2 G4 1 C3022 8A 4 B3 C7041 6 G1 D7 C1011 2 4 1 C3023 8A D3 B3 C7042 6 G1 D7 C1020 2 B4 B1 C3030 8B A1 C3 C7043 1 F2 D7 1021 2 D1 B1 C3040 8B A2 D3 C8010 8A 2 8 C1022 2 E2 1 C1023 2 E1 B1 C3041 6 C3 D3 C8020 8A D2 B8 C3042 6 G2 D3 C8021 8A C2 B8 C1024 2 F1 B1 C3043 6 B2 D3 C8022 8A A1 B8 C1030 2 C1 C1 C3044 6 B2 D3 C8023 8B G4 B8 1031 2 4 C1 C3045 6 H1 D3 C8024 8B E2 B8 C1032 2 F1 C1 C3046 6 H1 D3 C8040 6 C2 D8 C1040 3 B4 D1 C1041 3 B4 D1 C3047 8B A2 D3 C9010 8A G2 AQ C3048 8B 1 D3 C9011 8A F1 A9 C1042 1 G2 D1 C4020 8B D3 B4 C9020 8A D1 B9 C1043 2 A4 D1 C4021 8A E3 B4 C9021 8A C1 B9 C2010 5 G3 A2 C4022 8A G3 B4 C9022 8A D2 B9 C2011 5 G2 A2 C4030 8B B1 C4 C9023 8A C2 9 C2012 2 B4 A2 C2013 4 A4 A2 C4040 8B C2 D4 C9024 8A C1 B9 C4041 1 F2 D4 C9025 8B G4 B9 C2014
142. ATA INTERRUPT MICROPROCESSOR maf LOGIC PROGRAM gt MEMORY INTERRUPT AND EPROM STATUS INPUTS i RANDOM E 8 ACCESS lt gt 5 a MEMORY lt x gt DATA SELECT AND ADDRESS SELECT ADDRESS SIGNALS DECODING CIRCUITS AND OPTIONS PORT gt Figure 5 4 Processor Block Diagram The processor communicates with all other instrument circuits via the address data and select signals and receives requests for service from those circuits via the interrupt and status signals Select signals are generated in address decoding circuits under control of the processor and used to read or write data from a circuit or to trigger a circuit function Interrupts from those circuits are combined in the interrupt logic to generate an interrupt request to the microprocessor The processor responds by reading a data word from this logic to determine the source of the interrupt or status data and then performs the required service routine The microprocessor U1023 is a single chip processor using Z80 architecture constructed in high speed CMOS logic Each data word or byte is eight bits wide and the microprocessor has a 16 bit address capability allowing it to address up to 65 536 memory locations The processor s 5 MHz clock is derived from a crystal oscillator in the timebase circuits When 5 VDC power is applied to C1030 and R1032 the rising voltage momentarily applies a positive signal to the input of gate U1031B The resu
143. B A6 D3 R1053 4B B5 E1 R2065 4A C4 F2 R3044 4B C4 D3 R1054 4B B6 E1 R2066 4A D4 F2 R3045 4B A2 D3 R1060 4B 5 F1 R2067 4A C5 F2 R3046 4B B2 D3 R1061 4B A3 F1 R2070 4A D4 G2 R3050 4A B7 E3 R1062 4B A3 F1 R2071 4A E5 G2 R3051 4A B6 R1063 4B A4 F1 R2072 4A E3 G2 R3052 4A A6 E3 R1064 4A A3 F1 R2073 4A 5 G2 R3060 4A C3 F3 R1065 4A A2 F1 R2074 4A E4 G2 R3061 4A C3 F3 R1066 4A D2 1 R2075 4A D7 G2 R3062 4A B6 F3 R1070 4A A4 G1 R2076 4A D6 G2 R3063 4A C4 F3 R1071 4A B4 G1 R2080 4A F4 H2 R3064 4A B6 F3 R1072 4A B4 G1 R2081 4A F4 H2 R3070 4A C6 G3 R1073 4A B4 G1 R2082 4A G4 H2 R3071 4A C6 G3 R1074 4A A2 G1 R2083 4A F5 H2 R3072 4A C6 G3 R1080 4A E4 H1 R2090 4A G5 I2 R3073 4A B6 G3 R1090 4A H4 H R2091 4A G4 12 R3074 4A C2 G3 1091 4 H R2092 4A G3 I2 R3075 4A D5 G3 R2010 4B F2 A2 R2093 4A H3 I2 R3076 4A D5 G3 R2011 4B F2 A2 R2094 4A G5 I2 R3077 4A B5 G3 R2012 4B G2 A2 R2095 4A G4 12 R3080 4A E6 H3 R2020 4B E4 B2 R2096 4A H5 12 R3081 4A E6 H3 R2021 4B G3 B2 R2097 4A G5 12 R3082 4A E6 H3 R2022 4B F3 B2 R2098 4A F6 12 R3083 4A E6 H3 R2023 4B F4 B2 R3010 4B G3 A3 R3090 4A F7 R2030 4B E3 C2 R3011 4B F3 A3 R3091 4A F6 R2031 4B D2 C2 R3012 4B F3 A3 R3092 4A F5 R2040 4B D7 D2 R3020 4B E3 B3 R3093 4A G6 R2041 4B D6 D2 R3021 4B E3 B3 R3094 4A G6 R2042 4B D5 D2 R3022 4B H2 B3 R2043 4B C4 D2 R3023 4B H2 B3 T3070 4A D6 G3 R2044 4B C5 D2 R3024 4B G3 B3 T3080 4A E6 R2050 4B B6 E2 R3030 4B 1 C3 T3081 4A E6 H3
144. C 1503B C MAIN MISCELLANEOUS ANALOG ASSY 670 S285 05 REV 14 94 G H 9 20 A1 MAIN SV1 g iur 02044 74HC374 lt 1 1 gt cs g_NOT m lt gt D lt 7 gt E 3 T 5v1 5v1 5v1 1 C7042 l 5 42 C3046 cen4g 1 lt gt SAMP_VID_IN 5V1 C3844 001 U7040 160 18041 160 C7049 5V1 u3040 5v1 10 Li MC1403 gt U80240 40518 G 1 25 MHZ R8842 1 33K G 5 NOT xi V x2 3 CS 3_NOT x 2411 xs S xs R8841 U2040A 210 0 74HCT08 42841 i hacia 8 CHAN DEMUX 57 5V1 R8040 2846 C2041 40 CS01_NOT HR NOT A lt 1 gt lt 0 gt 14 vcc 3dstatus RD_NOT 12 18 NOT 1 12 BIT A D CONVERTER V Diagrams 1503C H SV1 5V1 C7041 CS 41 C3045 0 22uF g 22uF 22uF 22uF g 22uF 9 22uF TP4040 O R4047 287 8 C3842 220 5040 5y1 10 R6846 R4046 1 6 274 0 R604S 4045 1 30K 267 8 R6044 R4044 1 02K 261 0 R4043 255 8 13 R6043 825 0 R6842 S CHAN TENURE R4042 649 0 249 0 8 CHAN DEMUX 6041 R4041 513 8 243 9 R6040 R4040 2 00 8 25K Reg40 274 0 lt lt C2043 g giuF Tektronixe MAIN VIDEO PROCESSOR ASSY 678 9285 05 1 REV 14 94 9 21 Al MA
145. CD 6 2 Equipment Required 6 1 Front Panel 6 4 Menu Access 6 4 Presets 6 4 Pushbutton Switches 6 5 Rotating Controls 6 5 Thermistor 6 7 Getting Ready 6 1 Horizontal Scale 6 8 Impedance 6 14 Jitter 6 21 Metric Default 6 31 Metric Instruments 6 1 Noise 6 12 Offset 6 10 Offset Gain 6 14 Pulse Balance 6 16 Pulse Width 6 17 RAM ROM 6 15 Timebase 6 8 Vertical Position 6 10 Carrier 4 3 4 9 Characteristics Electrical 3 1 Ethernet 4 16 Environmental 3 3 Physical 3 4 Cheapernet 4 1 Checks see Performance Checks 2 1 Circuit Description Display Module Block Diagram 5 29 Index 1 Index Column Driver 5 34 Block Diagram 5 32 Timing Diagram 5 35 Column Driver Interface 5 37 Column Drivers 5 21 Controller 5 37 CPU and Display Memory Timing Diagram 5 39 CPU Interface 5 38 EL Backlight 5 40 General 5 29 ITO Heater 5 40 LCD Cell 5 30 Memory 5 36 Memory Interface 5 38 Row Driver 5 32 Block Diagram 5 31 Timing Diagram 5 33 Row Driver Interface 5 37 Row Drivers 5 21 Supply Voltages 5 34 SBE Cell 5 31 Shift Register 5 36 Front Panel Analog to Digital Converter 5 27 Block Diagram 5 26 Display Heater 5 28 Display Temperature Compensation 5 28 EL Backlight 5 28 General 5 25 Push Button Switches and Latches 5 27 Resistive Shaft Encoders 5 27 Rotary Binary Switches 5 27 Switch Multiplexers 5
146. CONN TYPE BNC TO GR MALE CABLE INTCON 50 OHM 3 FEET L W STR RELIEF TERMN COAXIAL 75 OHM BNC FILTER DIR CUR 1502 ADAPTER ASSY ISLN XFMR BALANCED OUTPUT XFMR PULSE INVERTER TORIOD 1503 8 BIFILAR TURNS ADAPTER KIT TOKEN RING NETWORK ADAPTER TDR USOC NETWORK ADAPTER KIT STARLAN NETWORK ADAPTER RING TOKEN RING INTERFACE Mfr Code TK2582 TK2548 80009 80009 54318 54318 80009 80009 060D9 24931 TK6159 05276 05276 05276 91836 24931 24931 74868 24931 80009 03877 57793 TK6159 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 060D9 80009 Mfr Part Number 070 7170 01 070 7170 00 040 1276 00 15 40952 903 006 7681 00 012 0671 03 28 101 4 2630 MODEL 3788 1269 ADAPTER 1296 KN 99 46 29 JP104 3 29 P100 3 30429 2 29 P151 1 013 0126 00 0874 9700 ORD BY DESCR ASI 65289 011 0102 00 015 0327 00 013 0169 00 015 0495 00 015 0500 00 015 0600 00 10 11 Replaceable Mechanical Parts m Figure 10 1 1503C Cabinet 1503C MTDR Service Manual 10 13 Replaceable Mechanical Parts MA 2 GI H E 22 Figure 10 2 1503 Frame Assemblies Front Panel Controls 1503C MTDR Service Manual 10 15 Replaceable Mechanical Parts Figure 10 3 1503C Option 06 Ethernet 1503C MTDR Service Manual 10 17 R
147. CORP GASKET TECHNOLOGY STAUFFER SUPPLY NORTH STAR NAMEPLATE AMP INC RICHCO PLASTIC CO BERG ELECTRONICS INC MINNESOTA MINING AND MFG CO 3 D POLYMERS BOYD CORP MCGUIRE BEARING CO MINNESOTA MINING MFG CO SUPERIOR ELECTRIC CO THE AIR OIL PRODUCTS CORP TRIAX METAL PRODUCTS INC SCHURTER INC MICRODOT INC 1503C MTDR Service Manual Address 1775 NW 216TH 2620 STEVENS DRIVE 1100 L AVENIDA ST 3501 PORTLAND ROAD NE 7645 BAKER ST NE 7275 NW EVERGREEN PKWY 100 1410 GAIL BORDEN PLACE 14827 NEEDLES ST 14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY 814 HAYDEN MEADOWS DRIVE ARROW RICHEY VALUE ADDED 3601 SW MURRY BLVD SUITE 60 POWER CORD PRODUCTS 5350 LAKEVIEW PARKWAY SOUTH DRIVE SUITE D PO BOX 4200 7330 SW LANDMARK LANE 7973 SW CIRRUS DRIVE BLDG 22 165 SPRINGHILL DRIVE 30608 SAN ANTONIO ST 19500 SW TETON 3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY 478 NE 219TH AVENUE 810 SE SHERMAN 5750 NE MOORE COURT 2800 FULLING MILL PO BOX 3608 5825 TRIPP AVE 825 OLD TRAIL RD 3M CENTER 13026 NORMANDIE AVE 6136 NE 87TH AVE PO BOX 20038 947 SE MARKET ST PO BOX 2963 383 MIDDLE ST 2400 E BURNSIDE 1800 216TH AVE NW 1016 CLEGG COURT 50631 RUSSELL SCHMIDT BLVD City State Zip Code HILLSBORO OR 97123 RICHLAND WA 99352 MOUNTAIN VIEW CA 94043 SALEM OR 97303 MINNEAPOOLIS MN 55432 3421 HILLSBORO OR 97124 EL PASO TX 79935 SEPULVEDA CA 91343 BEAVERTON OR 97005 PORTLAND OR 97217 BEAVERTON OR 97005 INDIANAPOLIS IN 46268
148. Contents xii 1503C MTDR Service Manual w Z 3 General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Power Source 1503C MTDR Service Manual Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Use Proper Voltage Setting Before applying power ensure that the line selector is in the proper position for the power source being used This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 250 volts RMS between the supply conductors or between the supply conductor and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded The standard power cord 161 0288 00 is rated for outdoor use All other optional power cords are rated for indoor use only Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratin
149. DIP STYLE 04222 0015 102 A2C 2026 283 0492 00 CAP FXD CER 01 1000 20 DIP STYLE 04222 0015 102 2 2027 283 0492 00 CAP FXD CER DI 1000PF 20 DIP STYLE 04222 0015 102 A2C 2028 283 0492 00 CAP FXD CER 1000 20 DIP STYLE 04222 0015 102 A2C 2030 281 0925 01 CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2090 50V ZRU 31433 C114C224M5Y5CA 2 2031 283 0492 00 CAP FXD CER 01 1000 20 DIP STYLE 04222 0015 102 A2C 2032 283 0492 00 CAP FXD CER 1000 20 DIP STYLE 04222 0015 102 8 16 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix A2C2033 281 0925 01 A2C2034 281 0925 01 A2C3010 281 0925 01 A2C3020 281 0925 01 A2C3021 281 0925 01 A2C3022 281 0925 01 A2C3023 281 0925 01 A2C3030 290 0919 00 A2C3031 290 0919 00 A2C3032 281 0925 01 A2C3033 281 0925 01 A2C3034 281 0925 01 2 1020 131 3147 00 2 3030 131 1857 00 2 52030 119 2370 00 A2Q1020 151 1176 00 A2Q1030 151 1176 00 A2Q2020 151 1121 01 A2R 1010 322 3385 00 A2R1011 321 0816 00 A2R 1012 322 3097 00 A2R 1013 322 3347 00 A2R 1018 311 1337 00 A2R 1020 322 3097 00 A2R 1021 322 3385 00 A2R 1022 311 2400 00 A2R 1023 322 3385 00 A2R 1024 322 3385 00 A2R 1025 322 3385 00 A2R 1026 322 3385 00 A2R 1027 322 3385 00 A2R 1030 322 3385 00 A2R 1031 322 3059 00 A2R2010 322 3385 00 1503C MTDR Service Manual Serial No Number Part N
150. Diagnostic Menu Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument Location of R1080 on Pulser Sampler Board Service Diagnostic Efficiency Readout Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument Location of R2097 on Pulser Sampler Board Over Compensated Under Compensated Correctly Compensated Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument Location of C3010 TP3020 and TP3030 on Pulser Sampler Board Main Menu L2010 R1011 and R1013 on Option 06 Board Location of Voltage Selector Fuse Holder on Rear Panel Power Supply Module and P O Rear Panel Main Bo rd sees EPROM on Main Board Lithium Battery on Main Board Display Module Front Panel Board Screw Locations Display Module Front Panel Board Showing Hex Nuts Location of Default Jumper on Front Panel Board Default Jumper Positions Main Board TP1041 Main Board TP3040 and Main Board TP3041 Main Board TP4040 and Main Board TP6010 Main Board TP7010 and Main Board TP9011 Main Board TP9041 and Front Panel CABLE Connector 6 47 6 47 6 47 6 48 6 48 6 49 6 50 6 50 6 50 6 52 6 52 6 53 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 55 6 55 6 56 6 56 6 57 6 57 6 58 7 2 7 4 7 1 7 7 7 8 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 17 7 17 7 17 Table of Contents Figure 7 15 Figure 9 1 Figure 9
151. Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number 315 0220 00 B020258 RES FXD FILM 20 OHM 5 0 25W 50139 CB2005 A4R 1065 315 0101 00 010100 020257 RES FXD FILM 100 0HM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 315 0220 00 B020258 RES FXD FILM 20 OHM 5 0 25W 50139 2005 A4R1066 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R1070 321 0631 03 RES FXD FILM 12 5K OHM 0 25 0 125W 19701 5033 12 500 A4R1071 322 3389 00 RES FXD FILM 110K OHM 0 2596 0 2W 56845 50 2 1103 A4R1072 321 0645 00 RES FXD FILM 100K 0HM 0 5 0 125W 19701 5033 10030 A4R1073 321 0645 00 RES FXD FILM 100K 0HM 0 5 0 125W 19701 5033 10030 A4R 1074 322 3396 00 RES FXD FILM 130K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 130K A4R 1080 311 1917 00 RES VAR NONWW TRMR 5K OHM 10 0 5 W 32997 3386 1 502 A4R 1090 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R1091 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 0HM 5 0 25W 01121 1015 A4R2010 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB1045 A4R2011 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB1045 A4R2012 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB1045 A4R2020 322 3093 00 RES FXD FILM 90 9 OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50 2F90R90F A4R 2021 322 3093 00 RES FXD FILM 90 9 OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF50 2F90R90F 46 2022 322 3135 00 RES FXD FILM 249 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 249E AAR 2023 322 3133 00 RES FXD FILM 237 OHM 1 0 2W 91637 50 2 237 0 A4R2030 315 0470 00 RES FXD FILM 47 OHM 5 0
152. EMBLIES COVER FRONT OPTION PORT COVER PORT INCLUDES COVER PORT GASKET OPTION PORT COVER 0 062 THK LCH OPT PORT COVER STEEL ZINC PLATE FRAME OPTION PORT COVER SCR TPG TF 6 32 X 0 375 F LH100 DEG POZ COVER GASKET ASSY RANGE BOARD SCR ASSEM WSHR 4 40 X 0 25 PNH POZ CKT BD ASSY SEE A4 REPL OTE THE FOLLOWING FOUR COMPONENTS ARE Mfr Code 0 01 22526 80009 0 01 1943 0 01 58474 0 01 0 01 0 472 2545 5 400 80009 0 01 0 01 80009 80009 0 7N9 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 9 4 5Y400 0 875 TK1423 0J9P4 0KB01 0J 9P4 0KB01 Mfr Part Number 211 0658 00 65474 006 342 0731 00 220 0407 00 337 2193 05 211 0661 00 BP21BLACK 210 1307 00 210 1002 00 334 8135 00 650 3714 00 220 0961 00 213 0966 00 211 0005 00 210 0851 00 105 0954 01 384 1674 01 650 3699 00 212 0001 00 ORD BY DESCR ORD BY DESCR 200 3737 00 200 3451 01 348 1118 01 DZUSDP109SMOD 407 3675 00 ORD BY DESCR 650 3742 00 211 0661 00 10 7 Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Cont Fig amp Index Number 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 71 10 8 Tektronix Part Serial Number 131 0391 00 131 3360 00 441 1683 00 211 0661 00 210 1307 00 211 0007 00 210 1307 00 351 0755 00 210 0586 00 211 0007 0
153. FR ErN is required at the start of every line to enable the first leftmost as seen from the front of the display column driver pair is required once to latch in Er and three times after that to enable the successive column driver pairs Each successive must occur every 16 XSCL pulses i e after each column driver pair is full of 64 bits 4 X 16 bits XSCL is required 16 times per column driver pair per line to shift in the bit pattern data Therefore a total of 64 XSCL are required per line for the four column driver pairs XSCL is generated by U3030 a counter clocked by CLP or LP from the controller It must be generated as such because the controller was designed to use with 80 channel column drivers instead of 64 channel column drivers The controller version of CEO is generated every 20 XSCL pulses rather than every 16 XSCL pulses as required by the 64 channel column drivers The counter is used to translate XSCL into 5 37 Circuit Descriptions CPU and Display Memory 5 38 Interface As a consequence of generating as above must also be generated This is done with U3065 flip flop pair The flip flop pair is set when LP and LEO are asserted and hold set until XSCL CLP shifts in a logic 0 after the pulse is held high for a duration long enough to enable the first column driver pair There are two data buses and two address buses on the controller
154. G5 A3A1R2032 308 0767 00 RES FXD 1 1 0HM 5 1W 75042 SP 20 11 OHM 5 15 2010 260 2370 00 SWITCH TOGGLE SPDT 3A 250VAC 80009 260 2370 00 A3A111030 120 1608 00 XFMR PWR SW 40KHZ IN 16 2V OUT 15V 34MA 0JRO3 120 1608 00 A3A111031 120 0487 00 XFMR TOROID STURNS BIFILAR 3T2 0JRO3 120 0487 00 A3A1TP1010 214 0579 02 8020000 8023052 TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L 10392 7 16150 8 A3A1TP1020 214 0579 02 8020000 8023052 TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L 10392 7 16150 8 A3A1TP2010 214 0579 02 8020000 8023052 TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L 10392 7 16150 8 A3A1TP2030 214 0579 02 8020000 8023052 TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L 10392 7 16150 8 A3A1U1010 156 0933 00 IC LINEAR REGULATOR PULSE WIDTH 34333 5063524 A3A1U1011 156 1173 00 IC LINEAR BIPOLAR REF POS 2 5V 1 0 04713 14030 A3A1U1020 156 1225 00 IC LINEAR BIPOLAR COMPARATOR DUAL 04713 1 393 A3A1U1021 156 1225 00 IC LINEAR BIPOLAR COMPARATOR DUAL 04713 1 393 A3A1U1022 156 1173 00 IC LINEAR BIPOLAR REF POS 2 5V 1 0 04713 14030 A3A1U1023 156 0933 00 IC LINEAR REGULATOR PULSE WIDTH 34333 5063524 A3A1U1024 156 0366 00 IC DIGITAL CMOS FLIP FLOP DUAL D TYPE 04713 14013 A3A1U2010 156 1161 00 IC LINEAR BIPOLAR REG POS ADJ 04713 LM317T A3A1U2030 156 0494 00 1 DIGITAL CMOS BUFFER DRIVER INV 04713 MC14049UBCP A3AlVR1012 152 0217 00 DIODE ZENER 8 2V 5 0 4W 14552 TD3810979 4 670 9290
155. HM XSTR SIG MOS N CH ENH 60V 200MA 5 OHM XSTR SIG MOS N CH ENH 60V 200MA 5 OHM XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 40V 200MA 250MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 40V 200MA 250MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 15V 30MA 2 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 15V 30MA 2 0GHZ AMP XSTR NP N SI TO 46 2N5836 FAMILY XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 10V 80MA 6 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 75MA 4 5GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 40MA 1 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 40MA 1 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 15V 30MA 2 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG DMOS N CH ENH 30V 50MA 45 OH XSTR NP N RF BFR96 T0 46 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 10V 80MA 6 0GHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 75MA 4 5GHZ AMP Mfr Code 80009 80009 80009 80009 24931 53387 54937 0 R03 0 R03 01295 04713 04713 04713 01295 01295 01295 04713 04713 04713 03508 03508 01295 01295 04713 04713 80009 04713 01295 01295 04713 01295 17856 04713 04713 80009 Mfr Part Number 153 0044 00 153 0044 00 153 0044 00 153 0044 00 32 R105 1 3592 6002 108 1277 00 7611 2612 SKA3703 2N7000 2N7000 2N7000 SKA3703 SKA3703 SKA3703 2N7000 2N7000 2N7000 X39H3162 X39H3162 SKA4504 SKA4504 SRF504 MPS571 151 0951 00 2N3839 SKA3703 SKA3703 2N3839 SKA4504 DM1140 SD210DE MRF 965 5571 151 0951 00 8 25 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont As
156. IDTH 2 ns If the instrument fails this check it must be repaired before any distance measurements can be made with it 1 Turn the 1503C power on The display should look very similar to Figure 2 1 2 Connect the 10 foot cable to the front panel CABLE connector The display should now look like Figure 2 2 Fi Figure 2 2 Measurement Display with 10 foot Cable 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operator Performance Checks 1503C MTDR Service Manual Using the POSITION control measure the distance to the rising edge of the waveform at the open end of the cable The distance shown on the display distance window upper right corner of the LCD should be from 9 7 to 10 3 feet 2 95 to 3 14 m Ww Figure 2 3 Cursor at End of 10 foot Cable Change the Vp to 30 Using the POSITION control measure the distance to the rising edge of the waveform at the open end of the cable The distance shown on the display distance window upper right corner of the LCD should be from 3 50 to 3 70 feet 1 05 to 1 11 m 5 Remove the 10 foot cable and connect the 50 Q terminator Change the 1503C front panel controls to VERT SCALE 0 00 dB DIST DIV 5000 ft div 1000 m div PULSE WIDTH 1000 ns Turn the lt gt POSITION control clockwise until the display distance window reads a distance greater the 50 000 feet 15 259 m The waveform should Operator Performance Checks remain a flat line from zero
157. IGGER Generator Fine Delay Counter gt DIGITAL TIMEBASE Delay PROCESSOR gt Cal CONTROL Ramp Voltage Cal Comparator 50 ns analog TIMEBASE INTERRUPT 1991109 Strobe Driver SAMPLER delay Analog i Timebase DAC ANALOG TIMEBASE CONTROL Figure 5 8 Timebase Block Diagram A programmable digital counter clocked at 2 5 MHz is used to determine the PRT pulse repetition time of the pulser sampler test pulse The 1503C is programmed with a PRT of 350 Us The output of the PRT counter is used to trigger a delay counter also clocked at 2 5 MHz to provide coarse 400 ns resolution digital time delay The end of this time delay triggers a fine delay counter which is clocked at 20 MHz providing 50 ns resolution to the sampler time delay Both the coarse time delay and the fine delay counters are programmed by the processor via the data bus The end of the coarse delay is used to generate a timebase interrupt request to the processor to inform it that a sample is being taken and a timebase update is required for the next sample The output of the fine delay counter is provided to the analog timebase circuits for further delay control to become the sampler trigger The beginning of the coarse delay counter period is detected by a pulse former which generates a d
158. ILIPS COMPONENTS 17856 TEMIC NORTH AMERICA SILICONIX 18324 PHILIPS SEMICONDUCTORS 18796 MURATA ERIE NORTH AMERICAN INC 19701 PHILIPS COMPONENTS DISCRETE PRODUCT 21845 SOLITRON DEVICES INC 21847 FEI MICROWAVE INC 22526 BERG ELECTRONICS 24165 SPRAGUE ELECTRIC CO 24355 ANALOG DEVICES INC 1503C MTDR Service Manual Address 195 WEST MAIN ST SUITE 19 381 UPPER BROADWAY 12015 2ND ST 13500 N CENTRAL EXPY PO BOX 655303 195 MCGREGOR ST 4051 GREYSTONE DRIVE 19TH AVE SOUTH PO BOX 867 6615 W IRVING PARK RD 5005 E MCDOWELL RD 3000 COLUMBIA HOUSE BLDG SUITE 120 2850 MT PLEASANT AVE 15 RIVERDALE AVE 51 RICHARDS AVE PO BOX 5200 4350 BELTWOOD PKWY SOUTH 9 B FADEM ROAD 9801 W HIGGINS RD 7633 S 180th 9775 TOLEDO WAY 59 12 37TH ST 12055 ROJAS DRIVE SUITE K 8700 E THOMAS RD PO BOX 1390 530 PLEASANT STREET 221 W INDUSTRY COURT 2540 1ST ST SUITE 203 28305 FAIRVIEW ST 600 W JOHN ST 4561 COLORADO BLVD 2201 LAURELWOOD RD 830 STEWARD RD 1900 W COLLEGE AVE AIRPORT RD PO BOX 760 3301 ELECTRONICS WAY 825 STEWART DR 825 OLD TRAIL RD 267 LOWELL ROAD 1TECHNOLOGY DR City State Zip Code AVON CT 06001 FORT EDWARDS NY 12828 1021 MILWAUKEE WI 53204 2410 DALLAS TX 75262 5303 MANCHESTER NH 03102 3731 ONTARIO CA 91761 MYRTLE BEACH SC 29577 CHICAGO IL 60634 2410 PHOENIX AZ 85008 4229 VANCOUVER WA 98661 BURLINGTON IA 52601 NEWTON MA 02158 1057 NORWALK CT 06856 DALLAS TX 75244 SPRINGFIELD NJ 07081 ROSE
159. IN 2040 R2043 12 2030 82CS4 lt gt CS23 NOT RD NOT WR NOT A g A lt 1 gt D 2 D lt 1 gt D lt 3 gt D lt 4 gt D lt S gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt e 25 KHZ vcc IR2_NOT I SI ullu INTERVAL TIMER lt gt 6516 NOT lt CS11_NOT 4 1 lt 0 gt 1 lt 1 gt 42 VCC 1 2621 ii 8 22uF 42046 D 74 08 13 vcc 12 U2931 O TP1041 20 HHZ OSC L our R2030 3 01K PIN 2 GND vcc PIN 4 VCC_REG ies U2042 A U2042B U20338 2 74ALS113 74ALS113 74 5113 74HC113 PRE 11 9 3 VCC_REG J 9 J a FF FF 12 8 C2031 K K U20348 T4ALS 2 vcc 2 5 2 U2045A 1 74218 2 12 U2036 74ALS175 74ALS175 vec vec 2834 U28458 74ALSB2 74F10 QUAD D FLIP FLOP QUAD D FLIP FLOP 02027 74 113 837 74ALS 161 02045 11 74 10 s 3 QUAD D FLIP FLOP SYNC 4 BIT COUNTER lt lt Q lt C vec VCC C2838 C2832 C2833 C2034 1 C2835 C2036 1 C2037 C2838 C2044 g 22uF 22uF 22uF il 22uF 1 B 22uF l e 22uF I 22uF 22 22uF D 2034 Diagrams 1503C H 5 gt TAALSB2 1 5 74HC113 625 2 lt D 1 25 MHZ lt gt 2 vec 4 243 8 lt DRIVER_TRIG_NOT TP3040
160. LCD Chart 1 10 Front Panel 1 9 LCD 1 9 Alignment 1 9 Contrast 1 9 Drive Test 1 9 Response Time 1 9 Service 1 9 Impedance 1 9 1 9 Otfset Gain 1 9 RAM 1 9 Sampling Efficiency 1 9 Timebase 1 9 Display Contrast 1 10 Impedance 1 8 Main 1 8 Maximum Hold 1 25 Index 4 Option Port 1 10 Debugging 1 10 Diagnostic 1 10 Timing 1 10 Pulse 1 26 Setup 1 8 Acquisition Control 1 8 Backlight 1 9 Distance Division 1 8 Maximum Hold 1 8 Pulse 1 8 Single Sweep 1 8 Vertical Scale 1 8 Single Sweep 1 27 Velocity of Propagation 1 8 View Stored Waveform 1 10 N Noise see also Controls 1 6 Noise Spec 3 1 0 Open 1 15 Option Port Cover 4 19 Options 4 1 Chart Recorder 04 4 1 Chart Recorder 07 4 17 Ethernet 06 4 1 Metric Default 05 4 1 Power Cords 4 18 Token Ring Adapter 08 4 17 Token Ring Interface 10 4 17 USOC 09 4 17 P Performance Checks 2 1 Aberrations 2 6 Conclusions 2 11 Equipment Required 2 1 Horizontal Scale 2 2 Impedance 2 6 Noise 2 5 Offset Gain 2 6 Sampling Efficiency 2 6 Set Up 2 2 Vertical Position 2 4 Pouch 4 19 1503C MTDR Service Manual Index Power AC Receptacle 1 1 Battery Low Indicator 1 4 Battery Pack Care of 1 2 Charging 1 2 Cords 4 18 Fuse 1 1 Fuse Rating 1 2 Voltage Rating 1 2 Voltage Selector 1 1 Voltages 1 1 Pulse 1 14 1 26 Pulse
161. LE ROAD 585 MAIN ST City State Zip Code GLENDALE AZ 85301 7503 POMONA CA 91766 3835 VANCOUVER WA 98661 FRANKLIN IN 46131 WEST WARWICK RI 02893 TORRANCE CA 90507 WHIPPANY NJ 07981 ST LOUIS MO 63178 DANBURY CT 06810 5803 VANCOUVER WA 98662 BEAVERTON OR 97077 0001 CHINO CA 91710 NEWMARKET NH 03857 9601 NY 10707 3420 NEW BRITAIN CT 06051 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Replaceable Mechanical Parts List Fig amp Index Tektronix Part Serial No Number Number Effective FIG 10 1 650 3676 00 1 105 0684 01 2 213 0839 00 3 214 0787 00 4 204 0282 00 5 214 2389 00 6 334 9302 00 7 062 9363 00 8 334 7475 00 334 8896 00 650 3677 00 9 200 1805 00 10 213 0739 00 11 210 1231 00 12 386 3303 01 13 107 0035 00 14 210 1501 00 B023241 15 367 0204 01 B010100 367 0449 00 B023241 16 131 1705 01 17 213 0012 00 18 348 0419 00 19 211 0507 00 20 348 0420 01 21 213 0451 02 22 354 0175 00 23 213 0183 00 24 348 0444 00 25 386 4704 00 26 334 7662 02 27 200 3805 00 28 214 4276 00 29 348 1167 00 1503C MTDR Service Manual Serial No Discont d B023240 Qty amp Description pa e N e N NA FN FY NY L3 r3 Fg A NNN CABINET COVER LID ASSY LID COVER ASSEMBLY LATCH ASSEMBLY SCR TPG TF 4 24 X 0 5 L FLH P0Z STEM LATCH ACCESS BOX BODY LATCH ACCESS BOX DELRIN
162. M 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 2K00 AlA1R7031 322 3306 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 15K0 AlA1R7032 321 0720 00 RES FXD FILM 60K OHM 1 0 125W 91637 CMF55 116 G 60001FT AlA1R7033 322 3269 00 RES FXD FILM 6 19K OHM 1 0 2W 91637 CCF501G61900F AlA1R7034 322 3068 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 49 9 OHM 0 196 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 49 9 AlA1R7040 322 3001 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE10E0 AlAIR8010 321 0038 00 RES FXD FILM 24 3 OHM 1 0 125W 57668 CRB14FXE 24 3 AlAIR8011 321 0312 00 RES FXD FILM 17 4K OHM 1 0 125W 07716 CEAD17401F AlA1R8012 321 0631 00 RES FXD FILM 12 5K OHM 1 0 125W 07716 1 12 5K AlAIR8013 322 3126 00 RES FXD FILM 200 OHM 1 0 2W 91637 5016200 0 AlAIR8014 322 3068 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 49 9 0 1 0 2 57668 CRB20FXE 49 9 A1A1R8020 322 3193 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 1K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 1K00 AlAIR8021 322 3325 00 RES FXD FILM 23 7K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 23K7 AlA1R8022 322 3283 00 RES FXD FILM 8 66K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 8K66 AlA1R8023 322 3289 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 10 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 20 10K0 AlAIR8024 322 3097 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 100E AlA1R8025 321 0174 00 RES FXD FILM 634 OHM 1 0 125W 19701 5043ED634ROF AlAIR8026 322 3306 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20FXE 15K0 AlA1R8027 322 3306 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM 1 0 2W 57668 CRB20 FXE 15 0 AlAIR8028 322 3306 00 RES FXD METAL FILM 15 0K OHM
163. MONT IL 60018 4771 KENT WA 98032 IRVINE CA 92718 WOODSIDE NY 11377 2523 EL PASE TX 79936 SCOTTSDALE AZ 85252 WATERTOWN MA 02172 DEER PARK NY 11729 4605 SAN JOSE CA 95131 1016 SANTA ANA CA 92704 5948 HICKSVILLE NY 11802 0709 LOS ANGELES CA 90039 1103 SANTA CLARA CA 95054 1516 SUNNYVALE CA 94088 STATE COLLEGE PA 16801 2723 MINERAL WELLS TX 76067 0760 WEST PALM BEACH FL 33407 SUNNYVALE CA 94086 4514 ETTERS PA 17319 HUDSON NH 03051 NORWOOD MA 02062 8 3 Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers Cross Index Cont Mfr Code Manufacturer 27014 NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP 31433 KEMET ELECTRONICS CORP 32997 BOURNS INC TRIMPOT DIV 34333 LINFINITY MICROELECTRONICS 34371 HARRIS CORP 34649 INTEL CORP 50434 HEWLETT PACKARD CO 53387 3M COMPANY 54937 DEYOUNG MANUFACTURING INC 55680 NICHICON AMERICA CORP 56637 RCD COMPONENTS INC 56845 DALE ELECTRONICS INC 56866 QUALITY THERMISTOR INC 57668 ROHM CORP 58050 TEKA PRODUCTS INC 61935 SCHURTER INC 62643 UNITED CHEMICON INC 63312 ENDICOTT RESEARCH GROUP INC 64537 KDI TRIANGLE ELECTRONICS 71400 BUSSMAN 71590 CGE SWITCHES USA 15042 IRC ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 75378 CTS KNIGHTS INC 75915 LITTLEFUSE TRACOR INC 80009 TEKTRONIX INC 81073 GRAYHILL INC 81855 EAGLE PICHER INDUSTRIES INC 91637 DALE ELECTRONICS INC 8 4 Address 2900 SEMICONDUCTOR DR PO 5928 1200 COLUMBIA AVE 11861 WESTERN AVE PO BOX 883 3065 BOWERS AVE PO BOX 58130 370 W TRIMBLE
164. N4152R 131 3359 00 ORDER BY DESCR 114 0342 00 X39H3162 SKA3703 SKA3703 CEAD20000F 545050800 5043ED442R0F 62MR500346D 683305 SA31 1200J 5033RD50K00F CEAD10000F CEAD 49900F CEAD20001F CEAD20001F CEAD47501F CEAD29401F CEAD10001F GB1845 GB1845 CEAD20001F CEA 4 5M 1 PERCENT CEAD10002F CEAD11502F 5033R D50K O0F 8 31 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix Serial No Serial No Mfr Number Part Number Effective Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A6R2030 321 0373 00 RES FXD FILM 75 0K OHM 1 0 125W 07716 75001 A6R2031 321 0367 00 RES FXD FILM 64 9K OHM 1 0 125W 07716 64901 A6R 2032 321 0097 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 1 0 125W 07716 CEAD100ROF A6R 2033 321 0097 00 RES FXD FILM 100 OHM 1 0 125W 07716 A6R 2034 321 0260 00 RES FXD FILM 4 99K OHM 1 0 125W 07716 CEAD 49900F A6U1030 156 1699 00 IC LINEAR DUAL BI FET OPNL AMP 01295 288 A6U1031 156 0514 00 IC MISC CMOS ANALOG MUX DUAL 4 CHANNEL 04713 14052 A6U2030 156 1437 00 IC LINEAR BIPOLAR VOLT REF POS 5V 1 0 04713 MC1404AU5 A6VR2020 152 0055 00 DIODE ZENER 11V 5 0 4W 04713 52635009 1 1N962BRL A6VR2021 152 0055 00 DIODE ZENER 11V 5 0 4W 04713 52635009 1 1N962BRL A6VR2030 152 0514 00 DIODE ZENER 10V 1 0 4W 04713 MZ4104D WIRE ASSEMBLIES 2010 174 0950 00 ASSY SP ELEC 26 28 AWG 11 0L 80009 174 0950 00 W2020 174 1539 00
165. NOT 3 vcc R2841 243 8 RAMP_TRIG_NOT O TP3041 IR1_NOT Tektronix 1502B C 1503B C MAIN DIGITAL TIMEBASE ASSY 570 9285 05 A1 14 Dec 94 C H 9 22 Al MAIN A B G CS18 NOT G CS29 NOT N 8022 1825 DRIVER_TRIG_NOT 1 9040 2 G CS27 NOT gt G CS28 NOT 83037 18 2K lt IR2 NOT U3221 74HC374 lt gt CS12_NOT 3 D lt gt D lt 1 gt lt gt Da lt 4 gt D lt 5 gt D 6 D lt 7 gt D LATCH 93022 74 175 G CS13 NOT lt gt lt 1 gt 4 Q lt gt FLIP FLOP A B Diagrams 1503C D 7 E F G H DRVR_HOD 12V R8827 29025 UBA 74HC113 15 0K 2 67 8024 g 0847JuF o 021 R9820 29015 2109813 C9011 R8028 22uF 24 3 35 7K 15 0 B 847uF 15 0 e 59021 R8825 US 634 0 R8821 4 09010 R7018 R8026 s 10 150 15 0 CR8020 ue Ies USBIBA R9812 0 9010 12V V 301 0 088108 74F00 D 890208 nee V 4 74708 25 4 75 8014 88223 gt 49 9 10K V 9010 R9024 150 2 C9g22 e 00 PIN 14 GEN TRIG NOT 047uF R8822 acon 99 1 lt gt 12 5 17 4 VCC_R TP9011 CS9223 R9823 12 2 20 108 0 88813 2002 0 12V R8818 10 24 3 8 22uF 070108 V 74HC113 4021 lt vec lt 21 9 6 8V 13 FF 12V Q gt 12 yer E ab 83031 R
166. OINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L TERM TEST POINT 0 052 ID 0 169 H 0 465 L IC DIGITAL CMOS MISC NONVOLATILE CONTROL IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP FLOP DUALJ K IC LINEAR BIPOLAR COMP ARATOR DUAL IC MEMORY CMOS SRAM 8K X 8 200 5 200 IC MEMORY CMOS SRAM 8K X 8 200 5 200 IC DIGITAL HCMOS DEMUX DE CODER IC DGTL CPU 6MHZ Z 80 DIP 40 IC DIGITAL HCMOS GATES 8 INP UT IC DIGITAL HCMOS GATE HEX INV SCHMITT TRIG 1503C MTDR Service Manual Mfr Code 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 57668 91637 91637 57668 57668 32997 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 10392 08049 04713 01295 0 R04 0 R04 01295 0 R04 27014 04713 Mfr Part Number CRB20 15 0 CRB20 FXE 16K5 CRB20 35K7 CRB14 FXE 24 3 CRB20 100E CRB20 8K06 CRB20 100E CRB20 2K00 CRB20 15 0 CCF50 2F26700F CCF501G 200R OF CRB20FXE 71 5 CRB20 FXE 27 4 3329H L58 502 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150 8 7 16150
167. P FLOP DUAL D TYP IC DIGITAL HCMOS GATE TRIP LE 3 INPUT NOR IC DITIAL HCMOS GATE QUAD 2 INPUT OR IC DIGITAL HCMOS TRANSCEIVER OCTAL NONINV IC DIGITAL HCMOS BUFFER NONINV OCTAL SOCKET DIP PCB 28 POS 2 X 14 0 1 X 0 6 IC DIGITAL HCMOS DEM IC DIGITAL HCMOS DEM IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP IC DIGITAL HCMOS DEM IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP IC DIGITAL HCMOS DEM IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP UX DECODER UX DECODER FLOP DUAL D TYP UX DECODER FLOP DUAL J K UX DECODER FLOP DUAL J K IC DGTL CHMOS COUNTER TIMER 82C54 CRYSTAL SCOPE IC DIGITAL ALSTTL F LIP IC DIGITAL ALSTTL F LIP FLOP QUAD D TYPE FLOP DUAL J K DIGITAL ALSTTL GATE QUAD 2 INPUT NOR IC DIGITAL ALSTTL F LIP FLOP QUAD D TYPE IC DIGITAL ALSTTL COUNTER SYNCH 4 BIT IC DIGITAL HCTCMOS GATE QUAD 2 INPUT AND IC LINEAR 12 BIT PLUS SIGN 1205 IC DIGITAL ALSTTL F LIP IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP FLOP DUAL J K FLOP QUAD D TYPE FLOP OCTAL D TY PE IC DIGITAL FTTL GATE TRIPLE 3 INPUT INTFC CMOS D A CONVERTER IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP FLOP OCTAL D TYPE IC DIGITAL HCMOS GATE QUAD 2 INPUT NOR IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP IC DIGITAL HCMOS FLIP FLOP OCTAL D TYPE FLOP QUAD D TYPE IC LINEAR DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER IC LINEAR BIP OLAR VOLT REF POS 2 5V 1 0 IC LINEAR BIP OLAR OP 05 5 OUT OP AMP IC LINEAR MOS FET INP AMP Mfr Code 27014 04713 01295 01295 04713 01295 04713 27014 09922 01295 0
168. Point TP2030 Location of Main Board in Instrument Main Board Probe Points Waveform on Display Battery Connections to Power Supply Board CR2012 on Power Supply Board Display Showing Power is Battery Display Showing Battery Voltage is Low R2012 on Power Supply Board 6 22 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 24 6 25 6 25 6 26 6 26 6 27 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 29 6 30 6 30 6 32 6 32 6 33 6 33 6 34 6 34 6 35 6 37 6 39 6 39 6 40 1503 MTDR Service Manual Table of Contents 1503C MTDR Service Manual Figure 6 72 Figure 6 73 Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Figure 6 76 Figure 6 77 Figure 6 78 Figure 6 79 Figure 6 80 Figure 6 81 Figure 6 82 Figure 6 83 Figure 6 84 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Figure 6 87 Figure 6 88 Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 Figure 6 91 Figure 6 92 Figure 6 93 Figure 7 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 R1018 on Front Panel Board LCD Pattern with Contrast Too Light LCD Pattern with Contrast Too Dark LCD Pattern Adjusted for Sharpness Waveform with Contrast Too Light Waveform with Contrast Adjusted Correctly Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument TP1081 and TP1082 on Pulser Sampler Board VR3020 and VR30212 Pulser Sampler Board Service
169. Push STORE 4 Turnthe NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg The instrument is now in HORZ SET REF or delta mode The distance window should now read 0 00 ft As the cursor is scrolled down the cable the distance reading will now be from the new zero reference point Po 00014 Figure 1 24 Cursor Moved to End of Three Foot Lead in Cable NOTE Vp changes will affect where the reference is set on the cable Be sure to set the Vp first then set the delta to the desired location 5 To exit HORZ SET REF use the following procedure a Turn the NOISE FILTER control to HORZ SET REF b Turn DIST DIV to 1 ft div If the distance reading is extremely high you might want to use a higher setting initially then turn to 1 ft div for the next adjustment c Turn the de POSITION control until the distance window reads 0 00 ft 1 23 Operating Instructions move cursor to reference and Press STORE 5 20 i We Ges cc SA ee SHS Sa SOS S SS Shee S Figure 1 25 Cursor Moved to 0 00 ft d Push STORE e Turn NOISE FILTER to desired setting Using Vertical Set VERT SET REF works similar to HORZ SET REF except that it sets a reference Reference for gain pulse height instead of distance This feature allows zeroing the dB scale at whatever pulse height is desired 1 Turn NOISE FILTER fully counterclockwise Set Ref will appear in the noise averaging area
170. Q1021 2 F2 B1 R2013 5 F2 A2 R5020 8B A4 B5 Q1030 2 F1 C1 R2014 4 F2 A2 R5021 8B B3 B5 Q1031 2 F1 C1 R2015 4 F3 A2 R5022 8B B3 B5 Q2011 5 F2 A2 R2030 7 F1 C2 R5023 8B A3 B5 R2031 7 D3 C2 R5024 8B G3 B5 Q2012 5 G2 A2 R2033 8B C1 C2 R5025 8B G3 5 03030 C3 Q4030 8A F3 C4 R2034 8B 1 C2 R5026 8B E2 B5 Q4031 8B B2 C4 R2040 6 E4 D2 R5030 8B E2 C5 Q4040 8B B2 D4 R2041 7 G3 D2 R5031 8B D2 C5 Q5020A 8B E2 B5 R2042 7 G2 D2 R5032 8B D1 C5 R2043 7 A2 D2 R5033 8B C2 C5 Q5020B 8B E2 B5 R3010 2 C2 A3 R5034 8B C1 C5 Q5030 8B D2 C5 Q5031 8B D2 C5 R3020 8A C4 B3 R5035 8B C2 C5 Q5032A 8B C2 C5 R3030 8A D3 C3 R6030 8B D2 050328 8B G2 C5 R3031 8A C3 C3 R6031 8B C2 C6 Q6020 8B F2 B6 R3032 8A C3 C3 R6032 8B C1 R3033 8A C3 C3 R6033 8B D1 Q7020 8B G2 B7 R3034 8A E3 C3 R6040 6 F4 D6 Q7021 8B E2 B7 Q7030 8B D2 7 R3035 8A F3 C3 R6041 6 F3 D6 Q8020 8A D2 B8 R3036 8A F3 C3 R6042 6 F3 D6 Q9010 8A E2 A9 R3037 8A B3 C3 R6043 6 F3 D6 Q9020A 8A C2 B9 R3038 8B B2 C3 R6044 6 F3 D6 R3039 8B B2 C3 R6045 6 F3 D6 Q9020B 8A D2 B9 R3040 8B B2 D3 R6046 6 F2 D6 09021 8A B1 B9 R3041 8B A2 D3 R6047 6 F2 D6 R1010 2 G2 A1 R3042 8B 1 D3 R7010 8A G2 7 R1011 5 D3 A1 R4020 8A D4 B4 R7011 5 E2 A7 R1012 5 D3 A1 R4021 8A E3 B4 R7012 8B G1 A7 R1013 5 E3 A1 R4022 8A C3 B4 R7013 8B G1 A7 R1014 5 F3 A1 R4023 8A F3 B4 R7014 8B F2 A7 R1015 5 E3 A1 R4030 8A G3 C4 R7015 8B G2 A7 R1016 5 F3 1 R4031 8B B2 C4 R7020 8B F2 B7 R1020 2 E2 1 4032 8B B3 C4 R7021 8B F2 B7
171. R PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 60HM XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 OHM XSTR NPN SI TO 92 2N4401 XSTR NPN SI TO 92 2N4401 XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 60HM XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 OHM XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NP 40V 200MA 250MHZ AMP Mfr Code 31433 985 31433 04222 14936 50434 04713 04713 14936 14936 80009 04713 04713 04713 50434 50434 80009 14433 50434 04713 12969 12969 80009 80009 58050 54937 54937 04713 04713 04713 04713 04713 04713 03508 Mfr Part Number C114C224M5Y5CA CEUSM1J470 C114C224M5Y5CA SR305C105MAATRSTDII GBPC604 5082 2672 1N5820 1N5820 SB120 5 SB120 5 152 0779 00 MUR115 MUR460RL 1N5820 5082 2672 5082 2672 152 0836 00 1N4152 5082 2672 MUR115 NDP261 NDP261 131 4177 00 131 3445 00 082 3644 SS10 500 3990 500 3990 IRFD9120 IRFD9120 2N4401 2N4401 IRFD9120 IRFD9120 X39H3162 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Tektronix SerialNo Serial Mfr Number Part Number Effective Disconttd Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A3A1Q2021 151 0424 00 XSTR NP N SI TO 92 MPS2369A 04713 52369 A3A1Q2022 151 1136 00 XSTR PWR MOS N CH 100V 14A 0 16 OHM 04713 12 10 A3A1Q2030 151 1063 00 XSTR PWR MOS N CH 60V 0 8A 0 8 OHM 04713 IRFD113 A3A1Q2031 151 1063 00 XSTR PWR MOS N CH 60V 0 8A 0 8 OHM 04713 IRFD113 A3A1R1010 308 0839 00 RES FXD
172. R1010 13 G2 A1 R1011 13 G2 A1 R1012 13 G2 A1 R1013 13 G1 A1 R1020 13 F2 B1 R1030 13 F1 C1 1031 13 E1 C1 R1032 13 E2 C1 R1033 13 E2 C1 R1034 13 C1 R1035 13 D2 C1 R1036 13 D2 C1 R1037 13 D2 C1 R2020 13 G2 B2 9 14 1503C MTDR Service Manual Al MAIN Fig 9 2 Component Locator Main Board 22220 01021 21029 pm MM 2610 osos O 9 ur R 3 TED ococe 55045 95042 M o N taa coe fel wa S C1042 1P0F3 9042 Diagrams 1503C 9 15 Al MAIN A B 1 PULSER SAMPLER 15 3B C 4 DRIVER SAMPLER 1502 4 190108 1 2 GEN_TRIG_NOT 4 5 6 00 SAMPLE TRIG NOT s gt 7 8 age lt 9 18 04 Q5 11 12 vec 13 14 5V 15V 5 15 16 15 gt 17 18 19 28 VID IN lt gt 2 OPTION PORT Jeoig 3 BDK1 1 2 lt R T TRIG NOT 3 4 lt gt WR gt 5S 6 lt BA 3 RD NOT 5 7 s lt V E BA CS22 s 18 lt lt gt 11 12 lt
173. R1021 2 F1 B1 R4040 6 H4 D4 R7022 8B F1 B7 R1022 2 F1 B1 R4041 6 H3 D4 R7023 8B E1 B7 R1023 2 E1 B1 R4042 6 H3 D4 R7024 8B F1 B7 1503C MTDR Service Manual 9 5 Diagrams A1 MAIN CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE 5 BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD R7025 8B E2 B7 9023 D2 B9 U1034 7 B1 C1 R7026 8B F2 B7 R9024 8A D2 B9 U1040A 3 B3 D1 R7027 8B F2 B7 R9025 8A C2 B9 U1040B 3 C3 D1 R7028 8B F3 B7 R9026 8A 1 9 U1041A 3 D4 D1 R7029 8B F1 B7 R9027 8A B1 B9 U1041B 3 E4 D1 R7030 8B F2 C7 R9030 5 B2 C9 U1042A 3 C4 D1 R7031 8B E2 C7 R9031 5 B2 C9 U1042B 3 B1 D1 R7032 8B D2 C7 R9032 5 B2 C9 U1042C 3 B3 D1 R7033 8B D2 C7 U1043A 2 D2 D1 R7034 8B D2 C7 TP1040 2 C1 D1 U1043B 3 E2 D1 R7040 1 F2 D7 TP1041 7 E1 D1 U1043C 2 B3 D1 R8010 8A F2 A8 TP2040 7 B1 D2 U1043D 2 C3 D1 TP3040 7 G3 D3 R8011 8A E2 A8 TP3041 7 G3 D3 U2011 4 D1 A2 R8012 8A E2 A8 TP4020 8A H4 B4 U2012A 4 D3 A2 R8013 8A E2 A8 U2012B 4 D2 A2 R8014 8A D2 A8 TP4021 8A H3 B4 U2020 2 D3 B2 R8020 8A D1 B8 TP4040 6 H2 D4 U2021 3 E3 B2 R8021 8A E2 B8 TP6010 8B F4 A6 U2022 3 G1 B2 TP7010 8B G2 A7 R8022 8A E2 B8 TP9010 8B E3 A9 U2023A 2 C4 B2 R8023 8A E2 B8 TP9011 8A G2 A9 U2023B 3 G3 B2 R8024 8A D2 B8 U2024 3 F2 B2 R8025 8A C2 B8 TP9040 8A B2 D9 U2025A 7 F1 B2 R8026 8A B2 B8 TP9041 6 A2 D9 U2025B 7 G1 B2 R8027 8A B1 B8 U2026 3 F2 B2 U1010 2 G2 1 R8028 8A 1 U1011A 4 D4 1 02027 7 C4 B
174. SSY MAIN W EPROM ETHERNET OPTION 06 ONLY 1 1 670 9285 04 8020000 8023542 ASSY MAIN W O EPROM 670 9285 05 B023543 CKT BD ASSY MAIN W O EPROM A2 672 1389 00 CKT BD ASSY FRONT PANEL 1 670 9286 04 8020000 8023542 BD ASSY POWER SUPPLY 670 9286 05 B023543 CKT BD ASSY POWER SUPPLY A4 670 9290 03 8020000 8023542 BD ASSY L R PULSER SAMPLER 670 9290 04 8023543 B024251 CKT BD ASSY L R PULSER SAMPLER 670 9290 05 8024252 B024700 CKT BD ASSY L R PULSER SAMPLER 670 9290 06 8024701 8025257 CKT BD ASSY L R PULSER SAMPLER 670 9290 07 8 025258 8025371 BD ASSY L R PULSER SAMPLER 670 9290 08 8025372 CKT BD ASSY L R PULSER SAMPLER 5 672 1241 00 B020000 B023853 CKT BD ASSY DISPLAY MODULE 118 9050 01 B023854 CKT BD ASSY DISPLAY MODULE A6 671 0443 00 B010100 B023647 CKT BD ASSY ETHERNET 671 0443 01 B023648 CKT BD ASSY ETHERNET CER WIRE ASSEMBLIES 1503C MTDR Service Manual Mfr Code 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 80009 Mfr Part Number 672 1388 00 672 1390 00 670 9285 04 670 9285 05 672 1389 00 670 9286 04 670 9286 05 670 9290 03 670 9290 04 670 9290 05 670 9290 06 670 9290 07 670 9290 08 672 1241 00 118 9050 01 671 0443 00 671 0443 01 8 5 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A1 A1U2020 A1BT1010 Al A1U2020 A1BT1010 A1A1
175. Service Manual Tektronix 1503 Metallic Time Domain Reflectometer 070 7170 05 This document applies to firmware version 5 04 and above Warning The servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid personal injury do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Refer to all safety summaries prior to performing service www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved Tektronix Inc P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc WARRANTY Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If a product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the d
176. T lt gt D lt 1 gt D p lt gt lt 3 gt D lt 4 gt 1 lt 5 gt 1 lt 5 gt 1 lt 7 gt A lt 0 gt A lt 1 gt A lt 2 gt A lt 3 gt G OPHR NOT G CS12 NOT 2014 22uF Diagrams 1503C D G H 02011 74HC245 1 lt 9 gt BD lt 1 gt BD lt 2 gt BD lt 3 gt BD lt 4 gt BD lt S gt lt gt BK OCTAL BUS TRANSCEIVER NC R2014 10 1 U2812B e 74HC244 BA g lt 1 gt BA lt 2 gt BA lt 3 gt Cam RD_NOT KWR NOT lt CS22 NOT EUGENIUM x GUAD BUFFER 3 7 1098 B 6 5 MBE Regis 9x10K 5V 5 QUAD BUFFER U2B12A 74HC244 vcc U1011A 74HC113 4 PRE xd 05 IA NOT lt 4 Tektronixe 1502B C 1503 MAIN OPTION PORT INTERFACE ASSY 570 9285 05 D G H 9 19 Al MAIN A B 6 0014 U98030 1 64194 12V 12V 9833 1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 2 R9031 27 4K R9832 SK 12 L U2040B 4 74 lt gt RST NOT 6 3 U10118 74 113 PR i 21 8 CS1S FF 13 CS14 NOT ob vcc 4 REVK 5 B Diagrams 1503C H R2012 160K 2011 2 2016 8 1uF 01012 LH393 R7011 128 8 16V_RTN 12V L vec R1814 108K ve 19 01010 R1011 51 _ 62015 81018 18K U10128 7 45V SH LH393 u 62818 g 22uF R1012 10K Tektronixe 1502B
177. U2030A 1A E8 C2 U2030B 1A F7 C2 02030 1A F7 C2 U2030D 1A F7 C2 U2030E 1A F7 C2 VR1012 1A D2 Al 9 10 1503C MTDR Service Manual Diagrams A4 L R PULSER SANPLER CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION CIRCUIT SCHEM LOCATION NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE SCHEM BRD NUMBER PAGE 5 C1040 4B C7 D1 C3021 4B H4 B3 L1040 4B C7 D1 C1060 4A A2 F1 C3030 4B E2 C3 L2040 4B C6 D2 C1061 4A B4 F1 C3031 4B E2 C3 L2041 4B C5 D2 C1062 4A B4 F1 C3032 4B E2 C1063 4B B3 F1 C3033 4B A6 C3 Q1010 4B F7 1 1064 4 F1 C3034 4B A6 C3 Q1020 4B G4 B1 Q1021 4B F4 B1 C1065 4A A2 F1 C3040 4B D7 D3 Q1022 4B F5 1 1066 4 4 F1 C3050 4B B2 E3 Q1030 4B F7 C1 C1070 4A E4 G1 C3051 4B B1 E3 Q1031 4B F6 C1 C1080 4A H1 C3052 4A A6 E3 C1081 4A B5 H1 C3060 4A D3 F3 Q1060 4B A4 F1 C1082 4A C3061 4A C4 F3 Q2010 4B G2 A2 Q2011 4B F2 A2 C1083 4A E5 H1 C3062 4A C4 F3 Q2012 4B F2 A2 C1084 4A E4 H1 C3063 4A B6 F3 Q2030 4B D7 C2 C1085 4A F4 H1 C3064 4A B2 F3 Q2031 4B D6 C2 C1090 4A H3 11 C3065 4A B6 F3 C1091 4A H4 1 C3070 4A D6 G3 Q2032 4B D5 C2 C2013 4B G2 A2 C3071 4A B5 G3 Q2033 4B D3 C2 Q2034 4B D2 C2 C2014 4B F2 A2 C3072 4A D5 G3 Q2040 4B C3 D2 C2015 4B F2 A2 C3080 4A D6 H3 Q2050 4B B6 E2 C2020 4B E4 B2 C3081 4A D6 H3 Q2051 4B C5 E2 C2021 4B G4 B2 C3082 4A F6 H3 C2022 4B F4 B2 Q2052 4B C5 E2 C2023 4B F4 B2 CR1010 4B G7 Al Q2053 4B B2 E2 CR1030 4B G6 C1 Q2060 4A D3 F2 C2030 4B
178. V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER 01 1 8 0 1 100 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 51PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 0 1UF 10 100V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 220PF 1096 200V SQ CAP FXD CER 01 100 5 50 SQ CAP FXD CER DI 1000P 5 200 SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 1 8PF 0 1 100V SQ CAP FXD CER DI 1000P F 596 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 1000P 5 200 SQ CAP FXD PLASTIC 0 22UF 10 100V CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 04UF 20 50V CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 50 2095 25 VDC Mfr Part Number 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 CY y CY CY CY C DD09B10 5 102K 200V SR305C105MAATRSTDII SR305C105MAATRSTDII C114C224M5Y 5CA SR155C103KAA 114 224 5 5 SA115C104KAA DD09B10 5F 102K 200V C114C224M5Y 5CA C114C224M5Y 5CA 114 224 5 5 114 224 5 5 5024E 0200R D221K SR202A510 AA SR211C 104KAA SR075A221KAAAP1 15 101 C322C102 265CA C114C224M5Y 5CA C114C224M5Y 5CA 5024 02008 D221K 322 102 265 C114C224M5Y5CA 322 102 265CA B32571 22 10 100 C114C224M5Y5CA SA105E473MAA CEUST1E100
179. VDC reference from U3040 The device is clocked by a 1 25 MHz clock derived from the timebase oscillator and completes its 12 bit plus sign conversion in approximately 100 Us Gate U2040 provides an OR function for the ADC start conversion trigger and read pulses from the processor system Either pulse selects the ADC for control and concurrent pulses select the trigger WR input or read RD input functions Upon completing a conversion the processor system is notified by an interrupt request from U2041 The timebase circuits receive video sample time delay values in digital form from the processor system and generate precisely timed strobes to the pulser sampler circuits Digital counters determine the delay in 50 ns multiples and analog circuits further define the delay to fractions of that period A block diagram of the timebase circuits is shown in Figure 5 8 next page Circuit Descriptions Clock Generator DATA PRT DATA gt gt CONTROL 5 16 2 5 MHz SYSTEM CLOCKS The digital portion of the timebase contains a clock generator that develops all frequencies used in the instrument electronics 20 MHz 5 MHz 2 5 MHz 1 25 MHz 625 KHz 20 MHz 2 5 MHz Course Delay Time Pulse DRIVER Delay y Stobe PULSE Former TRIGGER Circuit Driver GENERATOR 20 MHz Counter gt RAMP Ramp TR
180. X AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary xiii Service Safety Summary a ce RA ER OE XV General Information xvii Installation and RepackIng ur kee ce ee mb ERES ek ERAS Contacting sed Rp dn edb ngs ao ae XIV Operating Instructions Operating Instructions 1 1 OVERVIEW vs ise beet 1 1 Preparing to Use the 1503C eect een 1 5 Display 1 6 Front Panel Controls 1 6 Men Selections ee bia we eee 1 8 Test Preparations 22222220 ULP 1 11 Cable Test Procedure yur css susu ieee ie tia bes ee eee eats 1 13 Additional Features Menu 1 25 Operator Performance Checks Operator Performance Checks 2 1 Specifications Specifications 2 2 9 e RE REE 3 1 Electrical Characteristics 2 2222 2 2 4 6 3 1 Environmental Characteristics 3 3 Physical Characteristics 2222222
181. address bits A15 A14 A13 in combination with MREQ Each of its decodes represents a selection of a particular g th of addressable locations The first four decode signals are not used because they are located in the program memory space The fifth decode is the select signal for the first RAM occupying locations to 9FFFH The second RAM is also an 8 kb memory U1020 made non volatile by lithium battery BT1010 and non volatile memory controller U1010 The select signal for this RAM is generated similarly to that for the first RAM with the sixth g th decode of U1022 This decode occupies AOOOH to BFFFH The display RAM is also an 8 kb memory U1040 located in the display module It is selected by the seventh decode of U1022 It occupies locations COOOH to DFFFH The remaining addressable space is used to generate enable select or trigger signals which read write and control other circuits of the instrument The eighth 1 g th decode signal of U1022 is used to enable four other 1 of 8 decoders U2021 U2022 02024 and 02026 These four decoders are further selected by the four Circuit Descriptions Option Port Interface Additional Decoding Interrupt Logic Introduction combinations of 2 and A and operate 10 Ao and to generate the enable select and trigger signals CS00 through CS31 These occupy the remaining address space locations EOOOH to FFFFH An automatic wait state is inserted fo
182. agram and circuit board component location illustration have grids A lookup table with the grid coordinates is provided for to help you locate the component The component locator lookup table provides an alphanumeric listing of all circuit numbers for the circuit boards in the instrument Corresponding to each circuit number is a schematic page reference the locator for that schematic page and the locator for the circuit board The locator lists are given for each circuit board ordered by that board s assembly number An example entry is as follows Schematic Schematic Board Page Locator Locator Y 10306 2 D8 Cl Read Capacitor C10306 is found on schematic 2B in grid D8 Its physical location is grid on the circuit board A locator list and circuit board grid are also given on each circuit board illustration Graphic symbols and class designation letters are based on ANSI standards Logic symbology reflects the actual part function not the logic function performed Therefore logic symbols should reflect manufacturer s data Electrical components shown on the diagrams are in the following units Resistors Ohm Q Diagrams Component Number Capacitors Farad F Inductors Henry H All capacitors and inductors indicate their units resistors only indicate the appropriate scale factor Scale factors are given by the following standard M mega 106 k kilo 103 m milli 10 3 u micro u 10
183. al Characteristics Characteristic Description Weight without cover 14 5 Ibs 6 57 kg with cover 16 Ibs 7 25 kg with cover chart recorder and battery pack 20 Ibs 9 07 kg Shipping Weight domestic 25 5 Ibs 11 57 kg export 25 5 Ibs 11 57 kg Height 5 0 inches 127 mm Width with handle 12 4 inches 315 mm without handle 11 8 inches 300 mm Depth with cover on 16 5 inches 436 mm with handle extended to front 18 7 inches 490 mm 1503C MTDR Service Manual Specifications 3 6 1503 MTDR Service Manual Gw Z i j l i Options and Accessories The following options are available for the 1503C MTDR Option 04 YT 1 Chart Recorder Option 04 instruments come equipped with a chart printer Refer to the YT 1 YT 1S Chart Recorder Instruction Manual that comes with this option for instructions on operation paper replacement and maintenance Option 05 Metric Default Option 06 Ethernet What is Ethernet 1503C MTDR Service Manual Option 05 instruments will power up in the metric measurements mode Standard measurements may be selected from the menu but metric will be the default Option 06 instruments include circuitry that allows the 1503C to test an Ethernet bus using time domain reflectometry with minimum disruption to the IEEE 802 3 protocol Ethernet was invented by the Xerox Corporation in 1973 to allow various data devices to use common communicatio
184. alls QU 4 cens 12010 EB 020 RETA Fig 9 6 Component Locator Ethernet Board Option 06 9 34 A6 ETHERNET Diagrams 1503C A H IMPEDANCE ADJ 9 R1813 508 C1821 R1831 2 24 S k R1812 CR2025 CR2824 1 a 442 0 R1011 12010 56 A lmH 4 CHAN HUX R1037 is 416 3 29 4k 1 2 2l 3 TO 43818 R1836 LF412 ek 7 5 15V s 5 15V 4 2 1 lt 42030 R2821 PULSER SAMPLER A4 188k C2831 CReg22 8 luF 1 l MC1404 CR2823 LF412 U1B3BA R2830 D L ISR R2832 102 R2034 4 99 15V 12V REF 030 9 35 Gw 5 5 Replaceable Mechanical Parts This section contains a list of the replaceable mechanical components for the 1503 Use this list to identify and order replacement parts Parts Ordering Information Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or representative Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements Therefore when ordering parts it is important to include the following information in your order m Part number m Instrument type or model number m Instrument serial number m Instrument modification number
185. ampler and to TP7010 Timebase DAC 04020 and amplifier 05010 inverts and multiplies Vggp by the 14 bit digital word loaded by the processor It is filtered for noise by R7026 and C5023 and connected to comparator Q7021 through R7027 to set the analog delay 0 to 50 ns To calibrate the analog delay to 50 ns the processor sets 2 IR2 high and loads anew 12 bit word in latches 73021 03022 max 1 bit change per sweep with chip selects CS11 and CS12 DAC U3023 multiplies the reference current 1 mA set by R3020 by the digital word from the latches The DAC output current and the current from the last two LSBs which comes from the latches through R3031 R3033 R3039 and R4020 are summed by U4021A and forced through R4021 This develops a correction voltage at TP4020 of 5 VDC and a sensitivity of 2 5 mV per bit the currents from the LSBs have been complimented by the processor to correct their phase The DAC circuit is designed to nominally run at half of full dynamic range 2048 4096 of 2 mA that generate 1 mA of current at the summing node That current is balanced out by 1 mA of current from R4020 giving a nominal output of zero volts at TP4020 and TP4021 05020 R5020 R5021 and C5021 scale the correction signal up to 5 VDC at TP4020 to 0 4 VDC at of U4020 Resistors R5023 and R5022 furnish a current to offset to a 4 VDC 0 4 VDC equivalent to 5 ns correction signal to the 50 ns analog delay
186. andbook H6 1 for further item name identification Mfr Code This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part Mfr Part Number This indicates the actual manufacturer s or vendor s part number Abbreviations Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI 1 1 1972 Chassis Parts Chassis mounted parts and cable assemblies are located at the end of the Replaceable Electrical Parts List Mfr Code to Manufacturer The table titled Manufacturers Cross Index shows codes names and addresses of 10 2 Cross Index manufacturers or vendors of components listed in the parts list 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Mechanical Parts Manufacturers Cross Index Mfr Code TK0588 0914 1423 1943 2324 2545 2624 2233 2548 2582 6159 6372 0 260 0 4C1 0DWW6 0 472 0 7N9 0 9 4 0 ROS 0 825 OKBO1 0 05 00779 06915 22526 04963 28334 25262 2 013 53387 58474 5H194 5Y400 61935 73893 Manufacturer UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCTS WESTERN SINTERING CO INC WACHTEL CO INC THE NEILSEN MANUFACTURING INC RMS COMPANY ORNELAS INTERPRISES INC ROSS OPTICAL INDUSTRIES INC AMERICAN SLIDE CHART CORPORATION XEROX CORPORATION TUFF CAT USA LLC ARROW RICHEY ELECTRONICS VOLEX INTERCONNECT INC COMTEK MANUF OF OREGON TVT DIECASTING AND MFG INC MICRO PWER ELECTRONICS PRECISION PRINTERS MCX INC DELTA ENGINEERING TRIQUEST
187. ar end of a network Greater distances might require more gain depending on the loss of the cable and the pulse width 1503C MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories Descriptions of Test in the Ethernet Menu 1503C MTDR Service Manual The following tests are composed of several functions found in the Acquisition Control Menu These combinations are displayed in the Ethernet Menu as a user convenience Most of the tests in the Ethernet Menu can be recreated or modified That is explained at the end of this section Changes made in the Ethernet Menu will affect some of the Setup Menu and Acquisition Control Menu functions For example if Carrier Test is Off On is turned on the 50 2 termination will also be turned on because it is necessary for the carrier test to work 50 Q DC Termination is Off On CAUTION This must be on when testing on a working network or reflections will cause collisions on the network This entry is a duplicate of the entry in the Setup Menu Acquisition Control Menu Its function is to allow direct control of the termination inside the 1503C With the 50 Q DC termination the 1503C will function normally as a cable tester This is usually the only test needed to check a network cable CAUTION The 100 ns and 1000 ns pulses might cause collisions Longer pulses are more likely to generate collisions than shorter pulses On networks with traffic less than 3 to 496 a 2 ns pulse caus
188. are not to use a sharp object to remove the buttons because it might puncture the rubber boot thereby subjecting the instrument to moisture water intrusion Cp Figure 7 6 Display Module Front Panel Board Screw Locations 7 10 1503 MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Removing the Front Panel Board from the Display Module A Changing the Default to Metric 1503C MTDR Service Manual NOTE When re assembling push the rubber boot down on the switch shaft so that the switch button can easily be replaced 5 Remove the four screws holding the Display Module Front Panel Board to the front panel see Figure 7 6 previous page 6 Carefully lift the Display Module Front Panel Board from the front panel E Remove the four hex nuts two are shown in Figure 7 7 that hold the Display Module to the Front Panel Board 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the boards 3 Carefully separate the Display Module from the Front Panel Board Figure 7 7 Display Module Front Panel Board Showing Hex Nuts CAUTION Do not further disassemble the Display Module Elastomeric splices are used between the circuit boards and they require special alignment fixtures Parts replacement requires special surface mount technology The instrument will power up displaying DIST DIV measurements as meters m div
189. art Serial No Number Effective 016 0814 00 1 070 7170 01 1 070 7170 XX 1 040 1276 00 1 119 3616 00 1 006 7647 00 1 006 7677 00 1 006 7681 00 1 012 0671 03 1 103 0029 00 1 013 0261 00 1 013 0076 01 1 103 0090 00 1 103 0035 00 1 103 0058 00 1 103 0045 00 1 103 0015 00 1 103 0032 00 1 103 0158 00 1 013 0126 00 1 017 0063 00 1 017 0064 00 1 012 1350 00 1 011 0102 00 1 015 0327 00 1 013 0169 00 1 015 0495 00 1 015 0500 00 1 015 0579 00 1 015 0578 00 1 015 0600 00 1 1503 MTDR Service Manual Name amp Description OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES POUCH ACCESSORY 11 5 L X 9 5 W X 1 75 H VINYL MANUAL TECH SERVICE 1503C S N B01 MANUAL TECH SERVICE 1503C S N B02 MOD KIT 150XC OPTION 03 BATTERY INCLUDING INSTRUCTIONS CHART RECORDER SPLASH PROOF YTIS PAPER CHART THERMAL Y T1 SINGLE 100 FEET PAPER CHART THERMAL Y 1 OF 25 PAPER CHART THERMAL Y T1 BOX OF 100 CABLE INTCON 360 0 L PA1 TO OPTION ADAPTER CONN BNC MALE TO MALE ACCESS ADAPTER 2 WIRE FEMALE BNC W STR RELIEF TO ALLIGATOR CLIPS 7 0 L ADAPTER CONN BNC TO RETRACTABLE HOOK TIP ADAPTER CONNEC BNC FEMALE TO DUAL BANANA PLUG ADAPTER CONNEC BNC DUAL BINDING POST ADAPTER CONN N FEMALE TO BNC MALE ADAPTER CONN N MALE TO BNC FEMALE ADAPTER CONN BNC TO UHF ADAPTER CONN BNC MALE TO UHF FEMALE ADAPTER CONN BNC FEMALE TO F SERIES MALE ADAPTER CONN BNC PLUG TO F J ACK BNC MALE TO F TYPE FEMALE ADAPTER CONN GR TO TEK CONN W PNL MT NUT ADAPTER
190. as a current source to provide a constant charging current Voltage limiting circuits in the charger prevent battery overcharge by reducing the charge current as the battery voltages approaches 12 5 VDC The battery is lead gel providing a terminal voltage of 10 to 12 5 VDC with a nominal capacity of up to 2 0 Amp Hours It also is connected through a rectifier to the instrument s power switch and post regulator When the power switch is closed an FET power transistor is momentarily turned on by the deep discharge protection circuit If the voltage to the post regulator rises to 9 7 VDC or greater the transistor switch remains on If at any time the voltage drops below 9 7 VDC the transistor turns off and the power switch must be recycled to restart the instrument This operation prevents discharge of the battery below 10 VDC Such a discharge could cause a reverse charge in a weak cell resulting in permanent cell damage The post regulator is a boost switching regulator that increases its input voltage to a constant 16 2 VDC output This voltage is supplied directly to the processor for large loads such as the display heater electroluminescent backlight and options port The post regulator also supplies a DC to DC converter that generates 5 VDC and 15 VDC for use in the instrument Status signals indicating whether the instrument is running on AC line voltage or the battery and if the battery is approaching turn off level are
191. bnormality is found set the cursor at the beginning of the fault and read the distance to the fault on the distance window of the LCD Return loss is another was of measuring impedance changes in a cable Mathematically return loss is related to rho by the formula Return Loss in dB 20 log base ten of Absolute Value of Rho Veei Vinc To measure return loss with the 1503C note the height of the incident pulse then adjust the reflected pulse to be the same height that the incident pulse was and read the dB on the LCD display The amount of vertical scale change that was needed is the return loss in dB ee Loss Figure 1 13 Return gee A large return loss means that most of the pulse energy was lost instead of being returned as a reflection The lost energy might have been sent down the cable or absorbed by a terminator or load on the cable A terminator matched to the cable 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions Reflection Coefficient Measurements 1503C MTDR Service Manual would absorb most of the pulse so its return loss would be large An open or short would reflect all the energy so its return loss would be zero The 1503C can be made to display mp div instead of dB through MENU Press MENU Select Setup Menu Press MENU Select Vertical Scale is Decibels Press MENU This changes the selection to Vertical Scale is Millirho Press MENU again to exit from the Setu
192. button to Exit Figure 6 21 Noise Diagnostic Display NOTE If the instrument does not meet this specification refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter and the Troubleshooting section of the Maintenance chapter of this manual 11 Press MENU once to return to the Service Diagnostic Menu Do not exit from the Service Diagnostic Menu because you will use it in the next check 6 13 Calibration Impedance Check If the instrument fails this check it should not be used for loss or impedance measurements 1 While in the Service Diagnostic Menu select the Impedance Diagnostic and follow the directions shown on the display Exit Service Diagnostic Menu Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic Noise Diagnostic Impedance Diagnostic Offset G ain Diagnostic RAM ROM Diagnostics Timebase is Normal Auto Correction Move 4 Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 22 Service Diagnostic Menu 2 Press MENU once to return to the Service Diagnostic Menu Do not exit from the Service Diagnostic Menu because you will use it in the next check Offset Gain Check If the instrument fails this check it should not be used for loss or impedance measurements 1 While in the Service Diagnostic Menu select the Offset Gain Diagnostic and follow the directions shown on the display Exit Service Diagnostic Menu Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic Noise Diagnostic Impedance Diagnostic Offset Gain Diagnostic RAM ROM Diagnost
193. cable length is unknown set DIST DIV to 5000 ft div and continue to decrease the setting until the reflected pulse is visible Depending on the cable length and the amount of pulse energy absorbed by the cable it might be necessary to increase the VERT SCALE to provide more gain to see the reflected pulse The best pulse width is dependent on the cable length A short pulse can be completely dissipated in a long cable Increasing the pulse width will allow the reflected pulse to be more visible when testing long cables AUTO will select the pulse width for you depending on the distance on the right side of the LCD CABLE LENGTH SUGGESTED PULSE SUGGESTED ft div 0 to 100 ft 2 ns 10 ft div 51 to 500 ft 10 ns 50 ft div 501 to 5000 ft 100 ns 500 ft div 5001 to 50 000 ft 1000 ns 5000 ft div When the entire cable is displayed you can tell if there is an open or a short Essentially a drop in the pulse is a short and a rise in the pulse is an open Less catastrophic faults can be seen as hills and valleys in the waveform Bends and kinks frays water and interweaving all have distinctive signatures Short Figure 1 9 Short in the Cable 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions 1503C MTDR Service Manual 2000f Open 3 To find the distance to the fault or end of the cable turn the lt gt POSITION control until the cursor rests on the leading edge of the rising or falling reflected pul
194. cable of the exact type you wish to test Attach the cable to the CABLE connector on the front panel 2 Pull POWER on 3 Turn the DIST DIV to an appropriate setting e g if trying to find the Vp of a three foot cable turn the DIST DIV to 1 ft div 4 Turn the POSITION control until the distance reading is the same as the known length of this cable 5 Turn the Vp controls until the cursor is resting on the rising portion of the reflected pulse The Vp controls of the instrument are now set to the Vp of the cable The following three illustrations show settings too low too high and correct for a sample three foot cable ac Figure 1 5 Vp Set at 30 Cursor Beyond Reflected Pulse Setting Too Low 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions Figura 1 7 Vp Set at 66 Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse Set Correctly Cable Test Procedure Distance to the Fault Be sure to read the previous paragraphs on Vp 1 Set the 1503C controls POWER On CABLE Cable to BNC IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg DIST DIV see below Vp per cable PULSE WIDTH per cable 2 H you know approximately how long the cable is set the DIST DIV appropriately e g 20 ft cable would occupy four divisions on the LCD if 5 ft div was used The entire cable should be displayed 1503C MTDR Service Manual 1 13 Operating Instructions 1 14 Figure 1 8 20 ft Cable at 5 ftidiv Ifthe
195. ce with power meter GenRad W10MT3W or equiv Variable DC Power Supply 0to 14 VDC 3A 50 Q Feed through Terminator 011 0049 01 3 foot Coaxial Cable 500 012 1350 00 Metric default timing is made by moving a jumper on the back of the Front Panel Board see Maintenance chapter of this manual To make the calibration easier this jumper will be moved to the standard timing position during calibration then moved back to the metric position when calibration is completed On early instruments there is an adjustment on the Main Board used for timebase compensation identified as R2034 Because of a slight crosstalk effect between circuits measurements of a certain length cable would show a small glitch This adjustment eliminated the problem and subsequent improvements in circuit board design eliminated the need for the adjustment If your instrument has this adjustment it has been set at the factory and requires no further attention Power Supply Module Pulser Sampler Board Figure 6 57 Circuit Board Locations in the Instrument 6 37 Adjustment Procedures Visual Inspection If any repairs are made to the instrument or if it has been disassembled we recommend a visual inspection be made 1 Check all screws for tightness and that the screw heads are not burred or rounded Set the line voltage switch on the rear panel to 110V and check for the proper fuse 0 3 A Check if the LCD has been cleaned on the outside a
196. ciency of power distribution systems when the ratio consists of the energy put into the system divided by the energy delivered or is some cases lost by the system Our instrument measures return loss The formula for decibels is dB 2 log Vi VI where Vi is the voltage of the incident pulse V1 is the voltage reflected back by the load and log is the decimal based logarithmic function The dB vertical scale on our instrument refers to the amount of voltage gain amplification the instrument applies to the signal before displaying it For example when the instrument is amplifying the voltage by one hundred the dB scale would read 40 dB which is 20 log 100 Direct current is a method of delivering electrical energy by maintaining a constant flow of electrons in one direction Even circuits designed to generate only AC often have a DC component see Insulation A mathematical term that refers to the set of numbers that can be put into a function the set of numbers that comes out of the function is called the range time domain instrument performs its function by measuring time The total opposition to the flow of electrical energy is a cable or circuit Impedance is made partly of resistance frequency independent and partly of reactance frequency dependent Although impedance is expressed in units of Ohms it must not be confused with the simple resistance that only applies to DC signals Technically impedance is a funct
197. controls 09 9 NE Tektronix 15036 N isp UEM TNR a gt H H H t H 9 1 VIEW DIFF 9 STORE gt 500 1 avg 000 db 1 ons nn RE MAX IMPEDANCE NOISE FILTER VERT SCALE DIST DIV N POWER NO PULLON 140 Figure 1 3 1503 Front Panel Controls CAUTION Do not connect to circuits or cables with live voltages greater than 400 V peak Voltages exceeding 400 V might damage the 1503C front end circuits 1503 MTDR Service Manual 1 5 Operating Instructions Display Power Front Panel to Cursor Type Cursor Waveform Distance Window ac Indicator Grid View Store Indicator View Difference P Indicator T Store 226 Indicator lie ote ew 500 1 avg 0 00 dB 5000 ft 2ns Selected Selected Selected Selected Selected Impedance Noise Filter Vertical Scale Distance per Pulse Width Division Figure 1 4 Display and Indicators Front Panel Controls 1 CABLE A female BNC connector for attaching a cable to the 1503C for testing IMPEDANCE 2 IMPEDANCE A four position rotary swi
198. croll to LCD Alignment Diagnostic NA Push MENU 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures 1503C MTDR Service Manual R1018 Figure 6 72 R1018 on Front Panel Board 9 Observe the LCD as you adjust R1018 Contrast Adjust counterclockwise until the entire pattern starts to dim Figure 6 73 LCD Pattern with Contrast Too Light Figure 6 74 LCD Pattern with Contrast Too Dark 10 Turn R1018 clockwise until the entire pattern is clear and sharp 6 47 Adjustment Procedures 6 48 Push MENU 1 sec to alternate 2 secs to quit Figure 6 75 LCD Pattern Adjusted for Sharpness 11 Press MENU once quickly The ON pixels will be toggled off and the OFF pixels will be toggled on Watch to see if all the pixels are being activated 12 Once contrast has been set using the LCD pattern verify it with a normal waveform display a Ensure that the instrument has been at 75 F 5 F 25 3 C for at least one hour operating or non operating b Turn the instrument on and allow it to warm up for at least five minutes If the instrument was already on e g you are performing this adjustment immediately after steps 1 11 then cycle the power off then back on again to return it to default settings c Whilea waveform is on the display adjust R1018 on the Front Panel Board counterclockwise until most of the display has dimmed Figure 6 76 Waveform with Contrast Too Light d S
199. d Column 4 lists the serial number of the last instrument or the suffix number of the circuit board in which the part was used No entry indicates that the part is used in all instruments Column 5 In this parts list the item name is separated from its description by a colon Because of space limitations the item name may appear to be incomplete For further item name identification refer to the U S Federal Cataloging Handbook H6 1 Column 6 This column lists the code number of the manufacturer of the part Column 7 This column lists the manufacturer s part number 1503C MTDR Service Manual Replaceable Electrical Parts Manufacturers Cross Index Mfr Code Manufacturer 2460 AMERICA INC 01002 GENERAL ELECTRIC CO 01121 ALLEN BRADLEY CO 01295 TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC 01686 RCL ELECTRONICS SHALLCROSS INC 02111 SPECTROL ELECTRONICS CORP 04222 AVX CERAMICS 04426 ITW SWITCHES 04713 MOTOROLA INC 060D9 UNITREK CORPORATION 07716 IRC INC 09353 C AND K COMPONENTS INC 09922 FRAMATOME CONNECTORS USA INC 0B0A9 DALLAS SEMICONDUCTOR CORP 0GV52 SCHAFFNER EMC INC 0 1 5 UNITED CHEMI CON INC 0J R03 ZMAN MAGNETICS INC 0 R04 TOSHIBA AMERICA INC 10392 GENERAL STAPLE CO INC 12697 CLAROSTAT MFG CO INC 12954 MICROSEMI CORP SCOTTSDALE 12969 MICROSEMI CORP WATERTOWN 13409 SENSITRON SEMICONDUCTOR 14433 ITT SEMICONDUCTORS DIV 14552 MICROSEMI CORP 14936 GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP 16546 PH
200. default condition when the instrument is powered up is to have VIEW INPUT on Q j i 4 i P j Deep d vara ee ee ee E E d E Figure 1 15 Display with VIEW INPUT Turned Off 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions How to Store the Waveform Using VIEW STORE Using VIEW DIFF 1503C MTDR Service Manual When pushed the STORE button puts the current waveform being displayed into memory If already stored pushing STORE again will erase the stored waveform Figure 1 16 Display ofa i Stored Waveform The front panel control settings and the menu accessed settings are also stored They are accessed under View Stored Waveform Settings in the first level of the menu The VIEW STORE button when pushed on displays the waveform stored in the memory as a dotted line If there is no waveform in memory a message appears on the LCD informing you of this Waveform 1 17 Display ofa 1 Stored Waveform and Current Waveform When pushed VIEW DIFF button displays the difference between the current waveform and the stored waveform as a dotted line If no waveform has been stored a message will appear The difference waveform is made by subtracting each point in the stored waveform from each point in the current waveform NOTE If the two waveforms are identical e g if STORE is pushed and VIEW DIFF is immediately pushed the difference would be zero
201. detailed error messages during the development can be very useful For more information contact your Tektronix Customer Service representatives They have information describing the option port hardware and software protocol and custom development methods available The SP 232 a serial interface product also allows for connection of the 1503C to other instrumentation including computers via the option port SP 232 is an RS 232C compatible interface For more information contact your Tektronix Customer Service Representative They can provide you with additional details on the hardware and software protocol Display Contrast Software Version 5 02 and above 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions Test Preparations The Importance of Vp Velocity of Propagation Vp of Various Dielectric Types 1503C MTDR Service Manual Press the MENU button firmly once If the display is very light or very dark you might not be able to see a change in the contrast b Turn VERTICAL SCALE knob slowly clockwise to darken the display or counterclockwise to lighten the display If you turn the knob far enough the contrast will wrap from the darkest to lightest value When the screen is clearly readable press the MENU button again to return to normal measurement operation The new contrast value will remain in effect until the instrument is turned off Vp is the speed of a signal down the cable given as a percentage o
202. di me 81 Hv1S Av13a IYLI IA 160241 ZHIN 02 B ZHN Calibration of Delay Zero and 50 ns Analog Delay Figure 5 11 5 19 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 5 20 Digital Timebase Analog Timebase All digital clocks from the instrument are derived from a 20 MHz crystal oscillator U2031 Flip flops U2042A and U2042B divide the clock frequency to 10 MHz and 5 MHz respectively The 5 MHz output is provided to the microprocessor and to TP2041 Gate U2034B decodes one of the four states if U2042 and provides a 5 MHz pulse to U2033B Flip flop U2033B is clocked by the 20 MHz clock and divides the 5 MHz signals to 2 5 MHz synchronously with the 20 MHz The 2 5 MHz clock is further divided to 1 25 MHz by U2025A and 625 kHz by U2025B The PRT coarse delay and real time counters are contained in a triple 16 bit programmable counter device U2030 The PRT and coarse delay counters are clocked at the 2 5 MHz rate The output of the PRT counter pin 10 of 02030 is applied to the trigger input of the coarse delay counter as a start count signal The negative going pulse from the coarse delay counter pin 13 of U2030 is input to a two stage shift register U2032C and U2032D This shift register is also clocked at 2 5 MHz and serves to delay the signal and reduce its skew relative to the 20 MHz clock The Q inverted output of U2032C is a positive going pulse that is supplied to a
203. e 10904 1 4 R gss 68 4 4 99 2084 12 1K 4 8 5 1 st COMP w PRINTED ELEMENT VOLTAGES TRACK WITH INV VIDEO SIGNAL VALUES SHOWN ARE FOR ZERO SIGNAL mas 1503 1583C L R PULSER SAMPLER 8 SAMPLER REGULATER A4 LONG RANGE PULSER SAMPLER Diagrams 1503C A B D F C H 1 sv 1 R2854 c3gs1 5v caese 83645 fia Re S1 RIS 62053 108 12v 1 120 2 PULSE_TRIG_NOT 2243 gt Rag23 83022 4 7K 4 7 reese PULSE STROBE iJ 20 vR3821 5 6 5 5 12 62048 51853 gt e E 1 8 220 23818 r 02840 1 pF cagii 3 24K 2 22uF reagas 3 gt 73 21961 22844 4 SQ OHM LINE EN 01068 E gt R3232 583 8 4 5 5 21051 81058 7 CR1818 12 12v ronixe 1503 1503 L R PULSER SAMPLER PULSE GENERATOR 4 QUTPUT ASSY 72 9298 08 A4 REV 3 D I E F G H I Diagrams 1503C A6 ETHERNET OPTION 06 TN ojoje Oye or ye Qo R1036 R1037 R2020 R2023 R2024 R2025 R2026 R202 R2030 R2031 R2033 R2034 KjUR20 30 H K1020 1030 01051 amp 9 8
204. e Check from this point leave the EMI shield off If you are now finished proceed to step 5 below 5 Replace the EMI shield Be sure to dress the ribbon cable properly in the cutout provided in order to prevent it from being smashed when securing the shield Output Impedance Check 6 56 Pulser Sampler Board Figure 6 90 Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument 1 Set the front panel controls CABLE see below IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB DIST DIV 1 ft div PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 POWER Off 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Figure 6 91 Location of C3010 TP3020 and TP3030 Pulser Sampler Board 2 If your instrument has a serial number of B035922 or lower use a small jumper wire to short across C3010 on the Pulser Sampler Board If your instrument has a serial number of B035923 or higher use a small jumper wire to short between TP3030 and TP3020 on the Pulser Sampler Board Turn POWER on Push MENU Scroll to Service Diagnostic Menu Push MENU a NA p Scroll to Impedance Diagnostic Exit Service Diagnostic Menu Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic Noise Diagnostic Impedance Diagnostic Offset G ain Diagnostic RAM ROM Diagnostic Timebase is Normal Auto Correction Move 4 Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 92 Main Menu 8 Push MENU 9 Follow the instructions on the display 10 Note the result
205. e delay detected by gate U2034C is used to clock U2027A which generates an interrupt request to inform the processor that a sample is being taken An acknowledge pulse CS16 from the address decoder resets this flip flop The logic driver trigger from the digital timebase is first amplified by transistor stage Q9021 The trigger is capacitively coupled through C8022 and R9027 to shift it to analog levels The collector of 09021 is clamped to 0 5 VDC between pulses by CR8020 and rises to 6 VDC peak during the 25 ns pulse This signal is applied to 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 1503C MTDR Service Manual 8021 through 8025 to generate an exponentially rising pulse of about 4 VDC peak during the pulse width Dual transistor Q8020 is a differential amplifier that is used as a voltage comparator to detect when the pulse on C8021 has reached the DC voltage level set through U4021B and R8023 by the zero distance calibration circuit This DC voltage level from zero to 4 VDC allows setting the time when the voltage comparator switches a range of about 20 ns Dual transistor Q9020 is connected as a current source providing a constant 2 mA bias to the emitters of Q8020 Between pulses this current flows through Q8020B When the exponential pulse reaches the adjustable voltage level the current is rapidly transferred to Q8020A causing a negative going pulse at R8020 This pulse is coupled to the output stage Q9010
206. e display during cold temperatures A temperature sensor attached to the display provides display temperature data to the heater and drive voltage circuitry see Front Panel text in this chapter An electroluminescent backlight provides illumination in low light conditions The LCD cell provided in the 1503C uses an advanced technology known as Superbirefringent Effect SBE to obtain greatly improved contrast and viewing angle over conventional LCD cells The function of the LCD module is to receive bit pattern data from the CPU and display it First the processor generates a 4k X 8 bit pattern image in its own memory It then writes this bit pattern via the data bus to the display memory U1040 in the form of a block transfer The bit pattern is mapped in the display memory and later on the LCD cell Second the LCD controller U2040 reads the bit pattern from the display RAM formats it and sends it to the column drivers Last the column drivers and the row drivers generate select and non select voltages based on the timing control and data signals received from the controller These voltages are applied to the LCD cell matrix turning off and on pixels that match the bit pattern in the display memory The pattern of pixels form the image on the display The cell is physically composed of two planes of glass two polarizers a matrix of transparent electrodes and a filling of liquid crystal material A plating of indium tin oxide o
207. e eight inputs to that device to be placed on the data bus for reading The processor system outputs six control signals to the Driver Sampler module These signals are loaded from the data bus into latch U3010 by a select signal from the address decoder These signals are used by the 1503C Driver Sampler and the Option 06 adapter if equipped The option port interface consists of the following m Supply Controller m Buffers m Output Latch 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Supply Control 1503C MTDR Service Manual The option port interface provides the connection between the processor system and external options This port has a unique protocol that must be followed for proper and safe operation Further information can be obtained by contacting your Tektronix customer service representative A block diagram of the option port interface is shown in Figure 5 5 The processor system provides all the data and control for the interface Data Address and Control lines are all buffered for increased drive The power to the option port is switchable to reduce power consumption if necessary The other outputs are available for control and protocol purposes POWER DATA ADDRESS BUFFERS CONTROL gt OUTPUT gt LATCH Figure 5 5 Option Port Interface Block Diagram The 16 VDC and 5 VDC power outputs to the optio
208. e rows and by the elastomers for the columns LP J GND N C 64 BIT SHIFT REGISTER LATCH 64 BIT LATCH FR 64 BIT LEVEL SHIFTER ROW 64 ROW 128 Figure 5 16 Row Driver Block Diagram 1503C MTDR Service Manual ROW 1 ROW 65 ST Vccd V5 V2 5 5 31 Circuit Descriptions The function of the row driver is to sequentially address each of the rows of the display The on or off state of the pixels on the addressed row is then determined by the voltages on the columns The row driver addresses each line one after another completing the scanning at the refresh rate of 125 Hz The column driver is similar to the row driver except bit pattern data is level shifted rather than the start pulse The column drivers provide select and non select voltages to the column electrodes according to the bit pattern data The presence of select or non select voltages on the columns in conjunction with the currently selected row pair determine which pixels are on or off on that row pair The column drivers regulate the select and non select voltages as the row drivers select rows The result is a bit pattern displayed on the screen that represents a waveform 123 Column X gt 1 no UJ 5 lt 23 lt r 2 D e o 5 Column X 64
209. e sample gate Normally these diodes are back biased to prevent CR3091 and CR3093 from being turned on by the large input signal expected Two strobes of opposite polarity have sufficient amplitude to overcome the back bias The two strobes turn on all the diodes in the bridge allowing current to flow from the input to storage capacitor C2090 Operational amplifiers U1090A and U1090B furnish the 2 VDC of back bias relative to the feedback from the second sampler to keep the bridge bias centered at the input level Amplifier U2080 is a positive feedback amplifier with C2080 providing the feedback capacitance The gain of this amplifier is set by R1080 and R2074 to raise the voltage across C2090 to increase sampling efficiency of the first sampler Compensation for diode bridge capacitance is via R2097 which feeds a small 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Second Sampler First Sample Gate Strobe Generator Second Sample Gate Strobe Generator Front Panel Introduction 1503C MTDR Service Manual amount of signal into the negative input of the preamp Op Amp U2070A is a buffer amplifier to drive the second sampler The sample of the signal from the preamp is gated through Q2060 to C1064 where itis stored until the next sample is taken The signal in C1064 is buffered by U2070B and is then used in three places First it sets the center of the first sampler bridge bias through R2082 Second it holds the first sample
210. efective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONI
211. em 2 1000 ft Cable at 10 ns 128 avg 100 ft div 43 75 dB 4 14 System 2 Previous Waveform Expanded 128 avg 20 ft div 54 75 dB 4 14 System 2 Next Group of Taps 128 avg 20 ft div 54 75 dB 4 14 System 2 Group of Taps Expanded 128 avg 10 ft div 54 75 dB 4 15 System 2 Another Group of Taps 128 avg 10 ft div 54 75 dB 4 15 System 2 End of Cable 128 avg 20 ft div 61 25 dB 4 15 Typical Frequency Response Curve with Ethernet Option 06 4 16 System Block Diagram 5 2 Waveform Accumulation Diagram 5 3 Power Supply Block Diagram 5 4 Processor Block Diagram 5 8 Option Port Interface Block Diagram 5 11 Video Processor Block Diagram 5 13 Video Processor 5 15 Timebase Block Diagram 5 16 Control ic acct una w yawa wawas ERR 5 17 Combined Effects of Time Delay 5 18 Calibration of Delay Zero and 50 ns Analog Delay 5 19 Pulse Generator Sampler Block Diagram 5 23 Front Panel Block 5 26 Display Module Block Diagram 5 29 SBE Cell vada RR
212. epair or performance check Calibration Performance Check Equipment Required Getting Ready Metric Instruments 1503C MTDR Service Manual The purpose of this procedure is to assure that the instrument is in good working condition and should be performed on an instrument that has been serviced or repaired as well as at regular intervals This procedure is not intended to familiarize you with the instrument If you are not experienced with this instrument you should read the Operation chapter of this manual before going on with these checks If the instrument fails any of these tests it should be calibrated or otherwise serviced Many failure modes affect only some functions of the instrument Equipment Performance Required Tek Part Number 50 Q precision terminator 1 011 0123 00 10 ft measured cable 93 Vp 84 012 1351 00 Disconnect any cables from the front panel CABLE connector Connect the instrument to a suitable power source a fully charged optional battery or AC line source If you are using AC power make sure the fuse and power selector switch on the rear panel are correct for the voltage you are using 115 VAC requires a different fuse than 230 VAC Option 05 metric instruments default to m div instead of ft div You can change this in the Setup menu or you may use the metric numbers provided To change the readings to ft div press the MENU button Scroll down to Distance Div is m div 6 1 Cal
213. eplaceable Mechanical Parts Figure 10 4 1503C Power Supply 1503C MTDR Service Manual 10 19 Glossary Aberrations AC Accuracy Cable Cable Attenuation Cable Fault Capacitance Characteristic Impedance 1503C MTDR Service Manual Imperfections or variations from a desired signal TDRs a pulse of electrical energy is sent out over the cable As the pulse generating circuitry is turned on and off the pulse is often distorted slightly and no longer is a perfect step or sine shaped waveform Alternating current is a method of delivering electrical energy by periodically changing the direction of the flow of electrons in the circuit or cable Even electrical signals designed to deliver direct current DC usually fluctuate enough to have an AC component The difference between a measured generated or displayed value and the true value Electrical conductors that are usually insulated and often shielded Most cables are made of metal and are designed to deliver electrical energy from a source such as a radio transmitter across a distance to a load such as an antenna with minimal energy loss Most cables consist of two conductors one to deliver the electrical signal and another to act as a return path which keeps both ends of the circuit at nearly the same electrical potential In early electrical systems and modern systems that over long distances use the earth and or air as the retur
214. erived It is supplied via the 40 pin connector at 0 625 MHz DRAM display memory select is used with WR by the CPU to select and write to the display memory DRAM and RD are used to read The combinational logic associated with the selection of the display memory is such that the memory is set to the selected read mode at all times except when the CPU accesses it In that case it could be either selected read or selected write at the discretion of the CPU This combinational logic also controls the flow of data through the transceiver 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions D7 D0 Read Data from Internal Register Write Data to Internal Register Read and Write for Internal Register Timing RAM Read Data from Display Memory to CPU Read Data from Display Memory to Controller Figure 5 21 CPU and Display Memory Interface 1503C MTDR Service Manual Write Data to 5 39 Circuit Descriptions Electroluminescent Backlight AN Indium Tin Oxide Heater 5 40 In operation the controller is usually accessing the display memory and refreshing the screen with the bit pattern data At the rate of about 10 Hz the CPU intervenes in the refresh operation to update the bit pattern display memory This operation occurs as a block transfer of 4k X 8 from the CPU memory to the display memor
215. ers of components listed in the replaceable electrical parts list Abbreviations conform to ANSI standard Y1 1 Column 1 of electrical parts list A numbering method is used to identify assemblies subassemblies and parts An example of this numbering method and typical expansions is as follows A23A2R1234 A23 A2 R1234 4 i Assembly Subassembly Circuit Number Number Number Read resistor 1234 of subassembly 2 of assembly 23 Only circuit numbers appear on the schematics and circuit board illustrations Each schematic and illustration is marked with its assembly number Assembly numbers are also marked on the mechanical exploded view located in the replaceable mechanical parts list A component number is obtained by adding the assembly number prefix to the circuit number This parts list is arranged by assemblies in numerical sequence e g assembly A1 with its subassemblies and parts precedes A2 with its subassemblies and parts Chassis mounted parts have no assembly number prefix and are illustrated at the end of the replaceable mechanical parts list Replaceable Electrical Parts Tektronix Part No Serial Model No Name and Description Mfg Code Mfg Part Number Column 2 This column lists the part number used when ordering a replacement part from Tektronix Columns 3 and 4 Column 3 lists the serial number of the first instrument or the suffix number of the circuit board in which the part was use
216. es no measurable change in network statistics Even on heavily tapped cables the 2 ns pulse can usually be used for distances to 700 feet The 10 ns pulse should be suitable for those longer segments that still fall within the 802 3 specifications under 500 meters Single Sweep with Carrier is Off On CAUTION This can interrupt prior traffic and cause late collisions It can also disrupt devices or applications that require periodic network traffic When this test is selected the 1503C will assert a 1 05 VDC signal on the net long enough to take a single waveform at the NOISE FILTER level selected This is the equivalent to the average voltage level of a normal transmission and should cause the transceivers to assert Carrier Detect This has the effect of causing most devices on the net to defer transmission until the 1503C is finished This takes from about one to 20 seconds depending on noise averaging and reduces the traffic displayed on the waveform Options and Accessories ZN Descriptions of Tests in the Setup Menu Acquisition Control Menu 4 8 NOTE Movement of any control that would change or move the waveform will start anew sweep and assert the 1 05 VDC For example if you use the vertical position control continuously for 20 seconds you would be asserting the false traffic for that duration and you are likely to disrupt the network Carrier Test is Off On CAUTION This carrier signal will s
217. es that are the same distance apart or of the same magnitude on the display It is possible to save a feature e g a connector or tap at one distance down the cable and compare it to a similar feature at a different distance by moving the 3 POSITION and POSITION controls m When this is done great care should be taken to make sure the vertical and horizontal scales are identical for the two waveforms being compared If either the stored or current waveform is clipped at the top or bottom of the display the difference waveform will be affected HORZ SET REF A mode allows you to offset the distance reading For example a lead in cable to a switching network is three feet long and you desire to start the measurement after the end of the lead in cable HORZ SET REF makes it simple End of 3 ft cable 5 de ENS Figure 1 22 Waveform of Three Foot Lead in Cable 1 Turn the NOISE FILTER controlto HORZSET REF The noise readout on the LCD will show set A 2 Turn the POSITION control to set the cursor where you want to start the distance reading This will be the new zero reference point For a three foot lead in cable the cursor should be set at 3 00 ft 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions 1503C MTDR Service Manual 1 move cursor to reference and Press STORE Figure 1 23 Cursor Moved to End of Three Foot Lead in Cable 3
218. events battery discharge through the charger when AC line voltage is not present Rectifier CR2012 allows the battery to power the instrument when AC power is not present Pre regulator or battery voltage is applied to Q2011 and Q2012 when the instrument power switch is pulled on The rising voltage causes Q2011 and Q2012 to turn on due to the momentary low gate voltage while C2011 is charging During this time voltage comparator U1020A compares the switched voltage to a 42 5 VDC reference from U1022 If the voltage is greater than 9 7 VDC U1020A turns on drawing current through Q2010 and R2015 to keep the gates of Q2011 and Q2012 near ground and the transistors turned on If the voltage is less than 49 7 VDC or drops to that value later U1020A and Q2010 turn off allowing C2011 to charge to the input voltage and turn off Q2011 and Q2012 When turned off the deep discharge protection circuit limits current drawn from the battery to only a few microamperes The post regulator receives from 49 7 to 15 5 VDC and boosts it to 16 2 VDC by switching Q2022 on and off with a pulse width modulated signal When Q2022 is turned on input voltage is applied across choke L2020 causing the current in L2020 to increase When Q2022 is turned off the stored energy in L2020 will cause 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions DC to DC Converter Processor System Introduction 1503C MTDR Service Manual the current to continue flowing t
219. f the Display 6 11 Calibration Noise Check 6 12 NOTE If the instrument fails this check refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter and the Troubleshooting section of the Maintenance chapter of this manual If the instrument fails this check it might still be usable for measurements of large faults that do not require a lot of gain A great deal of noise reduction is available with the NOISE FILTER control 1 Set the front panel controls CABLE 50 Q terminator IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB DIST DIV 50 ft div PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 2 Turnthe P POSITION control until the distance window reads between 200 00 and 250 00 ft m www Figure 6 19 Distance Moved Trailing Edgeo of Pulse 3 Change DIST DIV to 1 ft div 4 Using the VERT SCALE control set the gain to 57 dB 5 Use the SPOSITION control to keep the waveform centered on the display 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 1503C MTDR Service Manual NE ULM ee sss Figure 6 20 Noise with Gain at 57 d Press MENU Using the SPOSITION control scroll to Diagnostics Menu Press MENU again NS Using the same procedure select Service Diagnostic Menu then Noise Diagnostic 10 Read the results on the display Noise Diagnostic Continuous Result Update Acceptable Range Result 0 11 Pixels 4 vertical scale at57 dB 2 ns Pulse width and cursor at location to sample Push MENU
220. f the speed of light in free space It is sometimes expressed as a whole number e g 66 or a percentage e g 66 On the 1503C it is the percentage expressed as a decimal number e g 66 66 If you do not know the velocity of propagation you can get a general idea from the following table or use the Help with Cables section of the Cable Information menu You can also find the Vp with the procedure that follows using a cable sample NOTE If you do not know the Vp of your cable it will not prevent you from finding a fault in your cable However if the Vp is set wrong the distance readings will be affected All Vp settings should be set for the cable under test not the supplied jumper cable Dielectric Probable Vp Jelly Filled 64 Polyethylene PIC PE or SPE 66 PTFE Teflon amp or TFE 70 Pulp Insulation 72 Foam Cellular 78 Semi solid SSPE 84 Air helical spacers 98 1 11 Operating Instructions Impedance of Various Cable Types Finding an Unknown Vp 1 12 50 Q 750 930 125 Q RG 4 RG 6 U RG 7 U RG 23 U RG 8 U RG 11 U RG 22 U RG 63 U RG 9 U RG 12 U RG 62 U RG 79 U RG 58 U RG 13 U RG 71 U RG 89 U RG 62 U RG 59 U RG 111 U Flat Lead RG 81 RG 124 U Twisted Pair Twisted Pair RG 93 RG 140 U RG 142B U RG 179 U RG 225 U 75 Q Video RG 303B U RG 316 U RG 393 U Vertebrae Helix 1 Obtain a known length of
221. fety Class Overvoltage Category Pollution Degree Installation Overvoltage Category Meets the intent of Directive 89 336 EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility when it is used with the product s stated in the specifications table Refer to the EMC specification published for the stated products May not meet the intent of the directive if used with other products Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A Limits UL1244 Standard for electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 231 CSA safety requirements for electrical and electronic measuring and test equipment Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC EN 61010 1 A2 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use IEC61010 1 A2 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Testand measuring Class 1 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Annex H grounded product Overvoltage Category Il as defined IEC 61010 1 Annex J Pollution Degree 3 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Terminals on this product may have different installation overvoltage category designations The installation categories are III Distribution level mains usually permanently connected Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial location CAT II Local level mains wall sockets Equipment at this level include
222. ff then on again This will reset it for the next check NOTE If the instrument fails any of the last three checks refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter and the Troubleshooting section of the Maintenance chapter of this manual 6 15 Calibration Pulse Balance Check 6 16 If the instrument fails this check the pulse balance might be too small to be useful at some ranges It might also be a clue to problems in the pulser sampler board 1 6 7 8 9 Set the front panel controls CABLE no connection IMPEDANCE 50 Q VERT SCALE 5 00 dB DIST DIV 10 ft div PULSE WIDTH 1000 ns Vp 99 Using the lt gt POSITION control adjust the distance window to read 2 00 ft Increase DIST DIV to 100 ft div Center the pulse on the display Verify that the pulse is between 4 5 and 6 5 divisions high Press STORE Press VIEW STORE Change IMPEDANCE to 75 Q Verify that no more than 0 5 dB gain is needed to equalize the current waveform and the stored waveform NOTE Use the SPOSI TION control to move the current waveform slightly for easier comparison 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 10 Change IMPEDANCE to 93 11 Verify that no more than 0 5 dB gain is needed to equalize the current waveform and the stored waveform 12 Change IMPEDANCE to 125 9 13 Verify that no more than 0 5 dB gain is needed to equalize the current waveform and the stored waveform 14 P
223. fficient of a cable or power delivery system It is the ratio of the voltage reflected back from the cable or circuit due to cable faults or an impedance mismatch at the load divided by the voltage applied to the cable Millirho are thousandths of one rho Rho measurements are often used to judge how well the cable is matched to the load at the other end of the cable If there is an open circuit in the cable nearly all the energy will be reflected back when a pulse is sent down the cable The reflected voltage will equal the incident pulse voltage and rho will be 1 If there is a short circuit in the cable nearly all the energy will be delivered back to the instrument through the ground or return conductor instead of being sent to the load The polarity of the reflected pulse will be the opposite of the incident pulse and rho will be 1 If there is no mismatch between the cable and the load almost no energy will be reflected back and rho will be 0 In general a load or fault with higher impedance than the cable will return a rho measurement of 0 to 1 and a load or fault with a lower impedance will return a rho measurement of 0 to 1 The scale for rho measurements is determined by the height of the incident pulse A pulse two divisions high means that each division is 0 5 rho 500 millirho A pulse set to be four divisions high would make each division 0 25 rho 250 millirho Any unwanted electrical energy that interferes with a signal or mea
224. gnal is Off On will also turn off the carrier output signal because only one voltage can be sent out Only the function of the entries unique to Option 06 will be explained For the others refer to the Operating Instructions chapter of this manual 1503 MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories 1503C MTDR Service Manual 50 Q DC Termination is Off On CAUTION This must be on for use on a working network or reflections will cause collisions on the network This entry is a duplicate of the entry in the Ethernet Menu Its function is to allow direct control of the low frequency termination inside the 1503C With the 50 2 DC termination is On the 1503C will functions normally to test the cable This is usually the only test needed to check a network cable Carrier 1 05 Output Signal is Off On CAUTION The carrier signal will stop most traffic on the network This might abort many application programs and might cause communications problems When this test is on the 1503C will assert 1 05 VDC level on a 50 Q load 2 1 VDC open circuit This signal is intended to be equivalent to the average of a standard Ethernet transmission and should trigger the carrier detect circuit on all the transceivers Because most applications will defer transmission when this signal is present it can be used to test transceivers and systems or to reduce traffic for 1503C testing Collision 1 7V Output Signal is Off On
225. gs and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Do not apply a potential to any terminal including the common terminal that exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal Replace Batteries Properly Replace batteries only with the proper type and rating specified Recharge Batteries Properly Recharge batteries for the recommended charge cycle only Use Proper AC Adapter Use only the AC adapter specified for this product Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present xiii General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms A A Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately acce
226. he LCD cell and turn on the heater power 16 VDC when the temperature falls below 5 C With a supply voltage of 16 VDC the heater dissipates about 4W The circuitry to control the temperature is located on the Front Panel Board The thermistor leads are attached to pads on the Row Driver Controller Board similar to the heater and routed through the 40 pin connector 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Option 06 Ethernet Introduction Option 06 consists of the following Load and Diplexer Output Amplifier Relay and Driver Over voltage Sensing Control Switches Option 06 extends the frequency range of the standard instrument 50 Q termination down to DC This is accomplished via a diplexed load Two additional DC voltages are allowed to the output by connecting the load to a voltage source Additionally the circuit disconnects the DC load if external voltages are applied above a certain limit A block diagram of Option 06 is shown in Figure 5 22 Control y ontro 2 Switches From Main x gt Output Board Amp Relay Driver Relay Diplex gt Load Inductor r xxx front panel CABLE connector Over voltage Sensing Circuit Figure 5 22 Option 06 Ethernet Block Diagram Ethernet is a registered trademark of the Xerox Corporation Control Lines The control lines from the Main Board set the normal operation of the instrument
227. he display memory The controller then reads the bit pattern out of the display memory formats it and sends it to the column drivers 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Controller Row Driver Interface Column Driver Interface 1503C MTDR Service Manual The controller located on the Row Driver Controller Board generates control and timing signals for the row and column drivers and formats bit pattern data stored in the display memory which is then sent to the column drivers The function of the controller is to read bit pattern data from the display memory and format it This data is then sent along with control and timing signals to the column and row drivers which drive the LCD to provide the pattern on the display The row driver requires a start pulse at the beginning of each frame 64 latch pulses following that to scan the start pulse down the rows and a framing signal to generate the AC select voltage These signals are generated by the controller as shown in the row driver timing diagram Figure 5 18 The controller running at a clock rate of 0 625 MHz generates ST LP and FR with the following periods ST 8 ms LP 125 us FR 16 ms NOTE The manufacturer s nomenclature on the controller differs somewhat ST FRP LP LIP and FR FRMB Thee column drivers require more control and timing signals than the row driver These include Em XSCL D3 DO LP and
228. he height of the pulse to four major divisions To Figure 2 10 Pulse Adjusted to Four Major Divisions in Height 8 Press STORE 9 Turn the NOISE FILTER control back to 1 avg Operator Performance Checks 2 8 10 Place the baseline of the waveform on the center graticule using the SPOSITION control 11 Increase VERT SCALE to 25 00 dB 12 Using the POSITION control verify that the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 10 feet 3 05 m 10 00ft 13 Return the cursor to 2 00 ft 0 61 m 14 Turn NOISE FILTER back to VERT SET REF 15 Set the DIST DIV to 2 ft div 0 5 m div 16 Turn PULSE WIDTH to 10 ns 17 Adjust the pulse height to four major divisions 18 Press STORE 19 Return the NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operator Performance Checks 1503C MTDR Service Manual 20 Place the baseline of the waveform on the center graticule using the SPOSITION control 21 Increase VERT SCALE to 30 00 dB 22 Using the POSITION control verify that the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 30 feet 9 15 m 30 00 ft Figure 2 13 Aberrations Less Than Four Divisions Out to 30 00 ft 23 Return the cursor to 2 00 ft 0 61 m 24 Turn NOISE FILTER back to VERT SET REF 25 Set the DIST DIV to 50 ft div 10 m div 26 Turn PULSE WIDTH to 100 ns 27 Adjust the pul
229. he pulse widths and allowable tolerances are listed in the table below PULSE DIST DIV MINIMUM A ft MAXIMUM A ft 2 ns 1 0 500 1 460 10 5 1 4 390 5 320 100 ns 10 43 900 53 220 1000 ns 100 439 000 537 000 11 Repeat the above procedures for each pulse width NOTE If the instrument fails any portion of this check refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter for help in troubleshooting the pulser sampler board 12 Turn the instrument off then on again This will reset it for the next check 6 19 Calibration Auto Pulse Select Check If the auto pulse circuit is not working the pulse width will have to be manually selected 1 Setthe front panel controls CABLE 50 Q terminator IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB DIST DIV 1 ft div PULSE WIDTH Auto Vp 99 NOTE The instrument should not be HORZ SET REF mode 2 Setthe distance window first to 2 00 ft to make sure the pulse 15 on screen then to 0 00 ft The distance window directly affects which pulse that Auto Pulse selects NW Slowly turn DIST DIV observe the pulse width reading the display as well as the actual pulse The readings should increase and the pulse width should widen Readings should match the table below DIST DIV PULSE WIDTH DIST DIV PULSE WIDTH 1 ft 25 100 ft 100 ns 2 ft 2 ns 200 ft 100 ns 5 ft 2 ns 500 ft 1000 ns 10 ft 2 n
230. he video processor system consists of the following Vertical Position DAC Summing Amplifier Video Amplifier Video DAC The video processor receives sampled video from the pulser sampler and outputs a digitized video signal to the processor system data bus A block diagram of the video processor is shown in Figure 5 6 INTERRUPT REQUEST DATA VIDEO BUS ADC Sampled Video from Pulser Sampler CONTROL VERTICAL SOMBA DATA SUMMER VIDEO POSITION VIDEO CONTROL DAG t AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER DATA A CONTROL Figure 5 6 Video Processor Block Diagram Vertical position information is loaded by the processor system into a DAC to generate a DC signal Sampled video is combined with this vertical position DC voltage in a summing amplifier in order to allow vertical positioning of the displayed waveform Circuit Descriptions 5 14 Vertical Position DAC Summing Amplifier Video Amplifier The combined video and position signal is amplified by the user selected gain in the video amplifier Gain of the amplifier is set by the processor system via the data bus and video amplifier select signal The amplified video is digitized by the video ADC upon receipt of a control signal from the processor system The processor is notified by the ADC interrupt request when the conversion has been completed The processor then reads the value via the data bus The vertical
231. hrough CR2021 to filter capacitor C2025 Due to its stored energy the voltage developed across L2020 adds to the input voltage allowing C2025 to be charged to a voltage greater than the input The switching of 02022 is controlled by pulse width modulator U1023 post regulator output voltage is fed back to U1023 through 1025 R1024 and compared to the 2 5 VDC reference from U1022 Low output voltage causes wider pulses to be supplied to Q2022 storing more energy in L2020 during each pulse This results in a higher output voltage High output voltage however reduces pulse width and reverses the preceding process U1023 oscillates at approximately 80 kHz and supplies a synchronizing signal to the pre regulator at that frequency when the instrument is operating on AC power This raises the pre regulator frequency to the same 80 kHz This synchronization eliminates beat frequency interference between the two regulators The synchronizing signal from U1023 is also supplied to Q2021 where it is amplified to CMOS levels and buffered by gate U2030A The signal is then used to clock flip flop U1024B to produce a 40 kHz square wave output at Q and Q These square waves are buffered by other U2030 inverters and used to drive DC to DC transistors Q2030 and Q2031 Transistors Q2030 and Q2031 apply push pull power to the primary of T1030 at 40 kHz by switching the 16 2 VDC alternately between the primary windings The resulting transformer
232. ibration and press MENU again That menu line will change to Distance Div is ft div Exit by pressing MENU until the instrument returns to normal operation If the instrument power is turned off this procedure must be repeated when the instrument is again powered up The metric default can be changed to standard default See the Maintenance chapter of this manual for details Display Module Check Liquid Crystal Display Pull the POWER switch on the front panel If a message does not appear on the display within a few seconds turn the instrument off If start up assistance needed Push MENU button 1503C ROM version x xx Ethernet Copyright 1987 1988 Tektronix Redmond OR Figure 6 1 Typical Start Up Display if the power is left on more than a minute or so CAUTION There are some failure modes that could permanently damage the LCD 2 Observe that the LCD characters and waveform are legible If the LCD is too dark or smeared or if the display has patches of low contrast refer to the Adjustments section of this chapter NW ee n Figure 6 2 Waveform on the Displa 6 2 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration NOTE If the LCD does not appear to be working properly refer to the Troubleshooting section the Maintenance chapter as well as the Circuit Description chapter of this manual EL Backlight EL backlight should come on with power up The LCD will have a light
233. ically The carrying handle rotates 325 and serves as a stand when positioned beneath the instrument The 1503C can be stored in temperatures ranging from 62 C to 85 C if a battery is not installed If a battery is installed and the storage temperature is below 35 C or above 65 C the battery pack should be removed and stored separately see 1503C Service Manual for instructions on removing the battery Battery storage temperature should be between 35 C to 65 C In the field the 1503C can be powered using the internal battery For AC operation check the rear panel for proper voltage setting The voltage selector can be seen through the window of the protective cap If the setting differs from the voltage available it can be easily changed Simply remove the protective cap and select the proper voltage using a screwdriver REMOVE O REMOVE SELECT REPLACE aa Voltage Selector H B Line Fuse Z _ AC Power C Cord Receptacle Figure 1 1 Rear Panel Voltage Selector Fuse AC Receptacle The 1503C is intended to be operated from a power source that will not apply more than 250 V RMS between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor Operating Instructions Care of the Battery Pack A Battery Charging 1 2 and ground A protective ground connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operatio
234. ics Timebase is Normal Auto Correction Move SPosition to select then push MENU button Figure 6 23 Service Diagnostic Menu 2 There are five screens of data presented in this diagnostic The Pass Fail level is 396 for worst case 6 14 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration RAM ROM Check 1503C MTDR Service Manual NOTE The 48 dB step might fail intermittently If a more accurate reading is desired TP9041 on the Main Board or TP1060 on the Pulser Sampler Board must be grounded during the check See the Maintenance chapter for the case and EMI shield removal instructions 3 Press MENU once to return to the Service Diagnostic Menu Do not exit from the Service Diagnostic Menu because you will use it in the next check If the instrument fails this check various functions might be affected Without the RAM ROM functions operating correctly it is doubtful you would have gotten this far This check will give you assurance that the RAM ROM circuits are operating properly 1 Inthe Service Diagnostic Menu select the RAM ROM Diagnostics Exit Service Diagnostic Menu Sampling Efficiency Diagnostic Noise Diagnostic Impedance Diagnostic Offset G ain Diagnostic RAM ROM Diagnostics Timebase is Normal Auto Correction Move SPosition to select then push MENU button Figure 6 24 Service Diagnostic Menu 2 Press MENU The diagnostic is automatic and will display the result on the LCD 3 Turn the instrument o
235. ii Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Figure 6 69 Figure 6 70 Figure 6 71 Gain Increased to 30 00 dB Jitter Apparent Using Max Hold Cursor at 2 00 ft Pulse Height at Four Divisions at 1 ft div Gain Increased to 25 00 dB Pulse Height at Four Divisions at 2 ft div Gain Increased to 30 00 dB Pulse Height at Four Divisions at 50 ft div Gain Increased to 30 00 dB Pulse Height at Four Divisions at 500 ft div Gain Increased to 30 00 dB Oscilloscope Waveform 1503C Waveform of 1000 ns Pulse 1503C Waveform of 100 ns Pulse 1503C Waveform of 2 ns Pulse Head Alignment Chart Print Equipment Setup Main Menu Ethernet Menu Ethernet Menu Ethernet Menu Ethernet Menu Ethernet Menu Circuit Board Locations in the Instrument Power Supply Board Power Supply Test Points TP1020 and TP1010 Power Supply Test Point TP2030 Connector Plug P5040 and Pins 75040 on Bottom of Main Board Power Supply Test Point TP1020 Power Supply Test
236. in board with scope board with scope Good Good Bad j Y Check ramp trigger Bad TP 3041 on main Pd board with scope Check analog oriy Check on main board on Z Good Check video amp ler on oard 1503C MTDR Service Manual Check pulser on front end board 7 15 Maintenance Leading edge not at ero wrong length No Check chart recorder or other extra or with discontinuities function modules Yes Y Check for lt 5 volts TP4020 and TP 4021 on main board Yes No Run Calibration Check digital delay Perf Check erformance Check Check analog delay on main board on main board 7 16 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance ard TP3041 Main Bo n Board TP3040 Main Board TP6010 Figure 7 12 Main Board TP4040 Main Board TP9011 Figure 7 13 Main Board 7010 waveforms continued next page 7 17 1503 MTDR Service Manual Maintenance aL Figure 7 14 Main Board TP9041 Front Panel CABLE Connector When All Else Fails If it becomes necessary to ship the instrument to an authorized Tektronix Service Center follow the packing instructions as described in Repacking for Shipment on page xvi Control Panel Installation Watertight Seals prevent moisture and dirt from getting into the 1503C special sea
237. ion 06 60 Board 1503 M ESOT 1503C with Option 06 40 gt a 30 nj II rimi EEBIN ET ITI EH 10 10 10 10 10 109 107 10 Frequency Figure 4 21 Typical Frequency Response Curve with Ethernet Option 06 4 16 1503 MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories Option 07 YT 1S Chart Recorder Option 07 instruments come equipped with a splashproof chart printer Refer to the YT 1 15 Chart Recorder Instruction Manual that comes with this option for instructions on operation paper replacement and maintenance Option 08 Token Ring Adapter Option 08 instruments come with an adapter that allows you to connect the 1503C to networks containing ECL connectors The adapter isolates the receive pair from the transmit pair at the ECL connector and allows you to select one or the other to be routed to the input BNC connector on the 1503C Option 09 Universal Service Ordering Code Option 09 instruments come with adapter that allows you to connect the 1503 to LANs using type RJ 45 connectors using the Universal Service Ordering Code The adapter allows selection of each of the four twisted pairs CAUTION The RJ 45 USOC adapter Option 09 is the same connector used for many telephone installations Active telephone wires will have 40 to 60 VDC on one pair and this will destroy the 1502 series instrument Do not use Option 09 with 1502 1502B or 1
238. ion of the frequency of the electrical signal so it should be specified at a frequency As a practical matter the impedance of most cables changes very little over the range of frequencies they are designed for A point in a cable or system where the incident electrical energy is redistributed into absorbed reflected and or transmitted electrical energy The transmitted electrical energy after the mismatch is less than the incident electrical energy The pulse of electrical energy sent out by the TDR The waveform shown by the TDR consists of this pulse and the reflections of it coming back from the cable or circuit being tested see Reactance 1503C MTDR Service Manual Glossary Insulation Jitter LCD Millirho Noise 1503C MTDR Service Manual A protective coating on an electrical conductor that will not readily allow electrical energy to flow away from the conductive part of the cable or circuit Insulation is also called dielectric The kind of dielectric used in a cable determines how fast electricity can travel through the cable see Velocity of Propagation The short term error or uncertainty in the clock timebase of a TDR If the timing from sample to sample is not exact the waveform will appear to move back and forth rapidly An acronym for Liquid Crystal Display It is the kind of display used on this instrument so the terms display and LCD are often used interchangeably rho is the reflection coe
239. iption DIODE DVC DI RECT SI 1A 1500V DIODE DVC DI RECT SI 1A 1500V DIODE DVC DI SW S1 55V 200MA DIODE SIG ULTRA FAST 40V 150MA DIODE SIG ULTRA FAST 40V 150MA DIODE SIG ULTRA FAST 40V 150MA CONN HDR PCB MALE RTANG 2 X 10 0 1 CTR RELAY REED 1 FORM A 500VDC COIL 5VDC COIL RF VARIABLE 0 95 1 05 POT CORE XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NP 40V 200MA 250MHZ AMP XSTR SIG BIPOLAR XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP RES FXD FILM 2 00K OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD WW 50 OHM 0 5 5W AXIAL LEADS RES FXD FILM 442 OHM 1 0 125W RES VAR NONWW TRMR RES FXD CMPSN 33 OH 500 OHM 0 5W CERMET 596 1W RES FXD WW 120 OHM 5 3W AXIAL LEADS RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL RES FXD FIL 4 99K OH 20 0K OH 20 0K OH 41 5K OH 29 4K OH 10 0K OH 50K OHM 1 0 125W OHM 196 0 125W 196 0 125W 196 0 125W 196 0 125W 196 0 125W 196 0 125W 196 0 125W RES FXD CMPSN 180K 0HM 5 1W RES FXD CMPSN 180K OHM 5 1W RES FXD FILM 20 0K OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD FILM 4 5 MEG OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD FILM 115K OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD FILM 50K OHM 1 0 125W Mfr Code 04713 04713 03508 01295 01295 01295 80009 12617 54937 03508 01295 01295 07716 14193 19701 13138 01121 14193 19701 07716 07716 07716 07716 07716 Mfr Part Number MR1 1600 MR1 1600 DJ2011 1N4152R 1N4152R 1
240. is Off Collision Test is Off Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 52 Ethernet Menu 11 Exit the menus Returning to normal operation mode activates the menu selection 12 Set the DMM to measure Volts DC 13 Verify that the voltage measured is less than 0 2 VDC Carrier Offset Voltage heck mace 1 Re enter the Ethernet Menu 2 Scroll to Carrier Test is Off 3 Press MENU This will change that selection to Carrier Test is On Exit Ethernet Menu 50 Q DC termination is On Single Sweep with Carrier is Off Carrier Testis On Collision Test is Off Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 53 Ethernet Menu 4 Exit the menus Returning to normal operation mode activates the menu selection 5 Verify that the voltage measured is between 0 9 VDC and 1 2 VDC 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 33 Calibration Collision Offset Voltage Check 1 Re enter the Ethernet Menu 2 Scroll to Collision Test is Off 3 Press MENU This will change that selection to Collision Test is On Exit Ethernet Menu 50 Q DC termination is On Single Sweep with Carrier is Off Carrier Testis On Collision Testis Off Move amp Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 54 Ethernet Menu 4 Exit the menus Returning to normal operation mode activates the menu selection 5 Verify that the voltage measured is between 1 55 VDC and 1 85 VDC 6 Write your results
241. is current is conducted through CR4032 and L5030 to ground creating a voltage of 0 5 VDC on C5032 The positive one shot pulse from Q4040 turns off CR4032 and directs the charging current to C5032 The negative going pulse from L5030 is connected to C5032 through CR5030 to provide a cancelling effect for the positive pulse being coupled through the capacitance of CR4032 The linear rising voltage pulse from C5032 is buffered by source follower Q5031 and emitter follower Q5030 to provide a low output impedance and prevent loading the ramp Transistor Q7030 provides a constant 2 mA bias current to junction FET Q5031 The ramp voltage is AC coupled to voltage comparator Q7021 by C7030 to remove the DC offset voltage developed in the preceding circuits A small negative DC voltage of approximately 200 mV is added by voltage divider R7032 and R7025 to hold the voltage comparator off between pulses 5 21 Circuit Descriptions 5 22 Voltage comparator 07021 is biased at 2 mA by dual transistor 05020 During the linearly rising ramp voltage it compares the ramp to a programmed DC sample reference voltage produced by the timebase DAC circuit When the ramp reaches the sample reference value Q7021A rapidly turns on to produce a negative going signal across R7024 This pulse is coupled through C7022 and R7021 to turn on Q6020 providing a positive pulse to the base of Q7020 The negative going sampler strobe coming from Q7020 is supplied to the s
242. is subjected to intermittent or periodic conditions The 1503C will monitor the line and display any fluctuations on the LCD 1 Attach the cable to the 1503C front panel CABLE connector Push MENU to access the main menu 2 3 Scroll to Setup Menu and push MENU again 4 Scroll to Acquisition Control Menu and push MENU again 5 Scroll to Max Hold is Offand push MENU again This line will change to Max Hold is On The monitoring function is now ready to activate 6 Repeatedly push MENU until the instrument returns to normal operation Figure 1 27 Waveform Viewed in Normal Operation 1 25 Operating Instructions 1 26 Pulse 7 When you are ready to monitor this cable for intermittents push STORE 1503C will now capture any changes in the cable Captured changes 8 To exit monitor mode push STORE again 9 To exit Max Hold access the Acquisition Control Menu again turn off Max Hold and push MENU repeatedly until the instrument returns to normal operation This feature puts the 1503C in a listening mode by turning off the pulse generator 1 Attach a cable to the 1503C front panel CABLE connector Push MENU to access the Main Menu 2 3 Scroll to Setup Menu and push MENU again 4 Scroll to Acquisition Control Menu and push MENU again 5 Scroll to Pulse is On and push MENU again This will change to Pulse is Off 6 Repeatedly press MENU until the instrument retu
243. k rectifier CR2010 choke L1010 and capacitors C2010 and C2012 The resulting 16 6 VDC is fed back to the regulator U1010 by voltage divider R1016 and R1015 It is then compared to a 2 5 VDC reference voltage from U1011 To increase the output voltage U1010 increases the pulse width of the drive to 01010 and 01011 To reduce the output voltage 01010 decreases the pulse width to Q1010 and 1011 This assures that a constant 16 6 VDC is maintained Resistor R1010 acts as a current sensing shunt in the pre regulator return line In the event that a circuit fault draws excess current the voltage developed across R1010 and filtered by R1011 R1012 and C1011 will cause U1010 to reduce the pulse width of the pre regulator This protects the pre regulator from damage due to overload The battery charger consists of a linear regulator integrated circuit U2010 and associated components U2010 is connected as a current source drawing current from the 15 8 VDC and supplying it to the battery through T2012 The voltage drop across T2012 is fed back to U2010 through diode CR2014 to control charging current at anominal 150 mA Diode CR2013 and voltage divider R2010 and R2011 provide a voltage clamp to U2010 s feedback terminal to limit the maximum voltage that can be applied to the battery through CR2015 As the voltage R2012 and CR2015 approaches the clamp voltage battery charging current is gradually reduced to trickle charge Rectifier CR2015 pr
244. le voltage is formed This sampling technique allows extremely rapid repetitive waveforms to be viewed in detail Circuit Descriptions Front Panel Board Drivers LCD and temp compensation Digital Bus gt Main Board 280 Controls LCD Bias ZEN ROM Decoding Fro Cable A nt End Pulser Sampler Timebase Digital Y Analog Signal Processing Offset gt Gain Y Option Port Power Bus Power Supply A D converter Control AC to DC Converter Battery DC to DC Converter Figure 5 1 System Block Diagram 5 2 1503 MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 1503C MTDR Service Manual Referring to the waveforms in Figure 5 2 cable voltage waveforms are shown at the top Each pulse is the result of a test pulse from the pulse generator and all pulses are identical At time delays tp 1 tn 2 etc after the pulses begin a sample of the pulse amplitude is taken Each of these samples is digitized and stored in the processor until sufficient points are accumulated to define the entire period of interest The samples are then processed and displayed at a much slower rate forming the recombined waveform as shown This process allows the presentation of waveforms too rapidly to be
245. ll allow easy access for replacement of the Option Port connector 7 12 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Flow Chart Test Point Waveforms 1503C MTDR Service Manual When encountering difficulties with the instrument first use the troubleshooting chart in the Operation chapter This might eliminate any minor problems such as fuse or power problems The following troubleshooting flow charts next three pages are designed to give you an idea where to start The Circuit Descriptions and Schematics chapters will give further assistance toward solving the problem The Main Board waveforms represented on the flow chart are representative of an instrument in operation per the setup at the top of the flow chart Additional Main Board waveforms are also included in this section The following Main Board waveforms are similar to the waveforms found on the troubleshooting flow chart In some cases however the oscilloscope was set to show timing rather than the detail of the waveform For example TP7010 on the flow chart shows the detail of the pulse but the same test point in the following figures shows the repetition rate Set the 1503C front panel controls CABLE Attach 10 ft cable NOISE FILTER 1 avg 3rd position CW VERT SCALE default DIST DIV 1 ft div 4th position CW Vp 84 Vertical Position default Horizontal Position default Figure 7 10 Main Board TP1041 waveforms conti
246. ls are used around the LCD faceplate options port front panel and front panel button boot Removing the front panel button boot or other rubber seals will require special resealing procedures to retain the instrument weathertightness A list of sealants is provided on the next page to aid in reinstallation However we recommend that resealing be done only by an authorized Tektronix Service Center The front panel cover seal should be inspected regularly and replaced every six to eight months depending on the operating environment and use All other seals should be inspected during normal adjustment calibration periods paying special attention to the front panel case seal and option port seal CAUTION If the case option port or a front panel control is removed the weathertight integrity of the instrument will be compromised 7 18 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Sealing Materials Tek Part No Sealant Comments 006 2302 00 Dow Corning 3145 Adhesive Sealant Use to secure rubber boot around buttons implosion shield to front panel 252 0199 00 Dow Corning 3140 Coating Use to secure case gaskets to chassis more fluid sealant than 3145 with 24 hour cure time 006 2207 00 GE G 661 Silicon Grease Light coating on case gaskets to pre vent sticking and provide a good seal 006 0034 00 Isopropyl alcohol Cleaning agent If a rubber boot or gasket is replaced 1 2 3 4 n
247. lting 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Address Decoding and Memory Program Memory EPROM RAM Non Volatile RAM Space Display RAM Space Enable and Select Signal Space 1503C MTDR Service Manual negative pulse at the gate output is supplied to U1023 s reset input causing the microprocessor to start at the beginning of its programmed routine each time power is applied The 16 bit address space of Z80 processor U1023 is divided into five primary areas They are Program Memory EPROM space RAM space Non volatile RAM space Display RAM space Enable and Select Signal space The program memory is stored in 64 kilobyte kb EPROM U2020 which is divided into two 32 kb bank switched halves Both halves occupy locations OOOOH to 7FFFH in the processor s address space The most significant address bit on the EPROM which determines which bank is addressed is set by flip flop U2030A This bank switching flip flop can be toggled by the processor with two select lines decoded in the enable and select signal address space The select signal for the EPROM is generated by combined address line A15 with the MREQ signal in U1045A Whenever the processor addresses a location where A15 is not set the program memory will be selected to place data on the bus The first RAM is eight kilobyte memory U1021 selected by a signal generated by 1 of 8 decoder U1022 This decoder operates on the three most significant
248. n The AC power connector is a three way polarized plug with the ground earth lead connected to the instrument frame to provide electrical shock protection If the unit is connected to any other power source the unit frame must be connected to an earth ground See Safety and Installation section CAUTION If you change the voltage selector you must change the line fuse to the appropriate value as listed near the fuse holder and in the table below FUSE RATING VOLTAGE RATING 250 V NOMINAL RANGE 0 3 AT 115 VAC 90 132 VAC 0 15 230 VAC 180 250 CAUTION Read these instructions concerning the care of battery pack They contain instructions that reflect on your safety and the performance of the instrument The 1503C can be powered by a rechargeable lead gel battery pack that is accessible only by removing the case from the instrument When AC power is applied the battery pack is charged at a rate that is dependent on the battery charge state The battery pack will operate the 1503C for a minimum of eight continuous hours including making 30 chart recordings if the LCD backlight is turned off The battery pack will charge fully in 16 hours when the instrument is connected via the power cord to an AC power source with the instrument turned off The instrument may be turned on and operated while the batteries are charging but this will increase the charging time For longest battery life a
249. n path and the term ground or ground wire is often used to describe one of the wires in a cable pair The amount of signal that is absorbed in the cable as the signal propagates down it Cable attenuation is typically low at low frequencies and higher at high frequencies and should be corrected for in some TDR measurements Cable attenuation is usually expressed in decibels at one or several frequencies See also dB and Series Loss Any condition that makes the cable less efficient at delivering electrical energy than it was designed to be Water leaking through the insulation poorly mated connectors and bad splices are typical types cable faults see Reactance Cables are designed to match the source and load for the electrical energy that they carry The designed impedance is often called the characteristic impedance of the cable The arrangement of the conductors with respect to each other is the major factor in designing the impedance of cables Glossary 1 Glossary Conductor dB DC Dielectric Domain Impedance Impedance Mismatch Glossary 2 Incident Pulse Inductance Any substance that will readily allow electricity to flow through it Good conductors are metals such as silver copper gold aluminum and zinc in that order dB is an abbreviation for decibel Decibels are a method of expressing power or voltage ratios The decibel scale is logarithmic It is often used to express the effi
250. n port are switched supplies controlled by the microprocessor system CS14 and CS15 are used to set and clear flip flop U1011B This feeds comparators U1012A and U1012B The positive input to the comparators 15 set at 2 5 volts so the CMOS flip flop will drive the negative terminals above and below that voltage level The comparators are powered with a 16 VDC and 12 VDC source to give a good output swing controlling the FET switches The output of U1012A controls the 16 VDC switch and is pulled up via a 20 resistor R2011 The output is also passed through two 100 kQ resistors 2012 and R2013 to prevent the FETs from being over driven Two parallel FETs Q2011 and Q2012 control the supply To reduce the instantaneous draw from the instrument supply when first turning the switch on capacitive feedback is used C2016 This feedback slows the turn on time allowing a capacitive load to be charged without affecting the instrument supply A stabilizing 100 Q resistor R2010 is also located in the feedback loop 5 11 Circuit Descriptions 5 12 Buffers Output Latch Option Port Wiring Configuration There are specified limits to this type of circuitry Load specifications must be followed The arrangement of the 5 VDC switch is similar except that a 10 kQ To 100 resistive divider is used to ensure the switch has a definite turn on A single FET Q1010 controls the 5 VDC outpu
251. n the LCD 5 POSITION This is a continuously rotating control that positions the displayed waveform vertically up or down the LCD lt P gt POSITION This is a continuously rotating control that moves a vertical cursor completely across the LCD graticule In addition the waveform is also moved when the cursor reaches the extreme right or left side of the display A readout seven digits maximum is displayed in the upper right corner of the LCD showing the distance from the front panel BNC to the current cursor location MENU This pushbutton provides access to the menus and selects items chosen from the menus VIEW INPUT When pushed momentarily this button toggles the display of the waveform acquired at the CABLE connector This function is useful to stop displaying a current waveform to avoid confusion when looking at a stored waveform This function defaults to ON when the instrument is powered up VIEW STORE When pushed momentarily this button toggles the display of the stored waveform VIEW DIFF When pushed momentarily this button toggles the display of the current waveform minus the stored waveform and shows the difference between them STORE When pushed momentarily the waveform currently displayed will be stored in the instrument memory If a waveform is already stored pushing this button will erase it The settings of the stored waveform are available from the first level menu under View Stored Waveform Settings 1
252. n the back plane of glass is used as a heater but is not used in the display process Electrically the cell is a 128 X 256 pixel display each pixel being an intersection of a row and a column These intersections are like small capacitors When a non select voltage about 1 5 VRMS is applied to a row and a column their intersection is turned off see Figure 5 15 next page That is light is allowed to pass through the display and reflect back from the transflector creating an off pixel A select voltage about 1 7 VRMS turns the intersection on That is the light is not allowed to pass through the crystalline material and is therefore not reflected back from the transflector creating an pixel 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 2 2 99 88 N o N o iom COLUMN 1 NE COLUMN 2 m COLUMN 255 m m m m COLUMN 256 Y LOWER HALF UPPER HALF SCREEN SCREEN Figure 5 15 SBE Cell Row and Column Drivers There is one row driver located on the Row Driver Controller Board There are eight column drivers located on the Column Driver Board The row and column drivers receive control timing and data signals from the controller and translate them to properly timed voltages that are placed on the pixel matrix The voltages are placed on the matrix by the flex cable for th
253. n to be equal to the attenuation factor of the voltage divider point selected The second stage consists of amplifier U5040 voltage divider R6040 through R6047 and analog multiplexer U6040 This stage operates similar to the first stage except eight voltage gains are provided from 0 to 14 dB in 2 dB steps The third stage consists of amplifier U3042 voltage divider T4040 through R4047 and analog multiplexer U4040 This stage operates similar to the first and second stages except eight voltage gains are provided from 0 to 1 75 dB in 0 25 dB steps The gain of each of the three amplifier stages is controlled by the processor system by loading latch U2044 with the appropriate 8 bit word from the data bus Digital 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Video Analog to Digital Converter Timebase Introduction 1503C MTDR Service Manual word 00 all Os selects 0 dB gain and word FF all 1s selects 63 75 dB gain All intervening values of 0 25 dB multiples are similarly chosen The output of the video amplifier is filtered by R2040 and C2043 for noise reduction then sent to the analog to digital converter The output may be observed at TP4040 see Figure 5 7 3 200mV Figure 5 7 Video Processor Output The output of the video amplifier is converted to its digital equivalent value by ADC device U2041 The conversion is done using successive approximation technique to compare the video voltage to the 2 5
254. nd the implosion shield of the front panel has been cleaned on the inside Check that the knobs and buttons work properly The NOISE FILTER DIST DIV and both Vp knobs have detents all others should rotate smoothly Check that the knobs are tight no loose set screws Check that the set screw on the POWER switch shaft is tight Check the cables for proper connection polarity and tightness Make sure the cables on the front of the Main Board come down from the plug into the instrument instead of curving toward the outside All cables should have the exposed ends away from the metal chassis If any components were replaced by soldering check for solder balls excess flux and wire clippings Good soldering practices must be followed when repairing this instrument Power Supply Checks and Adjustments 6 38 Power Up Procedure Voltage Checks Set the front panel controls NOISE FILTER 1 avg DIST DIV 1 ft div Vp 99 Make sure the POWER switch is in the OFF position Connect the 115 VAC output of the Variac into the AC socket on the rear of the 1503C Pull the POWER switch to the ON position Observe that the power draw does not exceed 4 Watts on the Variac 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures 1503C MTDR Service Manual Figure 6 58 Power Supply Board Power Supply Board 3 Connect the positive voltmeter probe to TP1020 16 6 VDC it might be marked as 15 8 V on some older power supplies
255. nd wrench 7 16 open end wrench 1 2 open end wrench Phillips head screwdriver Straight blade screwdriver Torque driver Soldering and desoldering tools Cotton swabs non woven wipes Isopropyl alcohol LocTite etc Preventive Maintenance Cleaning ZN 1503C MTDR Service Manual Preventive maintenance includes cleaning visual inspection and lubrication A convenient time to perform preventive maintenance is during the periodic performance check calibration procedure If the instrument has been subjected to extreme environments or harsh handling more frequent maintenance might be necessary CAUTION Do not use chemical agents that contain benzene toluene xylene acetone etc because of possible damage to plastics in the instrument The exterior case and front panel should be washed gently with mild soap and water The faceplate in front of the LCD should be cleaned gently with Kendall Webril non woven wipes Tek P N 006 0164 00 or equivalent moistened with isopropyl alcohol 7 1 Maintenance Lubrication Visual Inspection Recalibration The interior of the 1503C is protected from dirt and dust as long as the option port and case are intact However if interior cleaning is necessary blow off accumulated dust with low pressure air and remove the remaining dirt with a soft brush cotton swab or pipe cleaner moistened with isopropyl alcohol All the switches and potentiometer
256. nformation Distance Cursor Resolution 1 25 of 1 major division Cursor Readout Range 2 ft to 250 000 ft 0 61 m to 15 230 m 5 digit readout Resolution 0 04 ft Accuracy Within 2 0 02 ft at 1 ftdiv Vp must be set within 0 596 of cable Horizontal Scale 1 ft div to 5000 ft div 0 25 m div to 1000 m div 12 values 1 2 5 sequence Range 0 to 50 000 ft 0 to 10 000 m Horizontal Position Any distance to full scale can be moved on screen Vp Range Resolution Accuracy 0 30 to 0 99 0 01 within 1 Propagation velocity relative to air Custom Option Port Tek chart recorder is designed to operate with the 1503C Produces a high resolution thermal dot matrix recording and waveform and control values Line Voltage 115 VAC 90 to 132 VAC 45 to 440 Hz Fused at 0 3 A 230 VAC 180 to 250 VAC 45 to 440 Hz Fused at 0 15 Battery Pack Operation 8 hours minimum 30 chart recordings maximum 15 C to 25 C charge and discharge temper Full Charge Time Overcharge P rotection Discharge Protection Charge Capacity Charge Indicator 20 hours maximum Charging discontinues once full charge is attained Operation terminates prior to battery damage 3 4 Amp hours typical will be indicated on LCD when capacity reaches approximately 10 ature LCD backlight off O peration of instru ment with backlight on or at temperatures below 10 C will degrade battery
257. ns 1000 ns Measured at half sine amplitude point with matching termination Accuracy 2ns x1ns 10ns 100 ns 1000 ns 1096 Pulse Amplitude Terminated 2 5 VDC 10 for 10 ns 100 ns 1000 ns 2ns 20 Unterminated 5 0 VDC 10 for 10 ns 100 ns 1000 ns Internal cable length prevents 2 ns pulse from reaching full unterminated voltage Pulse Shape 1 2 sine Pulse Output Impedance Selected 50 O 75 0 930 050 Accuracy 1 Pulse Repetition Time 350 us nominal Vertical Scale 0 dB to 63 75 dB gain 256 values at 0 25 dB increments Accuracy 3 Set Adjustment Setincident pulse within 3 Combined with vertical scale control Vertical Position Any waveform point moveable to center screen Displayed Noise With matching terminator at panel Beyond three test pulse widths after test pulse Random lt 1 0 division peak with 57 dB gain filter set to 1 lt 1 0 division peak with 63 dB gain filter set to 8 Aberrations x 30 dB for 10 ns 100 ns 1000 ns test Within three test pulse widths after test pulse pulse dB is relative to test pulse x 25 dB p p for 2 ns test pulse continued next page 1503C MTDR Service Manual 3 1 Specifications Characteristic Cable Connection Coupling Max Input Susceptibility Performance Requirement Capacitively coupled 400 V DC peak AC at maximum frequen Cy of 440 Hz No damage with application for up to 30 seconds might affect measurement capability Supplemental I
258. ns bus In an Ethernet system signals flow in all directions and the transceivers attached to the Ethernet receive all transmissions Ethernet cable is typically 50 Q with 50 Q terminators at each end to prevent signal reflections Reflections can interfere with transmissions sent out by the system ThinWire Cheapernet and Thin Ethernet are variations of Ethernet These are usually used as a branch of the main network with a limited number of stations They use a more flexible cable and are usually connected to each Media Access Unit MAU with a T connector instead of a tap Segments are the smaller sub networks in an Ethernet system Each segment can be up to 500 meters long and have up to 100 transceiver taps Each tap must have at least 2 5 meters of cable between itself and the next tap 4 1 Options and Accessories Main Main Frame Frame Main Frame Server Main Frame Printer Host Foreign Term Term s Host Host V E Network Main Frame Frame Micro Micro PC PC Computer PC Computer Figure 4 1 Typical Ethernet System Transceivers tra
259. nsmit data to and from the stations on the Ethernet bus The typical Ethernet data rate is 10 million bits per second At each tap is a transceiver MAU sending and receiving this data They also provide electrical isolation between the coaxial cable and the station as well as housing the electronics that detect carrier signals and recognize the collision of two signals 1503C MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories Test Procedures for a Working Network 1503C MTDR Service Manual are what the transceivers are attached to A bridge connects several network segments Depending on the hardware used e g fiber optics a network might extend up to 22 000 meters Repeaters are used to increase the effective length of a cable to allow more transceivers Due to distance limitations two transceivers can have a maximum of two repeaters between them Servers let a network share resources such as terminals disks printers etc The 1503C with Option 06 allows testing of an Ethernet bus while the network is active This is important because some installations might be interactive with other installations that are dependent on the Ethernet Physically Option 06 is a piggyback circuit board attached to the Sampler Pulser board in the 1503C A special EPROM replaces the standard EPROM on the main board allowing Option 06 to be transparent to the standard instrument but accessible through the Ethernet Menu and the Setup Acquisi
260. nual 5 33 Circuit Descriptions 5 34 Column Driver Supply Voltages include the following 5 VDC supply voltage for logic and select drive voltage Vo non select drive voltage Vs non select drive voltage Vicp select voltage GND return for 5 VDC To perform its function the row driver receives a start pulse at the beginning of a frame LP shifts this start pulse into the shift register The contents are then transferred to the latch The level shifter shifts the logical 1s and Os in the latch into select and non select voltages according to FR see table at top of next page FR Bit X in Latch Row X Output 0 0 Vs non select 0 1 5 VDC select 1 0 V non select 1 1 Vicp Select ST LP and FR are sent by the controller in such a way that a scanning select voltage is applied sequentially to the rows with the polarity of the select voltage alternating with FR every frame The alteration is required to place an AC voltage on the pixels A column driver is composed of several blocks 16 position 4 bit wide shift register 64 bit latch 64 bit level shifter and an enable flip flop A column driver has the following relevant inputs m 03 00 data MSB to data LSB gt Bit pattern data for data formatted and sent by the controller XSCL column X shift clock Shifts D3 D0 in parallel groups of four bits LP latch pulse Latches data in shift register into 64 bit latch FR frame signal Define
261. nued on page 7 17 7 13 Maintenance i 8 lt ukgnsxs Aepgsp peu onsoubeip Passed JO Uru 1LICYA fouled 34044 IO ON 5 Jed Sopnpa u uonmunj iSouGeia WOU enpeooig Hapy ane puy epo Ao 40 pue pued quay uns 5 npe Gnun JOPO 318 p peu Spe Jo sued Aedsp JI A peg das moned ed Addins semod peupeu Addins vodo ege SA ON ON eroneb o Q Alle LLiOLI f Jed Sh Spuodsai SA gt AZ 9Er NGA peg Addins peu suc HAM 3S ve MD uoniscd up AAY T NO uonisod pug 917154 3SION 009 SQD y OT UAV dIgvo S 04 U09 30014 19S 1503C MTDR Service Manual 7 14 Maintenance CONTINUE 2 Y Waveform off top or bottom of display or No Go to wrong height 3 Waveform flat line as Yes Y Good Check video 9041 Good Check signal on Bad Check pulse strobe Good on main board CABLE with scope 9011 on main with scope atall pulse widths board with scope Bad Bad Check sample strobe Check trigger TP7010 i main dad TP3040 on ra
262. o Cable Attached Waveform on the Display with 10 ft Cable Attached Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse at 5 ft div Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse at 1 ft div Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse with bru rcc ETT Flatline Display to 250 000 ft Waveform at Top of the Display Waveform at Bottom of the Display Waveform at Center of the Display Distance Moved Beyond Trailing Edge of Pulse Noise with Gain 57 dB Noise Diagnostic Display Service Diagnostic Menu Service Diagnostic Menu Service Diagnostic Menu Pulse Appx Five Divisions High Current Waveform Shifted from Stored Waveform Initial Pulse a nek heaved cone Rm ote Rees Pulse Adjusted to Six Divisions High Cursor Leading Edge at Center Graticule Cursor on Trailing Edge at Center Graticule Initial Pulse with Cursor at 0 00 ft Waveform on Auto Pulse Select Initial Pulse Centered on Horizontal Graticule 5 35 5 36 5 39 6 2 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 11 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 13 6 14 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 18 6 19 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 21 vii Table of Contents vi
263. of the LCD 2 Adjust the incident pulse to the desired height e g four divisions It might be necessary to adjust POSITION 2 Que ese return FILTER to desired Serting Bava i Figure 1 26 Incident Pulse at Four Divisions FILTER at Desired Setting 3 Push STORE 4 Return NOISE FILTER to the desired setting Notice that the dB scale is now set to 0 00 dB 5 To exit VERT SET REF use the following procedure Make sure the vertical scale is in dB mode access the Setup Menu if change is needed 1 24 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions b Turn NOISE FILTER to VERT SET REF Adjust SCALE to obtain 0 00 dB d Push STORE e Turn NOISE FILTER to desire filter setting Because dB is actually a ratio between the energy sent out and the energy reflected back using VERT SET REF does not affect the dB difference measured NOTE Do not use Auto Pulse Width when making measurements in VERT SET REF Auto Pulse Width changes the pulse width at 100 500 and 5000 feet If the pulse width changes while in VERT SET REF it could result in an erroneous reading Manually controlling the pulse width assures the pulse width remains the same for both the incident and reflective pulses Additional Features Menu Selected Max Hold 1503C MTDR Service Manual The 1503C will capture and store waveforms on an ongoing basis This is useful when the cable or wire
264. oltage sensing circuit This works by current flowing from L2010 through R2020 Depending on polarity this current flows through either CR2020 or CR2021 and charges either C2030 or C2031 as a peak hold circuit Because C2030 and C2031 on pins 2 and 3 if U1030A the voltage change will turn off the relay if it gets bigger than the normal 1 2 volt difference This happens at about 10 12 volts peak to peak on L2010 Zener diodes VR2020 and VR2021 clamp these voltages to prevent damage to U1030 L2010 is the diplexer low pass element It creates a corner at about 8 KHz with the 50 Q load R1011 to compliment the 0 44 capacitor and 50 Q impedance on the standard 1503C Pulser Sampler Board R1012 and trim pot R1013 allow compensation for the series resistance of L2010 Resistor R1010 2 k 2 and capacitor C1010 10 pF are a damping network to prevent ringing after the test pulses 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration Introduction This chapter is divided into the Calibration Performance Check and Additional Checks and Adjustment Procedures The Calibration Performance Check is a series of checks to compare the instrument parameters to the published specifications This procedure is similar to the Operator Performance Check Chapter 2 but additionally lists actions to take if the Calibration Performance Check is not met The Adjustment Procedures are a series of steps designed to bring the instrument up to standards after r
265. onductors have some reactance Reactance is made up of capacitance and inductance Capacitance is the ability of conductors separated by thin layers if insulation dielectric to store energy between them Inductance is the ability of a conductor to produce induced voltage when the electrical current through it varies All conductors have some capacitance and inductance so all conductors have some reactance which means they all have impedance An instrument that uses reflections to make measurements Our reflectometers use electrical energy that is reflected back from points along a cable A conductor s opposition to the flow of DC electrical energy through it All conductors have a certain amount of resistance Resistance is the low or zero frequency part of impedance For a given parameter the smallest increment or change in value that can be measured generated or displayed The amount of energy reflected or returned from a cable indicates how much the impedance in the system is mismatched The ratio of the energy sent out by the TDR divided by the energy reflected back expressed in the logarithmic dB scale is called return loss see Millirho The time it takes a pulse signal to go from 10 to 90 of the change in voltage An acronym for Root Mean Squared RMS is a way of measuring how much deviation there is from a known or desired waveform It is also the method used to calculate how much power is contained in an AC wavefo
266. oot coaxial cable 012 1351 00 Disconnect any cables from the front panel CABLE connector Connect the instrument to a suitable power source a fully charged optional battery pack or AC line source If you are using AC power make sure the fuse and power switch are correct for the voltage you are using 115 VAC requires a different fuse than 230 Pull the POWER switch on the front panel If a message does not appear on the display within asecondor two turn the instrument off There are some failure modes that could permanently damage orruin the LCD if the power is left on for more than a minute or so Refer to the Troubleshooting section of the Maintenance chapter in this manual Option 05 instruments default to metric however you can change the metric scale to ft div in the Setup Menu or use the metric numbers provided To change the readings press the MENU button Using the POSITION control scroll down to Setup Menu and press MENU again Scroll down to Distance Div is m div and press MENU again This will change to ft div Press the MENU button repeatedly to Operator Performance Checks Set Up 1 Horizontal Scale Timebase Check return to normal operation mode If the instrument power is turned off these checks must be repeated again when the instrument is powered on again Set the 1503C front panel controls IMPEDANCE 93 0 NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 10 00 dB DIST DIV 2 ft div 0 25 m Vp 84 PULSE W
267. operation specifica tion 1503C MTDR Service Manual Specifications Environmental Characteristics Characteristic Temperature Operating Non operating Performance Requirement 10 C to 55 C 62 C to 85 C Supplemental Information Battery capacity reduced at other than 15 C to 42590 With battery removed Storage temp with bat tery in is 20 C to 55 C Contents on non volatile memory stored waveform might be lost attemps below 40 C Humidity to 100 Altitude MIL T 28800C Class 3 Operating to 10 000 ft Non operating to 40 000 ft Vibration 5 to 15 Hz 0 06 inch p p 15 to 25 Hz 0 04 inch p p 25 to 55 Hz 0 013 inch p p MIL T 28800C Class 3 Shock Mechanical Pulse Bench Handling Operating Non operating 30 g 11 ms 1 2 sine wave total of 18 shocks 4 drops each face at 4 inches or 45 degrees with opposite edge as pivot 4 drops each face at 4 inches or 45 degrees with opposite edge as pivot Satisfactory opera tion after drops MIL T 28800C Class 3 MIL STD 810 Method 516 Procedure V Cabinet on front cover off Cabinet off front cover off Loose Cargo Bounce 1 inch double amplitude orbital path at5 Hz 6 faces MIL STD 810 Method 514 Procedure XI Part2 Water Resistance Operating Non operating S plash proof and drip proof Watertight with 3 feet of water above top of case MIL T 28800C Style A Front cover off
268. or 230 VAC replace the fuse with 0 15 fuse Tek P N 159 0054 00 4 Replace the fuse holder 5 Replace the access cover Remove the instrument front cover 2 If installed remove the chart recorder or other device from the option port 3 Loosen the four screws on the back of the case and set the instrument face up on a flat surface 4 Swing the handle out of the way of the front panel 5 Break the chassis seal by pushing downward with both hands on the handle pivots on each side of the case 6 Grasp the case with one hand and tilt the chassis out with the other Lift by grasping the outside perimeter of the front panel 7 Remove the screw in the middle of the bottom EMI shield Remove the top and bottom shields from the chassis by carefully running straight blade screwdriver between the shield and the groove in the chassis rail CAUTION Do not lift the instrument by the front panel controls The controls will be damaged if you do so 1 From the Power Supply Board remove the 14 conductor ribbon cable This is a keyed connector so polarity is guaranteed upon reinstallation Figure 7 2 callout 5 next page 2 Remove the screw and washer located below the power switch on the instrument side panel Figure 7 2 7 3 Remove the screw and washer holding the power supply module to the bottom chassis Figure 7 2 4 4 Remove two screws holding the power supply module to the rear chassis panel One is
269. or Onboard supply Front panel me T connector Pulse trigger Pulse Output Amp Protection generator ec gt Pulse width select T Impedance select Pulse Generator Sampler stampe s sample Bridge generator Meca bias lt Sample trigger lt sane al x p Video output Figure 5 12 Pulse Generator Sampler Block Diagram Pulse Generator The pulse generator has four available pulse widths 2 ns 10 ns 100 ns and 1000 ns Four output impedances are also available 50 Q 75 93 Q and 125 Q The pulses 1503C MTDR Service Manual 5 23 Circuit Descriptions 5 24 Sampler First Sample Bridge Preamp are generated by applying a voltage to an LC tank The tank will then ring or flyback at its resonant frequency By varying the values of the inductor and capacitor different pulse widths and heights can be obtained The 1503C pulse generator has four such tanks each one having a specific pulse width One tank circuit at a time is selected by the analog switches in U1050 by turning on one of the four driver transistors Q2050 Q2051 Q2052 and Q2053 and one of the four buffer transistors Q2030 Q2031 Q2032 and Q2033 The four output buffers sum together at TP2030 The signal is then amplified by emitter follower Q2034 and common base stage Q3021 The final stage is Class C output driver Q3020 The output driver is biased Class C for two reasons it has lower power consump
270. p Menu a P Press MENU again to return to normal operation The reflection coefficient is a measure of the impedance change at a point in the cable It is the ratio of the signal reflected back from a point divided by the signal going into that point It is designated by the Greek letter and is written in this manual as Rho The 1503C measures reflection coefficient in millirho thousandths of a rho To measure a reflection adjust VERT SCALE to make the reflection one division high Read the reflection coefficient directly off the display above the VERT SCALE control For reflections that are greater than 500 mp div adjust VERT SCALE for a reflection that is two divisions high and multiply the VERT SCALE reading by two ae 485 00 ft Figure 1 14 Reflection Adjusted to One Division in Height In an ideal transmission system with no changes in impedance there will be no reflections so rho is equal to zero A good cable that is terminated in its characteristic impedance is close to ideal and will appear as a flat line on the 1503C display 1 17 Operating Instructions Effect of Cable Attenuation on Return Loss and Reflection Coefficient Measurements 1 18 Using VIEW INPUT Small impedance changes like those from a connector might have reflections from 10 to 100 mo If rho is positive it indicates an impedance higher than that of the cable before the reflection It will show as an upward shift o
271. play distance window shows a distance greater than 50 000 ft The waveform should remain flat from Zero to this distance O Fi NOTE If the Timebase does not appear to be working properly refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter and the Troubleshooting section of the Maintenance chapter of this manual Vertical Position Offset Check 6 10 If the instrument fails only this check it can be used but should be serviced Not all waveforms will be viewable at all gain settings 1 Set the front panel controls CABLE 50 Q terminator IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB DIST DIV see text PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 2 Set the POSITION control so the distance window reads 2 00 ft 3 Set DIST DIV to 1 ft div 4 Using the SPOSITION control verify that the entire waveform can be moved upward past the center graticule line 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 1503C MTDR Service Manual 5 Remover the terminator m d ME 41 To Fu Figure 6 16 Waveform at the Display 6 Using the SPOSITION control verify that the entire waveform can be moved to the very bottom of the display The top of the pulse should be lower than the center graticule line Figure 6 17 Waveform at Bottom of the Display 7 Center the pulse in the display The pulse should be about two divisions high Fi Figure 6 18 Waveform at Center o
272. position DC voltage is generated by a digital to analog converter consisting of U2046 and U3041 DAC integrated circuit U2046 receives a 2 5 VDC reference voltage from U3040 and multiplies it by a 14 bit digital value loaded from the data bus under control of the processor The resulting current output of U2046 is amplified by operational amplifier U3041 to a proportional voltage of zero to 2 5 VDC The summing amplifier consists of operational amplifier U8041 input resistors R8044 R8046 and R8047 a feedback resistor R8045 Summation of the DAC output through R8047 with the 2 5 VDC reference through R8046 causes the vertical position signal range to be enlarged and shifted to achieve an effective output of 2 5 VDC to 2 5 VDC Sampled video through R8044 is summed with the vertical position signal at the input node of U8041 Resistor T8045 determines the gain of U8041 and is paralleled with C8040 to reduce high frequency gain for noise reduction The sampled video input may be observed at TP9041 Combined video from the summing amplifier is further amplified by a three stage programmable video amplifier The first stage of this amplifier consists of amplifier U7040 voltage divider T8040 through R8043 and analog multiplexer U8040 Voltage gains of 0 16 32 or 48 dB are achieved by switching U8040 to connect one of the four points from the resistive voltage divider to the inverting input of U7040 This causes the amplifier gai
273. power to the heater The LCD drive voltage compensation circuitry adjusts the drive voltage contrast to assure a constant display contrast within the operating temperature range of the instrument The display thermistor is attached to the LCD and forms the sensor in the display thermistor divider circuit Its output is a voltage related to the display temperature This voltage is read by the processor through the analog to digital converter U2023 The processor uses this voltage value to determine a drive voltage This is sent to digital to analog converter U2021 via the data bus The output of the DAC is amplified to op amp U2010A and applied as the LCD drive voltage As the temperature of the display thermistor divider voltage changes the 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions processor modifies the drive voltage via the DAC In this manner the drive voltage is compensated due to variations in display temperature Trimmer potentiometer R1011 is used to offset the drive voltage produced by U2010A to compensate for variations in display cells and thermistors Display Module Introduction display module consists of the following LCD Cell Electroluminescent Backlight Indium Tin Oxide ITO Heater Row Driver Controller Board and Column Driver Board Mechanical frame which supports the above subassemblies The display module function is to take bit pattern data generated by the instrument internal electronics
274. quired 2 1 Specifications Electrical Characteristics 3 1 Specifications Environmental Characteristics 3 3 Specifications Physical Characteristics 3 4 Option 06 Ethernet Electrical Characteristics 4 16 Option Port Wiring 5 12 Row Driver Latch 16 5 34 Column Driver Latch Bits 5 36 Controller Periods usce Ee 5 37 Option 06 Ethernet Control Lines 5 41 Calibration Performance Check Equipment Required 6 1 Pulse Widths with Allowable Tolerances 6 19 Auto Pulse Distance per Division and Pulse Width 6 20 Option 06 Ethernet Checks Equipment Required 6 31 Adjustment Procedures Equipment Required 6 37 Main Board Voltages Tolerances Test Point Locations 6 40 Pulser Sampler Voltages and Test Point Locations 6 51 Impedance Range and Specification 6 58 Maintenance Equipment Required 7 1 Power Cord Conductor Color Code 7 6 sealing Materials cees rorciss rero e RR paywa qua 7 18 Table of
275. r 5043EMIK600J CB3325 CB4705 CC CB1015 CB1005 CB2435 CB1215 CB1025 CB1015 CB1025 CB1215 CB2035 CB1535 CB1635 CB5625 CB1035 CB3015 CB1025 CB1035 CB7525 CB1015 NTR25J E04K7 CB1025 CB1015 BB1605 BB8215 BB1605 BB8215 CB1035 CB3905 CB1035 CEA CB1015 120 1394 01 120 1394 01 120 1396 01 8 29 Replaceable Electrical Parts Replaceable Parts List Cont Assy Number A4TP1060 A4TP1080 4 1081 4 1082 4 2030 4 3020 4 3030 4 3040 4 3050 4 3051 A4U 1040 A4U 1050 A4U 1070 A4U 1080 A4U 1090 A4U2070 A4U2080 A4VR 2080 A4VR 3020 A4VR3021 A4VR 3080 AG A6C 1010 A6C 1020 A6C 10201 A6C 2020 A6C2030 A6C 2031 A6C 2032 A6C 2033 A6C 2034 A6C 2035 8 30 Tektronix Part Number 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 14 0579 02 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 214 0579 02 156 0941 01 156 0514 00 156 0853 00 156 1490 00 156 1291 00 156 1291 00 156 1149 00 152 0055 00 152 0892 00 152 0892 00 152 0055 00 671 0443 283 0648 00 290 0523 00 290 0523 00 290 0523 00 283 0024 03 283 0024 03 290 0523 00 290 0523 00 290 0523 00 283 0024 03 Effective B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 B010100 Serial No Discont d Qty B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B023052 B02305
276. r all circuits selected by 02022 The wait state is used by the processor to compensate for the slow access times of U2041 U2046 and U4020 on the Main Board U2023 on the Front Panel Board and U2040 on the display module The wait request is generated by U1041 The select signals from 02024 are also modified through U1043B by a 200 ns pulse This pulse is created from gates U1042B U1031C U2040C and J K flip flop U2033A This circuit creates a write pulse that ends prior to the completion of the processor bus cycle thus meeting data hold time requirements for some selected ICs The most significant address bit on the EPROM is set or reset by bank switching flip flop U2023A Another control signal heat disable is generated by a similar flip flop U2023B This is also toggled by two select lines The interrupt logic consists of an eight bit tri state buffer U1032 and gates U1030 and U1031D Six interrupt requests signals are logically OR d by U1030 then inverted by U1031D and applied to the microprocessor interrupt request input Five of the interrupts are received from the video ADC the digital timebase a real time counter the front panel control ADC and from the Option Port connector The sixth interrupt input is unused The six interrupt requests and two power status signals are connected to pull up resistors R1033 and the inputs of buffer U1032 When the microprocessor responds to an interrupt request it selects U1032 allowing th
277. r bump on the waveform If rho is negative it indicates an impedance lower than that of the cable prior to the reflection It will show as a downward shift or dip on the waveform If the cable has an open or short all the energy sent out by the 1503C will be reflected This is a reflection coefficient of rho 1 or 1000 mp for the open and 1000 for the short Cable attenuation influences the return loss and reflection coefficient measurements made with the 1503C If you desire to measure the return loss of only an impedance mismatch the cable attenuation as measured with an open or short circuit on the cable must be subtracted from the directly measured value For reflection coefficient the directly measured value of rho must be divided by the value measured with an open or short circuit on the cable These calculations can be done manually or the instrument can perform them by proper use of the VERT SET REF function It is is not possible to measure the cable under test with an open or short sometimes another cable of similar type is available to use as a reference Note that cable attenuation is strongly influenced by signal frequency and therefore will be different from one pulse width to another on the 1503C When pushed the VIEW INPUT button displays the input at the front panel CABLE connector When VIEW INPUT is turned off and no other buttons are pushed the display will not have a waveform on it see Figure 1 15 The
278. r capacitor C2090 at the current input voltage through R2080 and R2081 Third the signal is sent to TP3051 and the Main Board as the video output The sample trigger goes to 03050 and C3065 which form 7 ns delay needed for compatibility with the Main Board timebase correction circuit This circuit triggers Q3070 which amplifies the sample trigger to a 12 VDC pulse to trigger the second sample gate strobe trigger through R3071 and to drive Q3080 through common mode transformer T3070 When Q3080 is turned on 10 VDC and 10 VDC pulses are generated This is coupled through C3080 C3081 and common mode transformer T3080 to the 16 2 clipping lines which reduce the pulse width to approximately 500 ps The pulses are then coupled to the first sample bridge through common mode transformer T3081 C2081 and C3082 Transistors Q3061 and Q3062 form a one shot pulse generator that produces a 5 Hs pulse to drive the second sample gate through Q3060 Diode CR2062 clamps the trailing edge of the strobe at 7 VDC while CR2060 and CR2061 provide transient protection for Q3060 The Front Panel Board consists of the following circuits for these controls Push Button Switches and Latches Rotary Binary Switches Resistive Shaft Encoders Analog to Digital Converter for Shaft Encoders The Front Panel Board consists of the following circuits for the display module m Electroluminescent Backlight Switch and Power Supply m Display Heater Circuitry m
279. rd 15 0 VDC 14 7 to 15 3 VDC Pin 4 5040 Main Board 15 0 VDC 14 7 to 15 3 VDC Pin 6 5040 Main Board 7 Make a mental note of the location where the ribbon cable from the power supply is plugged into the Main Board then turn the instrument over NOTE When the instrument is turned over you will be looking at the top component side of the Main Board 14 2 1 13 O O O O O 0 O 0 00 oO 13 Lg 1 2 14 Connector plug P5040 Connector pin J5040 on bottom of Main Board on top of Main Board Figure 6 61 Connector Plug P5040 and Pins J5040 on Bottom of Main Board The J5040 pins go through the circuit board and appear on the top component side of the Main Board J5040 P5040 is the input from the power supply The other end of the cable is J1030 P1030 on the Power Supply Board Measure the voltages on the pins listed in the table and verify the supply voltages 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures Range Check 1 Connectthe positive probe to the 16 6 VDC supply TP 1020 the Power Supply Board O 4 R1015 H R1016 E 1 1 1 4 1020 F 4 R1012 F 01010 Uo Iu f 01020 l R1013 CR1010 C1012 VR1012 R1017 f R0
280. re to dress the ribbon cable properly in the cutout provided in order to prevent it from being smashed when securing the shield 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 53 Adjustment Procedures 1st Blow By Compensation Adjustment 1 Setthe front panel controls CABLE no connection IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 35 00 dB DIST DIV 200 ft div PULSE WIDTH 1000 ns Vp 99 POWER On 2 Adjust the gt POSITION control to center the trailing edge of the pulse on the display 3 Use the SPOSITION control to center the baseline of the waveform Pulser Sampler Board Figure 6 85 Location of Pulser Sampler Board in Instrument 6 54 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures 1503C MTDR Service Manual R2096 R3093 R2095 R2094 R2093 R2092 2091 2090 2082 2081 2080 cH Figure 6 86 Location of R2097 on Pulser Sampler Board 4 While observing the baseline near the trailing edge of the pulse adjust R2097 1st Blow by Compensation on the Pulser Sampler Board until the line following the pulse is as flat as possible no i lt F gt i F U Figure 6 88 Under Compensated 6 55 Adjustment Procedures no To 2 4 2 Figure 6 89 Correctly Compensated NOTE If you intend to proceed to the Output Impedanc
281. ress STORE to return to normal viewing mode and erase the stored waveform NOTE If the instrument fails any portion of this check refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter for help in troubleshooting the pulser sampler board Pulse Width Check If the pulse width is out of specification resolution and range might be affected 1 Setthe front panel controls CABLE 50 2 terminator IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE see text DIST DIV 1 ft div PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 2 Using the POSITION control set the distance window to 2 00 ft 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 17 Calibration 6 18 F Figure 6 27 Initial Pulse 3 Adjust VERT SCALE for a pulse height of six divisions 4 Keep the pulse centered on the display with the POSITION control so the pulse is three divisions above and three below the center horizontal graticule line 5 Turn NOISE FILTER to HORZ SET REF 6 Position the cursor at the point where the leading edge of the pulse crosses the center horizontal line 7 Press STORE 8 Set NOISE FILTER back to 1 avg 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 1503C MTDR Service Manual 9 Using the gt POSITION control position the cursor at the point where the trailing edge of the pulse crosses the center horizontal graticule line 1 16 ft 10 Read the distance in the distance window T
282. rgy will be reflected The signature of a terminator tends to go either up or down Because a terminator absorbs nearly all the energy of a pulse the normal ripples in the waveform minor changes in impedance will not be present after a terminator The point where the waveform becomes flat is a clue to the location of a terminator Taps commonly have a characteristic down then up reflection The TDR pulse will continue to travel past a tap because only part of the pulse s energy is reflected This allows the 1503C to read signatures well beyond taps Following are examples of tests made on two Ethernet systems gl C Figure 4 4 System 1 Tap Hidden by Traffic 1 avg 50 ft div 35 dB eee eee E 4 50 ft div 35 dB 1503C MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories 1503C MTDR Service Manual amo mmo Figure 4 6 System 1 Visible 16 avg 50 ft div 35 dB m Figure 4 7 S as 1 Tap Quite Visible 128 avg 50 ft div 35 dB Os Figure 4 8 System 1 No Traffic 1 avg 50 ft div 35 dB 4 11 Options and Accessories 4 12 eee mmo mO E g a Sumu 20a Si SL D See SS 25 Ste A Figure 4 10 System 2 Cable w Revision One Repeater 1 avg 200ft div 2 25dB Revision One repeaters must sense collisions and place a jam signal both segments When
283. river trigger for the analog timebase 1503 MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions 1503C MTDR Service Manual The analog timebase circuits receive the driver and sampler triggers and provide strobes to the pulser sampler The driver trigger is delayed by an analog time delay and amplified by a driver circuit to provide the driver strobe The ramp trigger is used to start a linear voltage ramp generator voltage comparator detects the time when this ramp reaches the programmed voltage of the timebase DAC digital to analog converter and signals a driver to produce a strobe for the video sampler The timebase DAC is programmed by the processor to provide a voltage proportional to the portion of the 50 ns time delay period desired Timebase control by the processor system is shown in Figure 5 9 Each period of the pulse rate the processor calculates a new 33 bit digital time delay value for the next sample to be taken The sixteen most significant bits of this value are loaded into the coarse delay counter causing it to count that number of 2 5 MHz clock periods before starting the fine delay counter aum MSB LSB DIGITAL TIME 16 BITS 14 BITS DELAY VALUE COURSE FINE PULE y DELAY DELAY EDT COUNTER COUNTER 2 5 MHz 20 MHZ STROBE TO CLOCK CLOCK SAMPLER Figure 5 9 Timebase Control The next three bits from the processor time delay value are loaded into the fine delay counter This counter s
284. rm Our instruments make measurements by taking a succession of samples in time and displaying them as a waveform with voltage on the vertical scale up and down and 1503C MTDR Service Manual Glossary Series Loss Short Circuit Stability TDR Velocity of Propagation Vp Waveform Averaging 1503C MTDR Service Manual time along the horizontal scale across the display The circuitry that captures and holds the samples cannot instantly change from one voltage level to another It might take the circuit several samples to settle in at the new voltage after a rapid change in the waveform How efficiently the circuit moves from one sampled voltage level to the next is called sampling efficiency If the efficiency is too low the waveforms will be smoothed or rounded If the efficiency is too high above 100 the circuit will actually move beyond the new voltage level in a phenomenon known as overshoot which becomes an unwanted source of noise in the waveform Conductors all have some DC resistance to the flow of electrical energy through them The amount of resistance per unit length is usually nearly constant for a cable Theenergy lost overcoming this series resistance is called series loss The series loss must be compensated for when measuring the return loss or impedance mismatch at the far end of long cables Ina cable a short circuit is a place where the signal conductor comes into electrical contact with the return
285. rm Accumulation Diagram 5 3 Collision 4 3 Connectors BNC BNC 4 19 BNC to Alligator 4 20 BNC to Banana 4 20 1503C MTDR Service Manual Index BNC to Binding Post 4 20 BNC to F 4 20 BNC to GR 4 20 BNC to Hook Tips 4 20 BNC to N 4 20 BNC to UHF 4 20 Controls Cable Connector 1 6 Distance Division 1 6 Front Panel 1 5 1 6 Horizontal Position 1 7 Impedance 1 6 Menu Button 1 7 Noise Filter 1 6 Power 1 7 Pulse Width 1 7 Store Button 1 7 Velocity of Propagation 1 7 Vertical Position 1 7 Vertical Scale 1 6 View Difference Button 1 7 View Input Button 1 7 View Store Button 1 7 Cursor Spec 3 2 D Depth Spec 3 4 E Electromagnetic Spec 3 4 Ethernet Bridge 4 3 Carrier 4 9 Collision 4 9 Custom Tests 4 9 Electrical Characteristics 4 16 Frequency Response Curve 4 16 Introduction 4 4 Menu 4 7 Carrier 4 7 4 8 Collision 4 8 Single Sweep 4 7 Termination 4 7 N Type Female T Connector 4 5 N Type Male T Connector 4 5 Repeaters 4 3 Segments 4 1 Servers 4 3 Specifications 4 16 Taps 4 3 4 10 1503C MTDR Service Manual Termination 4 9 4 10 Test Procedure 4 4 Testing Networks 4 3 Transceivers 4 2 Typical System 4 2 Waveform Signatures 4 10 What is it 4 1 F Features see Menu 1 25 Frequency Response Curve 4 16 Fungus Spec 3 3 Fuse 4 19 Fuse see Power 1 2 H Handling 1 1 Height Spec 3
286. rns to normal operation This feature allows the 1503C to act much like a non triggered oscilloscope In this mode the 1503C is acting as a detector only Any pulses detected will not originate 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions from the instrument so any distance readings will be invalid If you are listening to a local area network for example it is possible to detect traffic but not possible to measure the distance to 1ts origin Pulse is Off can be used in conjunction with Max Hold is On 7 ToexitPulse is Off access the Acquisition Control Menu again turn the pulse back on then repeatedly push MENU until the instrument returns to normal operation Single Sweep single sweep function will acquire one waveform only and display it 1 Attach cable to the 1503C front panel CABLE connector Push MENU to access the Main Menu 2 3 Scroll to Setup Menu and push MENU again 4 Scroll to Acquisition Control Menu and push MENU again 5 Scroll to Single Sweep is Offand push MENU again This will change to Single Sweep is On gt Repeatedly press MENU until the instrument returns to normal operation 7 When you are ready to begin a sweep push VIEW INPUT sweep will also be initiated when you change any of the front panel controls This allows you to observe front panel changes without exiting the Single Sweep mode As in normal operation averaged waveforms will take longer to acquire
287. ry level or the added load might shut down the instrument SU p Qc or LE LE tow Battery 4 5 Indicator E x Kis sent oe Figure 1 2 Display Showing Low Battery Indication Protection circuits in the charger prevent deep discharge of the batteries during instrument operation The circuits automatically shut down the instrument whenever battery voltage falls below approximately 10 V If shutdown occurs the batteries should be fully recharged before further use NOTE Turn the POWER switch off after instrument shutdown to prevent continued discharge of the batteries When the instrument is stored at temperatures below 10 voids might develop in the liquid crystal display LCD These voids should disappear if the instrument is placed in an ambient temperature 5 C for 24 hours When operating the 1503C in an environment below 10 C a heater will activate The element is built into the LCD module and will heat the display to permit normal operation Depending on the surrounding temperature it might take up to 15 minutes to completely warm the crystals in the LCD Once warmed the display will operate normally 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions Preparing to Use the 1503 Check the power requirements remove the front cover and you are ready to test cables The following pages explain the front panel
288. s 1000 ft 1000 ns 20 ft 10 ns 2000 ft 1000 ns 50 ft 10 ns 5000 ft 1000 ns 6 20 1503 Service Manual Calibration E I I auto NOTE If the Auto Pulse Select check fails refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter describing the software of the instrument Jitter Check 1 Set the front panel controls CABLE 50 Q terminator IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB DIST DIV 1 ft div PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 2 Center the rising edge of the pulse on the center horizontal graticule line Figure 6 33 Initial Pulse Centered on Horizontal Graticule 3 Increase the VERT SCALE control to 30 00 dB 1503 MTDR Service Manual 6 21 Calibration 6 22 m To To Figure 6 34 Gain Increased to 30 00 dB 4 Verify that the leading edge of the pulse moves less than one minor division horizontally 0 2 ft NOTE Use the Max Hold function found in the Acquisition Control menu within the Setup Menu can simplify this measurement for you by displaying jitter accumulating in the waveform over a period of time more than 30 seconds See the Operation chapter for directions on using Max Hold If the instrument does not pass this check potential problem areas are the Pulser Sampler board and the Timebase circuitry Refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter and the Maintenance chapter of this manual 5 Turn the instrument off
289. s appliances portable tools and similar products Equipmentis usually cord connected CATI Secondary signal level or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment continued next page 3 4 1503 MTDR Service Manual Specifications Category Standard or description Pollution Degree 1 Pollution Degree 2 Pollution Degree 3 Pollution Degree A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a product Typically the internalenvironmentinside a productis considered to be the same as the external P roducts should be used only in the environment for which they are rated No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs P roducts in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical officelhome environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the productis out of service Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neithertemperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Physic
290. s between 245 and 255 13 Rotate the VERT SCALE control slowly in either direction The lower value in each column should be between 0 and 10 while the higher number is between 245 and 255 This is a numerical reading from the thermistor located on the LCD If it is not operating properly the LCD heater might not come on in cold environments This could result in slow or unreadable displays 1 The displayed temp reading should be between 50 and 90 depending on the ambient temperature If the thermistor is defective the reading will be near 0 or 255 Front Panel Diagnostic test all switches Hold down MENU button to Exit lt lt Temperature Switch 1 temp 78 Vp 0 30 Reading lt gt Control 142 0 A LLLLLELLLLLLELDI M 11 181 sss Vertical Scale 190 24 Figure 6 9 Front Panel Diagnostic Display 2 Press MENU repeatedly until the instrument returns to normal operation If any of the controls or functions are defective or indicate erratic response the function affected by that control could be in error The defective control should be replaced See the Maintenance chapter of this manual Calibration Horizontal Scale Timebase Check 6 8 If the instrument fails this check it must be repaired before any distance measurements are made with it 1 Setthe front panel controls CABLE No connection see text IMPEDANCE 930 NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 10 00 dB DIST DIV 5 ft di
291. s of the Impedance Diagnostic test and compare them with the table below 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 57 Adjustment Procedures Range Specification 500 49 50 Q to 50 50 Q 750 74 25 Q to 75 75 Q 93 Q 92 07 Q 93 93 Q 125 Q 123 75 Q 126 25 Q 11 Remove the jumper 12 Press MENU to return to normal operations 13 Replace the EMI shield covering the Pulser Sampler board Be sure to dress the ribbon cable properly in the cutout provided in order to prevent it from being smashed when securing the shield Option 06 Ethernet Adapter Adjustments If your instrument does not have Option 06 proceed to After Adjustments are Completed This procedure is to adjust the Option 06 board after it has been serviced or repaired 1 Make sure the 1503C power is off 2 Because this adjustment requires a critical resistance measurement note the resistance of the leads used with your DMM Adjust R1013 Relay side of R1011 R1020 0 9 Q NU K1020 Hi pe 12010 O0 om B o mon um Output side of L2010 Figure 6 93 L2010 R1011 and R1013 on Option 06 Board 3 Connect one lead of the DMM to the output side of L2010 the jumper wire between the Option 06 Board and the Pulser Sampler Board 4 Connect the other DMM lead to the relay side of R1011 6 58 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures
292. s of the instrument discussed in detail The 1503C uses time domain reflectometry techniques to detect and display the impedance characteristics of a metallic cable from one end of the cable This is accomplished by applying a narrow pulse to the cable and monitoring the resulting voltage over a period of time If the cable has a known propagation velocity the time delay to a particular reflection can be interpreted in cable distance Amplitude of the reflected voltage is a function of the cable impedance and the applied pulse and therefore can be interpreted in dB or in rho The 1503C instrument is comprised of several subsections as shown in the block diagram Figure 5 1 These are organized as a processor system which controls several peripheral circuits to achieve overall instrument performance The processor system reads the front panel control settings to determine the cable information that you selected for viewing Distance settings are converted to equivalent time values and loaded into the timebase circuits The timebase generates repetitive strobe signals to trigger the pulser sampler circuits Pulse strobes cause a single pulse to be applied to the cable under test Each sampler strobe causes a single sample of the cable voltage to be taken during a very short interval The timebase precisely controls the time delay of the sample strobe relative to the pulse strobe When many sequential samples are recombined a replica of the cab
293. s on the 1503C are sealed from external contaminants and therefore require little maintenance and no lubrication Occasionally blowing out accumulated dust is all that is needed Obvious defects such as broken connections damaged boards frayed cables improperly seated components and heat damaged components should be corrected first before attempting further troubleshooting Heat damage usually indicates a deeper problem somewhere in the circuitry and should be traced and corrected immediately We do not recommend electrical checks of individual components because defective components will become evident during instrument operation After maintenance has been performed the instrument should be checked as per the procedures in the Calibration chapter of this manual Part Removal and Replacement AC Fuse The fuse is accessible through the rear panel of the case 1 Unscrew the fuse cover and remove O O Figure 7 1 Location of Voltage Selector and Fuse Holder on Rear Panel 1503C MTDR Service Manual Maintenance Removal of Case and EMI Shields A Removing the Power Supply Module 1503C MTDR Service Manual 2 Usea straight blade screwdriver to remove the fuse holder 3 Check the voltage selector for proper voltage setting If the instrument voltage selector is set for 115 VAC replace the fuse with a 0 3 A fuse Tek P N 159 0029 00 If the voltage selector is set f
294. s select and non select voltages Ey enable in Input to the enable flip flop enable clock Clocks Ery into the enable flip flop The relevant outputs m Columns 1 to 64 These are the 64 outputs from the level shifter NOTE The manufacturer s pinout of the outputs are numbered in order of shift seg 63 seg 0 The nomenclature herein refers to the outputs in column order Therefore seg 63 corresponds to Column 1 and seg 0 corresponds to Column 64 m FOUT Output from the enable flip flop 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions One Line Extra AR 16 1 16 16 1 K 18 1 or 1 2 22 First Column Second Column Third Column Forth Column Driver Pair Driver Pair Driver Pair Driver Pair Enable Enable Enable Enable 64 LP 5V Select Bits VANon Select Bits V4Non Select Bits Vicd Select Bits One Frame Figure 5 19 Column Timing Diagram Supply Voltages include the following 5 VDC supply voltage for logic and select drive voltage V3 non select voltage Va non select voltage Vicp select voltage GND return for 5 VDC 1503C MTDR Service Manual 5 35 Circuit De
295. scriptions 5 36 Display Memory To perform its function the column driver shift registers are filled with data by receiving data XSCL and Ery from the controller LP then latches the contents of the shift registers into the latches The level shifter translates the logical 1s and Os in the latch into select and non select voltages according to FR see table FR Bit Xin Latch Column X Output 0 0 V4 0 1 1 0 1 1 5 VDC The pixels selected by both the column drivers and the row driver are turned on all others are off The process of filling the column drivers is repeated every LP 1 for every addressed row until all lines in both screen halves have been refreshed One frame is thus complete and the entire process is repeated Shift Direction lt D3 D2 D1 DO Col X Seg 63 Col X Seg 62 1 Col X Seg 1 63 Col X Seg 0 64 Shift Register Detail Figure 5 20 Shift Register The display memory is an 8k X 8 RAM only 4k X 8 is used located on the Row Driver Controller Board The display memory stores the current bit pattern generated by the processor on the Main Board The processor interrupts the controller periodically and places a new bit pattern in t
296. se see Figure 1 10 Read the distance in the distance window in the upper right corner of the display A more thorough inspection might be required This example uses a longer cable 4 Wheninspecting a 455 foot cable a setting of 100 ft div allows a relatively fast inspection If needed turn VERT SCALE to increase the gain The higher the gain the smaller the faults that can be detected If noise increases increase the NOISE FILTER setting E ST Figure 1 11 455 ft Cable 5 Change DIST DIV to 20 ft div The entire cable can now be inspected in detail on the LCD Turn the lt gt POSITION control so the cursor travels to the far right side of the LCD Keep turning and the cable will be dragged across the display 1 15 Operating Instructions 1 16 Return Loss Measurements 77178 pe cursor M 2S oie shee Figure 1 12 455 ft Cable with 20 Cursor off A rise or fall is a signature of an impedance mismatch fault A dramatic rise in the pulse indicates and open A dramatic lowering of the pulse indicates a short Variations such as inductive and capacitive effects on the cable will appears as bumps and dips in the waveform Capacitive faults appear as a lowering of the pulse e g water in the cable Inductive faults appear as a rising of the pulse e g kinks in the cable Whenever an a
297. se height to four major divisions Figure 2 14 Pulse Adjusted to Four Major Divisions in Height 28 Press STORE 29 Return the NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg Operator Performance Checks 2 10 30 Place the baseline of the waveform the center graticule using the SPOSITION control 31 Increase VERT SCALE to 30 00 dB 32 Using the POSITION control verify that the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 300 feet 91 50 m 300 00 ft Figure 2 15 Aberrations Than Four Divisions Out to 300 00 ft 33 Return the cursor to 2 00 ft 0 61 m 34 Turn NOISE FILTER back to VERT SET REF 35 Set the DIST DIV to 500 ft div 10 m div 36 Turn PULSE WIDTH to 1000 ns 37 Adjust the pulse height to four major divisions lt hE ccr Figure 2 16 Pulse Adjusted t to Four y Major Divisions in in Height 38 Press STORE 39 Return the NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg 40 Place the baseline of the waveform on the center graticule using the SPOSITION control 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operator Performance Checks Conclusions 1503C MTDR Service Manual 41 Increase VERT SCALE to 30 00 dB 42 Using the lt gt POSITION control verify that the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 3000 feet 915 00 m ac 3000 00 ft Figure 2 17 Aberrations Less Than Four Divisions Out to 3000 00 ft If the instrument failed Aberrations or Sampling
298. secondary voltages are rectified and filtered by CR1034 C1032 C1033 and C1034 to produce 15 VDC 15 VDC Other secondary voltages are rectified and filtered by CR1030 CR1031 CR1032 CR1033 C1030 C1031 and C1037 to produce 5 VDC and 5 VDC Diodes CR2031 and CR2030 rectify the primary voltage and clamp it to the voltage level that is across C2031 This prevents voltage transients caused by the rapid switching of 02030 and 02031 and prevents the leakage inductance of T1030 s primary from creating excessive voltage stress R2030 provides a discharge path from C2031 T1031 and C1036 provide additional filtering of the 16 VDC supply The processor system consists of the following m Microprocessor m Address Decoding and Memory m Interrupt Logic The processor system provides control and calculation functions for the instrument A block diagram of the processor system is shown in Figure 5 4 next page Circuit Descriptions 5 8 Microprocessor An eight bit microprocessor clocked at 5 MHz provides the processing capability in a bus organized system Instructions are read from the program memory EPROM and executed by the microprocessor to accomplish essentially all instrument functions Random access memory is connected to the microprocessor through its data and address busses allowing it to store and retrieve control video and display data as required 5MHz CLOCK D
299. see also Controls 1 7 Pulse Inverter 4 20 Pulse Spec 3 1 R Reflection Coefficient 1 17 Repeaters 4 3 Return Loss 1 16 S Salt Atmosphere Spec 3 3 Sand and Dust Spec 3 3 Scale see Controls 1 6 Segments 4 1 Servers 4 3 Service Manual 4 19 Shock Spec 3 3 Short 1 14 Single Sweep 1 27 Slide Rule 4 19 Specifications 3 1 Electrical 3 1 Environmental 3 3 Physical 3 4 Store the Waveform 1 19 1503C MTDR Service Manual T Taps 4 3 4 10 Temperature Low 1 4 Terminator 4 3 4 5 4 9 4 10 4 19 Test Cable 4 19 Thin Ethernet 4 1 ThinWire 4 1 Token Ring Adapter 4 20 Interface 4 20 Transceivers 4 2 U USOC Adapter 4 20 V Velocity of Propagation 1 11 Table of Types 1 11 Unknown Vp 1 12 Velocity of Propagation See also Controls 1 7 Velocity of Propagation Spec 3 2 Vertical Scale Spec 3 1 Vertical Set Reference 1 24 Vibration Spec 3 3 View Difference 1 19 View Input 1 18 View Store 1 19 Voltage see Power 1 2 Voltage Spec 3 2 Vp see Velocity of Propagation 1 11 W Water Resistance Spec 3 3 Waveform Storage 1 19 Weight Spec 3 4 Index 5 Index Index 6 1503C MTDR Service Manual
300. ser Sampler Boards 1 2 E Remove the two screws and washers holding the cover to the chassis Remove the cover by sliding it toward the center of the instrument When re assembling make sure the cable is placed under the slot provided Disconnect the ground strap and SMC connector from the Pulser Sampler Board Disconnect the ribbon cable from both boards Remove the circuit boards from the instrument by sliding them out of the card guides Unsolder the jumper wire between the Option 06 and the Pulser Sampler Boards Remove the standoff between the Option 06 and the Pulser Sampler Boards Using a hex wrench disassemble the power switch linkage This disconnects the front panel switch shaft from the linkage block Remove the three multi conductor cables from the Main Board Maintenance Remove the Pulser Sampler Board EMI shield Remove the coaxial cable from the Pulser Sampler Board Remove the four corner screws on the instrument front panel Carefully guide the coaxial cable through the Pulser Sampler card cage a A om Remove the Front Panel Assembly from the instrument chassis Removing the Display Module Front Panel Board Using the previous procedure remove the Front Panel Assembly from the instrument 2 Remove all knobs 3 Remove the hex nuts and washers from the front panel controls 4 Remove the buttons by pressing gently on the rubber boot behind each button CAUTION Take c
301. setting is where the instrument will be set when power is switched on For example VERT SCALE will always be 0 00 dB when the instrument is powered on 2 Turn POWER on Wait for initialization and normal operation display 3 Press MENU 4 Use POSITION control to scroll to Diagnostics Menu Return to Normal Operation Help with Instrument Controls Cable Information Menu Setup Menu Diagnostics Menu View Stored Waveform Settings Option Port Menu Ethernet Menu Move to select then push MENU button Figure 6 4 Main Menu 5 Press MENU This will display the Diagnostics Menu 6 4 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration Pushbutton Switches Rotating Controls 1503C MTDR Service Manual Exit Diagnostics Menu Service Diagnostic Menu FrontPanel Diagnostic LCD Diagnostics Menu Chart Diagnostics Menu Move Position to select then push MENU button Figure 6 5 Diagnostics Menu 6 Use the SPOSITION control to scroll to Front Panel Diagnostic 7 Press MENU This will display the Front Panel Diagnostics 1 Press VIEW INPUT The LCD switch reading should change to 1 see Figure 6 6 third line of text Front Panel Diagnostic test all switches Hold down MENU button to Exit Switch 1 TIT Switch Reading Vp 0 30 lt I gt Control 142 0 A 11 181 sss Vertical Scale 190 2 Figure 6 6 Front
302. ssible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Double Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Insulated Earth Terminal 1503C MTDR Service Manual Dw XO i Service Safety Summary Do Not Service Alone Disconnect Power Use Care When Servicing With Power On Disposal of Batteries 1503C MTDR Service Manual Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Read this Service Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service procedures Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present To avoid electric shock disconnect the main power by means of the power cord or the power switch Dangerous voltages or currents may exist in this product Disconnect power remove battery and disconnect test leads before removing protective panels soldering or replacing components To avoid electric shock do not touch exposed connections This instrument contains a lead acid battery Some states and or local jurisdictions might require special disposition recycling of this type of material in accordance with Hazardous Waste guidelines Check your local and s
303. supplied to the instrument by the deep discharge protection circuits The AC line power is received by the connector in the EMI filter FL1 This filter prevents high frequency signals generated in the instrument from being conducted back to the AC power line The line voltage is fused F101 and switched S201 to the primary step down transformer T201 Both the switch and the fuse can be accessed from the outside of the instrument via covers on the rear of the cabinet The primary of T201 is wound in two identical sections These sections are connected by 201 in parallel for 110 VAC operation or in series for 220 VAC operation The secondary of T201 is connected by a short two wire cable to the Power Supply Board The MOV R101 across one of T201 s primaries protects the power supply if 220 VAC is applied while 52011 is in the 110 VAC position Fuse F101 will open in this event The secondary voltage is full wave rectified by CR1010 and filtered by capacitor C1010 The large value of this capacitor allows it to supply energy to the instrument between half cycles of the line voltage Circuit Descriptions 5 6 Battery Charger Deep Discharge Protection Post Regulator Integrated circuit U1010 is a pulse width modulator switching regulator controller It oscillates at approximately 70 kHz and provides drive pulses to switching transistors Q1010 and Q1011 The output pulses from these transistors are filtered to DC by flybac
304. surement Most noise is random with respect to the signals sent by the TDR to make a measurement and will appear on the waveform constantly constantly moving up and down on the display The NOISE FILTER control sets how many waveforms will be averaged together to make the waveform displayed Noisy waveforms appear to fluctuate around the real signal Because it is random noise will sometimes add to the real signal and sometimes subtract energy from the real signal By adding several noisy waveforms together the noise can be averaged out of the signal because the average amount of noise adding to the signal will be nearly the same as the average amount of noise subtracting from the signal More waveforms in an average are more likely to approach the real signal although it takes longer to acquire and add together more waveforms Glossary 3 Glossary Open Circuit Precision Reactance Reflectometer Resistance Resolution Return Loss Rho p Risetime RMS Sampling Efficiency Glossary 4 a cable a broken conductor will not allow electrical energy to flow through it These circuits are also called broken circuits The circuit is open to the air which looks like a very high impedance The statistical spread or variation in a value repeatedly measured generated or displayed under constant conditions Also called repeatability A conductor s opposition to the flow of AC electrical energy through it All c
305. switches are normally open momentary switches When depressed these switches tie the inputs of NOR gate latches U3021 U3022 and U3023 to 5 VDC setting the latches The latches are reset by control signal ADCRD The processor updates the instrument configuration by periodically reading the state of the latches through multiplexers U2024 U3025 and U3031 These switches control MENU VIEW INPUT VIEW STORE VIEW DIFF STORE The rotary binary switches provide a 4 bit binary value indicating their position The outputs are tied to the inputs of the multiplexers The position of the rotary switches control the following functions FILTERING SET REF SET DELTA HORIZONTAL GAIN DIST DIV Vp COARSE Vp FINE PULSE WIDTH IMPEDANCE The switch multiplexers are U2024 U2025 U3025 and U3031 These dual four channel multiplexers multiplex the switch settings of the push button and rotary switches onto the data bus The control signal MUXCS in conjunction with A selects the multiplexers while Ag and A determine which switch bank is placed on the data bus The resistive shaft encoders R1022 R2024 and R3020 are dual concentric 360 rotation potentiometers with the wipers set 180 out of phase with respect to each other The wipers are tied to the analog to digital converter inputs of ADC U2023 The three resistive shaft encoders control the following functions m VERTICAL GAIN m VERTICAL POSITION m HORIZONTAL POSITION Cursor
306. sy Tektronix Serial No Serial No Mfr Number Part Number Effective Discont d Qty amp Description Code Mfr Part Number A4Q3021 151 0296 00 5 516 10 30 4 06 27 04713 55443 403035 151 0188 00 5 516 40 200 250 7 03508 39 3162 403050 151 0448 00 8020000 8023755 XSTR NP N SI TO 46 2N5836 FAMILY 04713 SRF504 151 0965 00 B023756 B024251 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 10V 80MA 6 0GHZ AMP 04713 MPS571 151 0951 00 B024252 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 75MA 4 5GHZ AMP 80009 151 0951 00 403060 151 0188 00 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR P NP 40V 200MA 250MHZ AMP 03508 X39H3162 A4Q3061 151 0190 00 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP 01295 SKA3703 403062 151 0190 00 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 40V 200MA 300MHZ AMP 01295 SKA3703 A4Q3070 151 0271 00 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR PNP 15V 30MA 2 0GHZ AMP 01295 5 4504 403080 151 1174 00 8020000 8023755 XSTR NPN RF BFR96 TO 46 04713 MRF 965 151 0965 00 8023756 8024251 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 1OV 80MA 6 0GHZ AMP 04713 5571 151 0951 00 B024252 XSTR SIG BIPOLAR NPN 15V 75MA 4 5GHZ AMP 80009 151 0951 00 A4R1010 315 0204 00 RES FXD FILM 200K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB2045 A4R1011 315 0243 00 RES FXD FILM 24K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB2435 A4R1012 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 01121 CB1045 A4R1013 315 0101 00 RES FXD FILM 100 0HM 5 0 25W 0121 1015 A4R1022 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM 100K OHM 5 0 25W 0121 CB1045 A4R1023 315 0104 00 RES FXD FILM
307. t Data lines to the option port pass through the bus transceiver U2011 Address lines RD and WR are driven by U2012 522 from the processor system enables these drivers with RD controlling the transceiver direction U2012 outputs are pulled up by the switched 5 VDC supply via R2015 The data lines are pulled down via 2014 WR is modified write pulse 200 ns long created to give a rising edge prior to the disabling of the drivers This pulse is created by flip flop U2033A The output latch U1011A is controlled by Ao and Aj with select signal CS 10 The output of this latch is optionally used in the interface protocol Two more lines are used in the option port interface IR4 is an interrupt signal that is active low when creating processor interrupts R T TRIG is also available at the interface This is the trigger pulse generated in the analog timebase J2010 Option Port Label on Main Board D Connector Do 3 2 Dj 1 1 D2 24 25 D3 22 24 D4 20 23 D5 18 22 Ds 16 21 D 14 20 Ag 12 19 Ar 10 18 8 17 6 16 RD 1 4 WR 5 3 CS22 9 5 1503C MTDR Service Manual Circuit Descriptions Video Processor Introduction 1503C MTDR Service Manual J2010 Option Port Label on Main Board D Connector IA 11 6 IR4 13 7 R T TRIG 2 14 SW 16 25 13 23 12 16RTN 21 11 19 10 SW 5 17 9 5RTN 4 15 15 8 T
308. t Waveform Center Stored Waveform Above Difference Below Notice the VIEW INPUT waveform is solid VIEW DIFF is dotted and VIEW STORE is dot dash There are many situations where the VIEW DIFF function can be useful One common situation is to store the waveform of a suspect cable repair the cable then compare the two waveforms after the repair During repairs the VIEW INPUT VIEW DIFF and VIEW STORE waveforms can be used to judge the effectiveness of the repairs The optional chart recorder can be used to make a chart of the three waveforms to document the repair Another valuable use for the VIEW DIFF function is for verifying cable integrity before and after servicing or periodic maintenance that requires moving or disconnecting the cable The VIEW DIFF function is useful when you want to see any changes in the cable In some systems there might be several reflections coming back from each branch of the network It might become necessary to disconnect branch lines from the cable 1 21 Operating Instructions 1 22 Using Horizontal Set Reference under test to determine whether a waveform represents a physical fault or is simply an echo from one of the branches The STORE and VIEW DIFF functions allow you to see and compare the network with and without branches Two important things to be observed when using the VIEW DIFF function m If you change either the VERT SCALE DIST DIV you will no longer be comparing featur
309. tartrotating R1018 slowly clockwise until all of the pixels are just visible on the display If you go too far restart the adjustments at step c e Rotate R1018 one quarter turn clockwise past the point of step d 1503C MTDR Service Manual Adjustment Procedures NOTE It is important to always determine the proper contrast setting by coming from a faded display It takes a higher threshold voltage to turn a pixel on than it does to turn one off If it is done from the other direction the display will be too bright f Inspect the display for any bleeding areas that are too dark or any fading areas that are too light Turn the instrument off h After waiting a few seconds turn the instrument back on i Reinspect the display for bleeding or fading j Readjust R1018 if necessary Figure 6 77 Waveform with Contrast Adjusted Correctly If the Contrast Adjust is set properly you will be able to see the cursor clearly when itis moved rapidly across the display If any residual images are made by the cursor movement they should fade out quickly NOTE If you are unable to adjust the contrast or if pixels are not functioning see the Troubleshooting section in the Maintenance chapter of this manual Pulser Sampler Voltage Check No front panel adjustments are necessary for this check 1 Remove the EMI shield covering the Pulser Sampler Board 1503C MTDR Service Manual 6 49 Adjustment Procedures
310. tarts at the end of the coarse delay and counts the selected number of 20 MHz clock periods 0 through 7 before triggering the analog delay The analog delay circuit receives the 14 least significant bits of the time delay word A digital to analog conversion provides a proportional voltage which is compared to a linear voltage ramp to produce the programmed time delay 0 to 50 ns The timing diagram in Figure 5 10 next page shows the combined effects of the three time delays The output of the PRT counter waveform a begins the coarse delay b The falling edge of this signal triggers the driver strobe c which causes a pulse to be applied to the cable test output 5 17 Circuit Descriptions PRT COUNTER COURSE DELAY COUNTER DRIVER STOBE FINE DELAY COUNTER RAMP TRIGGER EXPANDED RAMP GENERATOR EXPANDED SAMPLER STROBE lt 16 BIT gt PROGRAMMED DELAY gt lt 400ns d lt 3 bit gt prgm delay 14 OUTPUT g Figure 5 10 Combined Effects of Time Delay At the end of the coarse delay the rising edge of this signal enables the fine delay d which produces a single ramp trigger pulse after the programmed delay This pulse is shown expanded in waveform The ramp generator waveform f also shown expanded has a linear voltage ramp beginning on the falling edge of the trigger This
311. tate regulations prior to disposing of an old battery Tektronix Factory Service will accept 1503C batteries for recycling If you choose to return the battery to us for recycling the battery cases must be intact the battery should be packed with the battery terminals insulated against possible short circuits and should be packed in shock absorbant material Tektronix Inc Attn Service Department P O Box 500 Beaverton Oregon 97077 U S A For more information call 1 800 833 9200 XV Service Safety Summary xvi 1503C MTDR Service Manual NENNT General Information Product Description Battery Operation Options Standards Documents and References Used Changes and History Information 1503C MTDR Service Manual The Tektronix 1503C Metallic cable Time Domain Reflectometer MTDR is a cable test instrument that uses radar principles to determine the electrical characteristics of metallic cables The 1503C generates a half sine wave signal applies it to the cable under test and detects and processes the reflected voltage waveform These reflections are displayed in the 1503C liquid crystal display LCD where distance measurements may be made using a cursor technique Impedance information may be obtained through interpreting waveform amplitude The waveform may be temporarily stored within the 1503C and recalled or may be printed using the optional dot matrix strip chart recorder which installs into the
312. tch that selects the output impedance of the cable test signal Available settings are 50 75 93 and 125 Ohms The selected value is displayed above the control on the LCD 3 NOISE FILTER If the displayed waveform is noisy the apparent noise can NOISE FILTER be reduced by using noise averaging Averaging settings are between 1 and 128 The time for averaging is directly proportional to the averaging setting chosen A setting of 128 might take the instrument up to 35 seconds to acquire and display waveform The first two positions the NOISE FILTER control are SET REF used for setting the vertical and horizontal reference points The selected value or function is displayed above the control on the LCD VERT SCALE 4 VERT SCALE This control sets the vertical gain displayed in dB or the vertical sensitivity displayed in per division Although the instrument defaults to dB you may choose the preferred mode from the Setup Menu The selected value is displayed above the control on the LCD 5 DIST DIV Determines the number of feet or meters per division across the DIST DIV display The minimum setting is 1 ft div 0 25 meters and the maximum setting is 5000 ft div 1000 meters The selected value is displayed above the control on the LCD 1 6 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operating Instructions POWER PULL ON C PULSE WIDTH lt gt
313. the NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration i U I Figure 6 43 Pulse Height at Four Divisions at 500 ft div 40 Using the POSITION control place the baseline of the waveform on the center graticule 41 Increase VERT SCALE to 30 00 dB 3000 00 ft 42 Using the gt POSITION control scroll along the waveform and verify that all of the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 3000 feet If the instrument fails the aberrations checks potential problems exist the Pulser Sampler circuitry Refer to the Circuit Descriptions chapter and the Troubleshooting section of the Maintenance chapter of this manual Pulse Amplitude Check 1503C MTDR Service Manual If the instrument does not pass the Pulse Amplitude check range and the Impedance Diagnostic might be affected Additionally loss measurements might not be accurate 1 Set the 1503C front panel controls 6 27 Calibration CABLE 10 ft test cable IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 10 00 dB DIST DIV 1 ft div PULSE WIDTH 1000 ns Vp 66 POWER On 2 On the far end of the test cable attach the 50 Q through terminator 3 Then attach the through terminator to Channel 1 of the oscilloscope 4 Set the scope controls Vertical 0 5 Volts div Horizontal Timing 0 2 Us Trigger slope 5 Using the lt gt POSITION control set the distance window to 2 00 ft
314. tics Menu found under the Diagnostics Menu 2 Scroll to Head Alignment Chart and follow the directions 3 Press MENU to exit this diagnostic Figure 6 49 Head Alignment Chart Print 4 There should be approximately six inches of narrow spaced lines and six inches of wide spaced lines The total length of both should be between 10 87 and 12 76 inches Fold the paper at the last narrow spaced line and the two ends should be of equal length half narrow half wide 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration NOTE If the chart recorder does not pass this check refer to the YT 1 YT 1S Chart Recorder Instruction Manual 070 6270 for service information Option 05 Metric Default Check Option 05 requires no check other than to turn on the instrument and see if it displays in meters Instructions for changing the default can be found in the Maintenance chapter of this manual Option 06 Ethernet Adapter Checks NOTE If your instrument does not have Option 06 proceed to the Final Performance Check This procedure is to check the Option 06 circuit board after it has been serviced or repaired If the instrument does not pass this check measurements might be affected for both Ethernet systems and standard cable tests Adjustments for Option 06 are included at the end of this section This procedure should be performed at the time the standard instrument performance checks are performed or
315. tion Menu Option 06 performs three functions m A 50 terminator for the network m Generates DC signal that emulates the 1 05 VDC carrier signal m Generates DC signal that emulates the 1 7 VDC collision signal Before Starting here are some things you should know to make Ethernet tests easier You need Option 06 for testing an active network m Make measurements from the end of a segment m If possible isolate the segment you plan to test Use the shortest pulse width possible m Do not use Auto pulse width mode If it selects the 100 ns or 1000 ns pulse it might disrupt traffic on working networks Use the simplest possible test first m Operate the 1503C on AC power when using the option chart printer m Changes made the menus do not take effect until the instrument is returned to normal operation This prevents erroneous menu selections from creating disruptions m Have the network documentation ready If available have prior TDR profiles of the network that you will be comparing Options and Accessories 4 4 Introduction Basic Test Procedure m If possible turn off repeaters and bridges to other networks to minimize the extent of a possible disruption the 1503C might cause m If you use a jumper cable make sure that it matches the network cable impedance The three foot jumper furnished with the instrument is 50 Q The IEEE 802 3 standard recommends only one earth ground per segment
316. tion and it clips the bottom 1V of signal providing a cleaner output The output driver is also where the output impedance switching is accomplished BY changing the collector load resistance with FET switches the reverse termination changes The networks on the emitter also change to keep the gain and bandwidth of the stage constant This circuitry has two limitations first a variation in the on resistance of the FETs causes slight errors in the termination at low frequencies and second the off capacitance of the switches makes them effectively partially on at high frequencies causing additional termination errors Sequential sampling provides a means to display fast changing signals that are outside the bandwidth capabilities of the vertical display system of the 1503C One single point of a pulse is measured and stored During the next pulse the instantaneous amplitude of the next point on the waveform is measured and stored This process is repeated for 250 pulses to collect a representative waveform Between waveforms the 1503C samples the leading edge of the 2 ns pulse to get data needed for the timebase correction circuit In the 1503C the input signal is first measured by a fast sampler with about 500 MHz of bandwidth The output of the first sampler is re sampled by the second sampler to provide a steady signal for the A to D converter on the Main Board Diodes CR3090 CR3091 CR3092 and CR3093 form a bridge styl
317. to 2 ft div 16 Turn PULSE WIDTH to 10 ns 17 Adjust the pulse height to four major divisions 18 Press STORE 19 Return the NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 1503C MTDR Service Manual F Figure 6 39 Pulse Height at Four Divisions at 2 ft div 20 Move the baseline of the waveform to the center graticule 21 Increase VERT SCALE to 30 00 dB 1 1 3000ft 22 Using the lt gt POSITION control scroll along the waveform and verify that all of the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 30 feet 23 Return the cursor to 2 00 ft 24 Turn NOISE FILTER back to VERT SET REF again 25 Set DIST DIV to 50 ft div 26 Turn PULSE WIDTH to 100 ns 27 Adjust the pulse height to four major divisions 28 Press STORE 29 Return the NOISE FILTER control to 1 avg 6 25 Calibration 6 26 30 Using the POSITION control place the baseline of the waveform on the center graticule 31 Increase VERT SCALE to 30 00 dB _ 300 00 ft 32 Using the POSITION control scroll along the waveform and verify that all of the aberrations are less than four divisions high out to 300 feet 33 Return the cursor to 2 00 ft 34 Turn NOISE FILTER back to VERT SET REF again 35 Set DIST DIV to 500 ft div 36 Turn PULSE WIDTH to 1000 ns 37 Adjust the pulse height to four major divisions 38 Press STORE 39 Return
318. top traffic on the network This might abort many application programs and might cause communications problems This test asserts the 1 05 VDC signal on the network turns off the normal 1503C pulse and sets up the MAX HOLD mode This is intended to help find transceivers that have a faulty Carrier Detect To use this test have the network prepared for disruption and turn the test on via the Ethernet Menu Any traffic observed is being transmitted in spite of a signal simulating a carrier This might be due to a transceiver not asserting its carrier detect line a host not reading its carrier detect line or some other reason This is not unusual with some equipment One way to isolate which units are doing this is to disconnect them one at a time until it stops Collision Test is Off On CAUTION The collision signal will stop traffic on the network This might abort many application programs and might cause communications problems This test is similar to the carrier test except that it asserts a 1 7 VDC signal to simulate a collision on the network The entries in this menu allow you to set up custom tests on networks in addition to the preset ones in the Ethernet Menu This is intended for users who are familiar enough with Ethernet to anticipate the results Changes in this menu can affect the state of other entries that are mutually exclusive or necessary for the chosen entry For example turning on the Collision Output Si
319. ty amp Description 00 5 50 SQ 000PF 5 200V SQ 000PF 5 200V SQ LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 000PF 5 200V SQ UF 80 20 25V UF 80 20 25V LC 0 04UF 20 50V LC 0 04UF 20 50V 1PF 1 100V TUBULAR OOP F 5 50V SQ OOPF 5 50V SQ LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER DI 0 CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER DI LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U UF 80 20 25V LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 10 20 50 SQ LC 0 04UF 20 50 LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U 000PF 5 200V SQ UF 80 20 25V UF 20 50V OOPF 5 50V SQ LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U CAP FXD ELCTLT 10UF 50 20 25W VDC CAP FXD CER DI CAP FXD CER DI 0 CAP FXD CER DI 5 CAP FXD CER 01 1 LC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U O5UF 80 20 50V SQ 1PF 1 100V TUBULAR MI OOP F 5 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2090 50V Z5U CAP FXD CER DI 0 CAP FXD CER 01 1 CAP FXD CER DI 0 5PF 0 1PF 100V 000PF 80 20 200V SQ 1UF 20 50V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 04UF 20 50V CAP FXD CER 01 1 000PF 5 200V SQ CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V Z5U Mfr Code 16546 31433 31433 31433 31433 04222 04222 04222 04222 04222 16546 16546 31433 31433 31433 04222 31433 04222 04222 31433 31433 04222 04222 16546 31433 31433 0 9R5 31433
320. ugh the cable at half the speed of light see Noise Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 1503C MTDR Service Manual Index A Accessories 4 19 Optional 4 19 Standard 4 19 accessories standard 4 19 Altitude Spec 3 3 Battery see Power 1 2 Battery Pack Spec 3 2 BNC Connector 4 19 Bridge 4 3 C Cable Length vs Pulse 1 14 Open 1 15 Short 1 14 Test Procedure 1 13 Distance to Fault 1 13 Horizontal Set Reference 1 22 Reflection Coefficient 1 17 Return Loss 1 16 Store Waveform 1 19 Vertical Set Reference 1 24 View Difference 1 19 View Input 1 18 View Store 1 19 Cable Connection Spec 3 2 Cable Types 1 12 Calibration Adjustment Procedure 6 37 Ist Blow by Compensation 6 54 Equipment Required 6 37 Ethernet Adjustments 6 58 Ethernet Checks 6 31 Carrier Offset Voltage 6 33 Collision Offset Volatge 6 34 DC Impedance 6 35 Equipment Required 6 31 Equipment Setup 6 31 LCD 6 46 Metric Instruments 6 37 Output Impedance 6 56 Power Supply 6 38 Charging Current 6 45 1503C MTDR Service Manual DC Power 6 43 Main Board 12 V 6 42 Power Up 6 38 Range Check 6 41 Voltage Checks 6 38 Pulse Amplitude 6 27 Pulser Sampler Voltages 6 49 Sampling Efficiency 6 51 Timebase Compensation 6 37 Visual Inspection 6 38 General 6 1 Performance Check 6 1 Aberrations 6 23 Auto Pulse Select 6 20 Chart Recorder 6 30 Display Module 6 2 EL Backlight 6 3 L
321. umber Effective Discontd Qty amp Description CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2096 50V ZRU CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2096 50V ZRU CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZR U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2096 50V ZR U CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2096 50V ZRU CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2096 50V ZRU CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 2096 50V ZRU CAP FXD ELCTLT 470UF 50 20 35 AL CAP FXD ELCTLT 470UF 50 20 35 AL CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU CAP FXD CER DI MLC 0 22UF 20 50V ZRU CONN HDR PCB MALE STR 2 X 25 0 1 CTR CONN HDR PCB MALE STR 1 X 36 0 1 CONVERTER DC AC 15V IN 80V AT 400 HZ XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 OHM XSTR PWR MOS P CH 100V 1 0A 0 6 OHM XSTR PWR MOS N CH 60V 0 5A 3 00HM RES FXD METAL FILM 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 5K OHM 1 0 125W RES FXD METAL FILM 100 OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 40 2K OHM 1 0 2W RES VAR NONWW TR RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL R 25K OHM 0 5W CERMET 100 OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES VAR PLASTIC DUAL 10K 10 NO STOPS RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL RES FXD METAL FIL 100K OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W RES FXD FILM 40 2 OHM 1 0 2W 100K OHM 1 0 2W 22526 58050 63312 04713 04713 17856 51668 01121
322. ument 4 Seal with shipping tape or an industrial stapler If you have any questions contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative 1503C MTDR Service Manual xix General Information Contacting Tektronix XX Product Support Service support Toll free Number Postal Address Web site For questions about using Tektronix measurement products call toll free in North America 1 800 833 9200 6 00 a m 5 00 p m Pacific time Or contact us by e mail tm_app_supp tek com For product support outside of North America contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office Tektronix offers a range of services including Extended Warranty Repair and Calibration services Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office for details For a listing of worldwide service centers visit our web site In North America 1 800 833 9200 An operator can direct your call Tektronix Inc Department or name if known P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA www tektronix com 1503 Service Manual Operating Instructions Overview Handling Powering the 1503 1503C MTDR Service Manual The 1503C front panel is protected by a watertight cover in which the standard accessories are stored Secure the front cover by snapping the side latches outward If the instrument is inadvertently left on installing the front cover will turn off the POWER switch automat
323. ument fails this check the waveforms might not look normal If the efficiency is more than 100 the waveforms will appear noisy If the efficiency is below the lower limit the waveform will take longer more pixels to move from the bottom to the top of the reflected pulse This smoothing effect might completely hide some faults that would normally only be one or two pixels wide on the display 1 In the Service Diagnostic Menu select Sampling Efficiency and follow the directions on the screen 2 When done with the test press the MENU button repeatedly until the instrument returns to normal operation If the aberrations are too large they can be confused with minor faults in the cable near the instrument 1 Turn the lt gt POSITION control counterclockwise until the display distance window reads less than 20 00 ft 6 10 m 1503C MTDR Service Manual Operator Performance Checks 1503C MTDR Service Manual 2 Setthe DIST DIV control to 1 ft div 0 25 m div amo Figure 2 9 Distance at 2 00 ft 3 Turn the lt gt POSITION control counterclockwise until the display distance window reads 2 00 ft 0 62 m 4 Set the 1503C front panel controls IMPEDANCE 50 Q NOISE FILTER 1 avg VERT SCALE 0 00 dB PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 5 Connect the 50 Q precision terminator to the front panel 6 Turn the NOISE FILTER control completely counterclockwise to the VERT SET REF position 7 Use VERT SCALE to increase t
324. up Be sure the large capacitor on the bottom of the board clears the two nut blocks on the module side panels If the board or the capacitor binds on either the nut blocks or the chassis side panel screw remove the nut blocks Remove the power supply module and circuit board per previous procedures Remove the three screws holding the side panel on the power supply module Remove the side panel This will provide access to the transformer Unsolder the six wires attached to the power transformer Unsolder the varistor R101 from lugs 4 and 5 Remove the two screws and lock washers holding the power transformer to the chassis Lift out the transformer NOTE When reassembling add a small amount of LocTite to the two transformer mounting screws in step 6 pP Remove the power supply module circuit board and transformer per previous procedures Unsolder the three wires on the filter unit Remove the two screws and the spacer holding the receptacle Remove the filter unit from the rear of the module Remove the power supply module circuit board and transformer per previous procedures Unsolder all four wires from the voltage selector switch Unsolder the two wires from the fuse holder Unscrew the hold down nuts from both untts Remove both units from the rear of the module Maintenance Power Cord Conductor Color Code Removing the Battery Removing the Main Board 7 6 Conductor Color
325. using the carrier sense voltage level while sending out pulses e g Single Sweep with Carrier is On the pulses might exceed the collision or traffic thresholds of the repeater causing it to send back jamming packets that are synchronized with the 1503C This creates an unusual waveform that looks similar to data As a rule repeaters should be shut down prior to testing a segment to prevent such occurrences IS d rer A ah 2 Figure 4 11 System 2 First Tap No Traffic 1 avg 1 ft div 44 5 dB 1503C MTDR Service Manual Options and Accessories 1503C MTDR Service Manual Figure 4 12 n 2 Same Hed with 5 Traffic 1 avg 1 ft div 44 5 dB Wm NM V Figure 4 13 System 2 Same Tap Bereased Avetaging 16 avg 1 ft div 44 5 dB i sae f 742 52 ft Figure 4 14 m 2 Farther Out More Gain 128 avg 10 ft div 53 5 dB 4 13 Options and Accessories 4 14 Figure 4 15 System 2 4000 ft Cable at 10 ns 128 avg 100 ft div 43 75 dB USE S S us ANS Se ae ee eee ca Figure 4 16 Syafei 2 Previous Waveform Expanded 128 avg 20 ft div 54 75 dB 1116 84 ft 0 oe ee Figure 4 17 2 Next CENE of Taps 128 avg 20 ft div 54 75 dB 1503C MTDR Service Manual Options and
326. v PULSE WIDTH 2 ns Vp 99 2 Turn on the instrument The display should look very similar to Figure 6 10 i Figure 6 10 Waveform on the Display with No Cable Attached 3 Connect the 10 ft test cable to the front panel CABLE connector The display should look like Figure 6 11 NOTE If a cable other than the 10 ft test lead with a Vp other than 84 is used the distance numbers in this check will vary 1503C MTDR Service Manual Calibration 1503C MTDR Service Manual 4 Using the lt gt POSITION control set the cursor on the rising edge of the reflected pulse 11 80ft 2 2 hei Figure 6 12 Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse at 5 ft div 5 Change the DIST DIV to 1 ft div and again place the cursor on the rising edge of the reflected pulse The distance window should read between 11 30 and 12 20 ft ec y s eee Figure 6 13 Cursor on Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse at 1 ft div 6 Change the Vp to 84 and reposition the cursor to the rising edge of the reflected pulse The distance window should read between 9 70 and 10 3 ft Figure 6 14 Cursor Rising Edge of Reflected Pulse with at 84 6 9 Calibration 7 Remove the 10 ft cable and connect the 50 Q terminator 8 Setthe DIST DIV control to 5000 ft div 9 Change the PULSE WIDTH to 1000 ns 10 Rotate the gt POSITION control clockwise until the dis
327. vironment d Chart Diagnostics Menu offers various tests for the optional chart recorder i LCD Chart allows adjusting the number of dots per segment and the number of prints strikes per segment ii Head Alignment Chart generates a pattern to allow mechanical alignment of the optional chart recorder View Stored Waveform Settings displays the instrument settings for the stored waveform Option Port Menu contains three items Two items allow configuration of the option port for communicating with devices other than the optional chart recorder and one item test the option port a Option Port Diagnostic creates a repeating pattern of signals at the option port to allow service technicians to verify that all signals are present and working correctly b Set Option Port Timing allows adjustment of the data rate used to communicate with external devices The timing rate between bytes can be set from about 0 05 to 12 8 milliseconds c Option Port Debugging Is Off On Off is quiet On is verbose This chooses how detailed the error message reporting will be when communi cating with an external device Itis possible to connect the instrument to a computer through a parallel interface with a unique software driver Because different computers vary widely in processing speed the instrument must be able to adapt to differing data rates while communicating with those computers With user developed software drivers the ability to obtain
328. y This block transfer takes place in about 17 ms During thew block transfer the controller cannot access display memory and therefore sends null data to the screen Because the LCD display is non emitting a light source is needed for low light applications This source is provided by an electroluminescent EL backlight behind the transflector The EL backlight is a long life device requiring a 130 VAC 400 Hz supply This supply is routed from the Front Panel Board through the 40 pin connector to pads on the Row Driver Controller Board The leads on the backlight are then attached to these pads CAUTION The pads for the EL backlight are exposed when the display module is removed from the front panel They operate from a high voltage source Do not turn on the backlight when the pads are exposed Because the LCD display response time slows down rapidly at temperatures below 10 a heater is required to maintain the temperature of the LCD cell at 10 C when the ambient temperature falls below 10 C The heating element is a resistive plating of indium tin oxide ITO on the back side of the row pane This plating has a resistance of about 64 The power for the heater is supplied through the 40 pin connector to pads on the Row Driver Controller Board similar to those for the EL backlight A thermistor RT1030 is attached to the lip of the row pane opposite the cable This thermistor is used to track the temperature of t

Service Manual 1503C Metallic Time

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents